Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
p- 6 3 8 0 0
December 1985
Report EP-63800
MANUAL
FOR WELLSITE
STRA TIGRAPHERS
BY
This document is confidential. Neither the whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to any third party without the prior written consent of
Shellinternationale The copyright document
prior written
Petroleum
Maatschappij
is vested
B.V.,
The Hague,
the Netherlands.
Maatschappij B.V., The Hague, the Netherlands. All rights reserved. Neither the whole nor any
in Shelllntemationale retrieval
Petroleum or transmitted
may be reproduced,
of the
stored in any
copyright
system
(electronic,
mechanical,
reprographic,
recording
or otherwise)
owner.
Report
EP-63800
December 1985
MANUAL
FOR WELLSITE
STRATIGRAPHERS
BY
P.J.C.
HOOGKAMER
(SIPM-EP /121)
Contents
Page
INTRODUCTION PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTABILITIES
1 3
1.
FOR WELLSITE
DUTIES
4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 9 10 11 11 12 12 12 12 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 18 18 18 19 19
General Well proposal Drilling programme Stratigraphical reference collection EP/11 / OPCO's requirements and lines Responsibilities at the we11site Safety Laboratory equipment Rig jargon Mental preparation
of communication
2.
ROCK
SAMPLE
HANDLING
General' Cuttings Sidewall samples (SWS) Cores Bit-, Logging too1-, JunksubCore slices from the MCT
and Junkbasket
samples
3.
STRATIGRAPHIC
INVESTIGATION
& REPORTING
AT THE WELLSITE
3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 3.2.4.2 3.2.4.3 3.2.4.4 3.2.4.5 3.2.4.6 3.3
General
Investigation Lithology Biostratigraphy Palaeontology Palynology Nannoplankton Environment of deposition Wire1ine logs
General
Lithology from wire1ine logs Environment of deposition from wire1ine logs Structural geological data from wire1ine logs Porosity and Permeability from wireline logs Source Rocks from wire1ine logs Reporting
II
4.
SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS
Page 20
20 20 21
General
Biostratigraphic investigations by SIPM EP/121 Source rock investigations by KSEPL
5.
TEAM
WORK
22
General
Assistance to the Petroleum Hydrocarbon detection Wire line logging Assistance to the mudlogger
Engineer (PE)
22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 27 27 27 27 28
6.1
6.2 6.3
General Timing
Contents Geological summary Well prognosis Stratigraphy Structural results Petrophysical evaluation of potential reservoirs Source rock potential Conclusions and recommendations Appendices (/Textfigures) and Enclosures Appendices Stratigraphical summary table Time-stratigraphical subdivision Core description Sidewall sample description Enclosures Well summary data sheet Well completion log Master log (or drilling speed log) Stratigraphical data sheet Geophysical well data sheet/T-Z Graph Well correlation
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.1.1 6.4.1.2 6.4.1.3 6.4.1.4 6.4.2 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5 6.4.2.6
REFERENCES
APPENDICES
General
Number Gen. 1 Gen. 2 Gen. 3
Time-Stratigraphic table Stratigraphic terminology First- and second-order global cycles in the Phanerozoic Global transgression/regression & Cenozoic Conversion table Alphabet - Radio callwords
III
Preparation
for Duties
1.9.4 1.9.5
Example of well prognosis Checklist of recommended wellsite laboratory equipment and consumables List of recommended equipment and consumables for palynological investigations at the wellsite Example of wellsite laboratory Recommended equipment for a palaeontological laboratory Sketch of lay-out for a small geological laboratory Drilling programme, Major components of the drilling rig Diagrammatic view of rotary drilling rig Rig manpower, Mud treating equipment, Casing scheme Mud circulation Diagram of self-supported platform
Rock
Sample
Handling
of sampling procedures of master log of contractor's master log penetration curve (drilling speed log) terminology of correlation.beiween drilling speed log and
sampling
Investigation
& Reporting
3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.3 3.2.1.4 3.2.1.5 3.2.1.6 3.2.1.7 3.2.1.8 3.2.1.9 3.2.1.10 3.2.1.11 3.2.1.12 3.2.1.13 3.2.1.14 3.2. 1. 15
Percentage chart of a rocktype in a tray of cuttings Guide for lithological descriptions of sedimentary rocks ("TAPEWORM") Example of cutting sample description sheet Example of sidewall sample description sheet Example of core description sheet Routine sediment determination, example A Routine sediment determination, example B Rock/Mineral identification tests Classification of siliciclastic rocks Classification of carbonate rocks Checklist for carbonate rock description Classification of carbonate particles other than whole fossils Charts for estimating particle percentages Key to identification of skeletal grains in thin sections Key to identification of non-skeletal grains
IV
Staining techniques for carbonate rocks Preparation of thin sections from drill cuttings Porosity in carbonate rocks Charts for estimating porosity Grainsize, sorting/porosity, permeability relationship EPIPAL input sheet for rock sample & fossil data Instruction for filling up EPIPAL input sheet for rock sample and fossil data Palaeontological sample preparation by the "Petrol Preparation of thin sections of isolated large~ foraminifera Standard preparation method of rock samples for palynological investigation Coal rank classification and organic metamorphism Nannoplankton investigation at the wellsite Method"
3.2.2.3.1 3.2.3.1 3.2.3.2 3.2.3.3 3.2.3.4 3.2.3.5 3.2.3.6 3.2.3.7 3.2.3.8 3.2.3.9 3.2.3.10
3.2.3.11 3.2.3.12 3.2.4.2.1 3.2.4.2.2
Depth distribution of selected recent benthonic foraminifera genera Generalized ecological data for selected living benthonic foraminifera genera Summary of living benthonic foraminiferid distributions and their application to palaeoecology Distribution of depositional t.extures in carbonate environments Distribution of skeletal particles in carbonate environments Distribution of non-skeletal particles in carbonate environments Distribution of sedimentary structures in carbonate environments of bedding in carbonate environments Distribution Distribution of minerals in carbonate environments Distribution of early diagensis in carbonate environments Distribution of late diagenesis in carbonate environments Environmental classification scheme Wire-line log values/responses of single mineral lithologies and common rock types Lithology from overlays of porosity logs
Characteristic gamma ray (SP) log shapes in clastics and their potential environmental significance Common reservoir sand types and their characteristic GR (SP) log profiles, as well as other significant features Depositional environment of sand (stones) with "cylinder" shaped GR (SP) patterns determined by the fauna from the enclosing clays
Examples of GR (SP) log patterns of balanced environmental conditions GR (SP) log patterns indicative of regression/transgression supported by faunal evidence Quick reference dictionary of dipmeter patterns Correlation between Gamma-Ray and porosity logs Source rock log expression Nomogram for source rocks detection on wireline Example of the lithological report the daily drilling report/telex Stratigraphical well data sheet. by the
logs i~
mud logger,
Special
Investigations
Addresses Rock sampling for palynological fer investigation detection of (non post-
Pyrolysis mature)
Team Work
5.2.1
Hydrocarbon
detection
in
rock
samples.
Final
Well
Report table
Stratigraphical Time-stratigraphical Example Example Example Example T-Z Graph of heading of heading of of
summary
contractor's stratigraphical
Abbreviations
7.1
7.2
for
Lithological lithological
Descriptions descriptions
7.3 7.4
VI
Transparent
charts
8.1
8.2
8.3 8.4
Porosity)
Compensated) Sonic)
Compensated
Introduction
1 -
INTRODUCTION Adequate collection and analysis of geological/stratigraphical data from rock samples at the wellsite is essential for a reliable evaluation of the subsurface geology, despite the availability of modern, high quality wireline logs, whose value can only be fully realised, if lithology is properly recorded. Consequently, greatest care should be exercised to capture all stratigraphical data right at the source. Therefore a close supervision of the well sample handling and an on the spot stratigraphical analysis of these samples must be ensured. These duties are best carried out by a wellsite stratigrapher, who is also able to interpret all the data, e.g establish the age, environment of deposition and reservoir properties of the penetrated strata. This allows a fast reconstruction of the subsurface at an early stage, which is essential in the optimisation of the drilling operation and might influence the programme, probably saving many times the cost of the on-the-spot stratigraphical advice. Opco's running their own exploration laboratory normally send a member of their own staff to the wellsite. However, small exploration companies, without their own laboratory (e.g. one-hole ventures), often require the services of a wellsite stratigrapher from SIPM-EP/121, who may be the only exploration representative in the area. In some cases the team geologist or review geologist may be called upon. This manual is addressed to all of them. The functioning of the drilling operations is of course essentially the responsibility of the drilling and petroleum engineering departments. However, the wellsite stratigrapher ensures that the right action is taken to prevent loss of data at the collecting point and that new geological data are considered in the ongoing effort to optimise operations. In this respect communication is of prime importance. Generally the wellsite geologist/ stratigrapher is directly responsible to the operations manager (OM), but he is usually asked to report to the chief petroleum engineer (CPE). Besides he must have, wherever possible, a direct line of communication with the nearest competent exploration office, to enable him to discuss the interpretation and consequences of his findings. His principal accountabilities are lined up and dealt with in this manual, which is also meant to provide a general guideline for his job and to acquaint him with particular procedures and problems that might be encountered at the wellsite. A set of appendices has been compiled with a "toolkit" during investigations to furnish the wellsite stratigrapher and subsequent reporting. of company list. handouts and
In compiling this manual free use has been made reports which are incorporated in the reference Users are encouraged to submit useful additions.
2 -
KEYWORDS: Exploration drilling, lithostratigraphy, biostratigraphy, wellsite reporting, litho/rock/time unit subdivision, rock sample handling / examination, lithological description, cutting/sidewall sample/core description, palaeontology, palynology, environment of deposition, wire line log interpretation, source rock investigation, geochemical investigation, well resume, well summary data sheet, well completion log, wellsite laboratory equipment.
P "ncipal Accountabilities
PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTABILITIES
The tasks/duties of a wellsite stratigrapher are:
1) prior to starting his duties at the wellsite, to acquire a sound knowledge of the regional and local stratigraphy and to be up-to-date with the prognosis, drilling programme and target of the well, the reporting requirements of the operating company (OPCO) and SIPM, the basic drilling/wellsite terminology and safety rules,
collection
initial
investigation
and dispatch
of
3) to establish the stratigraphy of the penetrated sequence and to advise the OPCO (if present in first instance the expl. dept.) and/or SIPM, EP/11 (EP/121) as directly and immediately as possible on all relevant stratigraphical/geological matters, especially at critical stages of the well when stratigraphical information may influence the operations,
4) to initiate special stratigraphical/geochemical investigations of selected sample material (to be performed by EP/121/KSEPL), when routine wellsite examination does not provide all information required, and, if necessary to recommend special sampling and/or logging programmes (e.g. coring or intermediate logging) particularly in connection with the decision on total depth (TD) ,
close cooperation with the petroleum engineer, and assist, if necessary, e.g. in HC detection,
6) to contribute resume.
to the compilation
of the geological
part
of the well
1. Preparation
For Duties
-41.
1.1 PREPARATION FOR WELLSITE DUTIES
General
Prior to starting his duties at the wellsite, the stratigrapher has to acquaint himself with the geology of the area. This will best be achieved by : visits to and discussion with area geologists and seismologists (EP/11,12) and/or the Opco's exploration department. digesting well proposals. reading pertinent literature. compiling a concise dossier with all relevant data (incl. pertinent literature) and information (e.g. well proposis, seismic sections, logs and other data from neighbouring wells, outcrop data, etc.)
1.2
Well
proposal proposal issued by the Opco and/or data EP/11 presents, as a rule of a prospect zones.
A well
that justify
drilling problem
it is of prime
to obtain own copy of this document and study it carefully. to register all potential markes horizons, e.g. tops of distinctive lithological units and fossil occurrences, contracts, etc. to list and evaluatedephts/intervals that require special attention by the wellsite stratigrapher e.g coring-, casing-, and total depth. to discuss with the Opco/EP/11 the action to be taken, in case the encountered stratigraphy deviates from the one prognosed. to obtain a good feeling for the confidence level of the prognosis i.e. to appreciate the areas of uncertainty and speculation jn the geological prognosis. This can only be achieved through personal discussion with the full range of specialists (geologists, seismic interpreters, stratigraphers) involved in the preparation of the well proposal.
1.3
Drilling
programme
Although the wellsite stratigrapher has no control or responsibility for drilling operations as such, he must always be prepared to cooperate and assist wherever possible. Hence he has to acquaint himself with the essential details of the operations by careful study of the drilling programme (see also Appendix 1.9.1) with the aim to : evaluate possibilities for an early indication of casing/coring points (and possible TD) based on the encountered stratigraphy check the various sampling and logging programmes to ensure that all requirements for a reliable geological evaluation are met.
5 -
1.4
Stratigraphical
reference
collection
If material from adjacent wells and/or surface sections is available a wellsite reference collection of marker rock types and faunal/floral index microfossils should be assembled. In case such material is not available, literature has to be searched and an album with illustrations, descriptions and ranges of the more important lithologies and microfossils likely to be encountered has to be compiled.
requirements
and lines
of communication
It is imperative to discuss EP/11's and the Opco's requirements for the evaluation of information and time and type of reporting of the stratigraphical data from the wellsite, as well as requirements for geological/stratigraphical part of the well resume. To avoid work duplication these requirements have to be tuned to each other right from the beginning. Moreover, it must be clearly established who will be the exploration"focal point (in the Opco or in SIPM) with whom the wellsite stratigrapher will be able to communicate directly. (In a Opco environment this would normally be the operations geologist.) As stated before (p. 1) the routine line of communication is through the Chief Petroleum Engeneer and Operations Manager. Besides, however, the wellsite stratigrapher must whenever possible also have a direct line of communication to the focal point of the exploration organisation to allow effective utili~ation of the geological interpretation. The use of this line of communication, however, should be minimused, and only used in geologically critical/sensitive situations, where the wellsite stratigrapher feels that direct communication could be important for a) further optimisation of the operation, or b) improved interpretation of observations made. In order to avoid communication problems, the information directly given to the exploration focal point must be copied also through the routine line of communication, i.e. through the CPE and OM.
1.6 Responsibilities
at the wellsite
The responsibilities and reporting lines of the various functions at the wellsite, including those of the "wellsite geologists" are normally spelled out in the drilling programme. These wellsite geologists are usually mudlogging contractors or junior geologis~s in charge of the lithological description of the samples only. As responsibilities and authority of a wellsite stratigrapher, however, reach generally much further, it is important to carefully discuss responsibilities, reporting procedures and authority with the operations manager (OM) and inform him on the instructions received from EP/11 in
1.7
Safety
The the to his wellsite stratigrapher rig safety regulations safety by establishing laboratory. has to familiarize himself with and adhere to and procedures. Moreover he will contribute non-hazardous and bealtby working conditions in
1.8 Laboratory
equipment
A list of principal items required for stratigrapbical investigations at tbe wellsite is presented in Appendix 1.8.1 (and 1.8.2 for palynological investigations). An example of a wellsite laboratory is given in Appendix
-
1.8.3.
In good time before to be taken: tbe departure to the wellsite tbe following action has
check witb tbe Opco (PE) wbicb of tbe items required, are already available at tbe wellsite or will be supplied by tbe mud-logging contractor Order tbe remainder tbrough SIPM EP/121, as soon as possible. Tbe latter items normally have to be carried safeband.
If a geological/palaeontological laboratory bas to be set up at the base camp, reference is made to tbe more comprehensive equipment list in Appendix 1.8.4 and the lay-out sketch for a small laboratory in Appendix 1.8.5.
1.9
Rig jargon To establish good cooperation at tbe wellsite the stratigrapber has to have a basic knowledge of the rig jargon, i.e. he bas to know tbe rig, tbe names of its most important parts, and bow tbey function (See Appendix 1.9.1-1.9.5). Moreover be bas to acquire a basic understanding of tbe various operations and tbeir abbreviations used for reporting. Abbreviations of terms commonly used at the wellsite and in wellsite reporting are presented in Appendix 7.3. It is recommended to read "Geological Prospecting of Petroleum" by H.BECKMANN (See Ref.)
1.10 Mental
preparation
It is advisable to prepare yourself mentally: at tbe wellsite you are on call 24 hrs a day and working conditions migbt cause a certain degree of bardsbip.
2.
ock Sa
pie
andling
I)
L.
ROCK
SAMPLE
HANDLING
2.1
General
Samples are collected to evaluate the stratigraphy (lithology, age and depositional environment) and the hydrocarbon potential (source-, reservoir-, and cap rock properties) of the penetrated formations. The sampling programme has to be designed accordingly. The instruction for the sampling procedures at the wellsite is normally issued by the Opco. However, since the wellsite stratigrapher or EP/121 are usually asked to provide this instruction an example is given in Appendix 2.1.1. Collecti~n, initial description and shipment of all rock samples are carried out by the mud-logging contractor, supervised by the petroleum engineer (PE). Interfering with these routine procedures is only necessary if the prescribed sampling procedures are not adhered to (e.g. incorrect labelling) or if additional samples are required for stratigraphical reasons. The mud-logging unit prepares the rate of penetration, lithology of "percentage log"), an interpreted shows and other useful data. (for Rate of penetration Appendix 2.2.3. curve masterlog, a the cuttings lithological examples see speed log) document displaying (in %) (="mud log" or column, hydrocarbon Appendix 2.2.1 - 2.2.2.) terminology is documented in
(drilling
Appendix 2.2.4 gives an example of correlating the drilling the "mudlog" to define tops of lithological units.
spee9
log with
Until wireline logs are available, the masterlog is used for correlation with neighbouring wells. The actual handling of the various type of samples is dealt with in the next chapters.
2.2
Cuttings Handling Check regularly whether cuttings are indeed properly sampled, and watch whether the shaker screen has been thoroughly cleaned after sample collection to ensure that the next accumulation of cuttings only contains "fresh" material. Generally, cuttings samples are labelled with the depth corrected for time lag, viz. the true depth-level the material is calculated to originate from. The time lag is calculated by the mudlogger or PE (Appendix 2.2.5). If the correction for time lag cannot be accomplished, cuttings samples have to be collected from the shaker at drillers' depth. This "collected depth" is later corrected for time lag by the PE to determine the "corrected depth"... Disadvantages of this method are, that samples are not regularily spaced (because of variable penetration rates) and an incorrect depth is stated on the sample bags. Label properly also the (small) samples used for your own investigation with well name and sample depth.
- 8 -
For rinsing cuttings tbe "decantation" metbod is recommended: place tbe sample in a container, fill it up witb water and stir. Decant tbe dirty water and repeat tbis process until tbe water remains reasonably clean. Treating soft clays, take care not to remove all tbe clay with the mud. Cbeck the quality of tbe initial cuttings descriptions by tbe mudlogger. In case corrections or improvements are necessary inform tbe PE or tbe mudlogger directly. Encourage the latter to establish a reference collection of the various litbologies penetrated. Avoid overheating (>60oC) geochemical investigations hydrocarbons) .' when drying samples destinated/selected (or well-site cbecks on lighter for
collection
of representative
lithologies
as
No samples,
or only
a few,
can be obtained
from
the shale
shaker
when:
drilling poorly consolidated sediments (some representative material may then be collected from the desanders/desitters or by holding a fine sieve in the mud stream) soft clay is taken up in drilling mud drilling with lost circulation drilling in salt with fresh-water mud turbodrilling; this often yields more or. less unrecognizable sludges
rather than cuttings. Similar powdering may result from regrinding of
.
Unrepresentative
samples
may
(also)
be due to:
strong caving of tbe borebole wall spreading: different lithologies may yield different cbipsizes travelling at different speeds cindering (burning/fusing) of bard claystones (e.g. wben turbodrilling with diamond bit). Tbis produces cuttings resembling volcanic rocks contamination:
cement
fragments of up-bole casing sboe formation cemented-in below
material (LCM) fragments of drilling equipment re-circulated particles (e.g. microfossils) particles present in new drilling-mud alteration of samples during drying or storage, e.g. microfossils + pyrite can react to form .gypsum
lost-circulation
calcite
of
Sampling at closer intervals than specified in the drilling be recommended when e.g.: the lithologies penetrated are very varied the drill approaches a formation to be cored a prospective interval is penetrated.
programme
may
2.3
Sidewall
Samples
Time is limited; when the last logging tool comes out, the SWS gun goes down. PEls desiderata: he usually wants to sample reservoir rocks and strata with oil shows. Your own reasons why/where to take SWS: lithology: space samples in such a way as to achieve maximum strata definition and log calibration - source rocks (for selection see Appendices 3.2.4.6.1 and 3.2.4.6.2) - reservoirs and shows; co-ordinate with PE - microfossils (age or environment). Select the depth levels for the SWS you want on the 1:200 logs; ask PE which log will be used as reference during the shooting. For depth control during sidewall sampling see Appendix 2.3.1. Gun-runs need planning. When many SWS are needed more than one gun (or gun-assembly) has to be run. Keep in mind that: - deteriorating hole conditions may limit or prohibit subsequent runs (or necessitate a round-trip); priority-samples are therefore to be shot during the first run. - some spare capacity is required in last run to cope with possible non-recoveries of previous run(s). - closely spaced samples are usually best taken in different runs. - logging engineer may have to mount different charges or bullets if the hardness of the rocks varies strongly. Advise on lithology and hardness of formations.
damages borehole walls. Lost bullets may severely or even cause the drilling string to become stuck.
Handling Gun should be cleaned and bullet-cables disentangled before engineer takes samples out of bullets. Attend or supervise removal of the samples from the bullets assignment of the shot numbers. Samples recovered, gun/run-numbers, misfires, lost bullets, recorded properly (PE responsible in first instance). The following terms are used:
logging
and check should be
- 10 -
(bullets) (samples)
fired: recovered:
refers to the number of attempts by the logging engineer to take samples in one run. All bullets containing some rock material, regardless of length. failure of the powder charge to ignite. recovered bullet not containing any sample. bullet remaining in the hole, either shot-off in a washout or stuck in the formation.
Each sample container should be labelled with a waterproof felttip marker, showing well name, core depth and shotnumber. Furthermore the shot number and/or depth should be scratched on the metal lid of the sample container.
Samples of less than cm (excluding mudcake) are generally not accepted by the PE. In particular cases, however, (e.g. poor recovery due to hardness of the formation) it is advisable to accept undersized samples and discuss the billing (e.g. two undersized samples are billed as one).
If the recovery is poor or essential samples are missing or samples are mixed up during the discharge of the gun, insist on running an additional gun, but note before the operational base has been consulted. Samples must despatch. Impact e.g.: be described at well-site (main lithology and shows) before
lithology:
shooting
may
drastically
alter
texture
o~ formation
reduce grain-size in sandstone. convert tight limestone to chalk-like Take drilling (microfossil) mud samples for each contamination.
SWS operation
2.4
Cores
The core handling 2.4.1. procedure at the wellsite is spelled out in Appendix
Coring point criteria are established to facilitate the decision when start actually coring an interval specified in the drilling programme. They may consist of the expected: (updated) top of the interval drilling break change in lithology hydrocarbon shows
to
11 -
are generally cut only when fair hydrocarbon reservoir properties have been encountered. purposes is usually carried out in appraisal
wells.
In case of coring a potential hydrocarbon adhere to the following procedure: halt drilling immediately after reservoir it is recommended to
the expected
drilling
break
base
if one of them is poor the next step is dicussed with the base. (The next step might be drilling another few metres and repeating the above procedure). When cutting a core for stratigraphical purposes at the top of a particular formation, the above procedure is followed and coring starts once the required lithology has been identified in the cuttings samples. Examine the cuttings comming up during the actual coring to collect preliminary information on the lithological composition of the core. A brief description has to be reported to the operational base soonest~
2.5
Bit-,
logging
tool-.
junk
basket
2.6
Core
slices
from
the MCT
After evaluation of the wire line logs, core slices can be cut with a mechanical core slicer (MCT= Mechanical Coring Tool) from the borehole wall over intervals of particular interest, e.g. for petrophysical or stratigraphical evaluation. The tool is normally positioned with the Gamma Ray log. The triangular slices are labelled and marked like normal cores and packed in special triangular containers supplied by Schlumberger. Note that taking core slices has to be planned in advance, because MCT's are normally not on the rig.
3. Investigation
&
eporting
3.
3.1
STRATIGRAPHICAL INVESTIGATION
12
ON THE WELLSITE
& REPORTING
General
The stratigrapher
should collect as much stratigraphical information as possible at the wellsite to construct an accurate and meaningfull record of the penetrated strata for the evaluation of the prospect at an early stage, so that consequent possible changes in operations can be carried out in time (e.g. additional coring, intermediate logging, etc.). Guid~lines how to describe the sediments and how to establish time and type of deposition, as well as the recommended reporting of the obtained data, are given in this chapter.
3.2 3.2.1
Investigations
Lithology
The wellsite stratigrapher obtains the best knowledge of the strata penetrated by describing all rock samples himself and not relying on the initial description of the mudloggers who usually record the main lithologies only. Moreover, due to the personal bias lithologies may change sometimes with the crew change. It is recommended to instruct the mudloggers to layout a separate set of slightly rinsed cuttings samples (approx. one table spoon per sample), preferably in five cell examination trays. This enables you to carry out your own investigations at any time. Starting the examination, wet the cuttings and pour off the superfluous water together with any fine contaminants (powdered rock or mud) masking the true texture of the rock. Scan the samples for lithological breaks and then start the detailed examination under the microscope. When describing the cuttings remember that:
Cuttings are usually contaminated with a variable amount of caving and drilling mud and sometimes with lost-circulation material, cement or fragments of drilling equipment. Ask the PE/mudboy to supply you with a sample of all mud-additives that might show up in the cuttings (e.g. nutshells, used to cure loss of circulation) Cuttings may be pulverized by regrinding or crushing and erroneously be logged as chalky limestone or soft anhydrite. Cuttings may be burned and fused (especially when drilling a very tight formation or drilling hard shales with a diamond bit) and become dark and hard and resemble igneous rock.
To distinquish the autochthonous lithology from caving/contamination apply the information from the prognosis, the regional geology, the drilling speed log, tool samples, and at a later stage, the wireline sidewall samples and cores.
also logs,
13 -
First, describe the various lithologies (for abbreviations see Appendix 7.1) then establish the percentage of each lithology in the sample. For percentage estimation charts see Appendix 3.2.1.1. For the order of description of the various lithologies follow the sequence as presented on page 1 of the tapeworm (Appendix 3.2.1.2) and the description sheets (see Appendix 3.2.1.3 - 3.2.1.5) for the actual description. To establish the rock type follow the procedures for routine sediment determination presented in Appendix 3.2.1.6 and 3.2.1.7 and if necessary carry out the required rock identification tests (see Appendix 3.2.1.8). For a minor lithological change do not establish a new rock type but rather incorporate it in the existing description (e.g. limestone, locally argillaceous). For the classification of siliciclastic and carbonate rocks see Appendix 3.2.1.9 and 3.2.1.10 respectively. For the description of clastics see the tapeworm (Appendix 3.2.1.2) page 2,3,11,13 and 14, and for
3.2.1.16. To obtain details of the texture and particles of carbonates it might be necessary to thin section a few selected cuttings (for this preparation see Appendix 3.2.1.17.) For the description of porosities classification and also identify 3.2.1.18 and 3.2.1.19. Note that samples than in wet ones. in carbonates use the Archie the type of porosity, see Appendix it is easier to recognize pores in dry
Porosities in clastics are usually intergrannular and controlled primarily by the textural properties, sorting, grainsize, shape, roundness and packing, (e.g. the better the sorting the higher the porosity). Porosity estimates in clastics (see Appendix 3.2.1.19) as well as in carbonates are best reported in terms of poor (5 - 10%), fair-good (10 - 20%) and very good> 20%. Permeability, a measure of the capacity of a rock for transmitting a fluid, can not be established by microscopic examination. However, the speed with which water is absorbed by a rock is an indication of its relative permeability (e.g. water will stand up in a bead on a completely impermeable rock). For clastics: the better the sorting and the coarser the grains, the higher the permeability. The permeability estimates (see also Appendix 3.2.1.20) are best reported in terms of poor
( 5 md, millidarcy's)
(100-1000 md)
fair (5
The Standard Legend "informal" abbreviations (see Appendix 7.1) are most suitable for the routine lithological description at the wellsite and the subsequent reporting. For storing data on computer files (for EPIPAL see Appendix 3.2.1.21 and 3.2.1.22) the computer abbreviation (see Appendix 7.2 and 3.2.1.2) have to be applied. After the examination the samples are dried and stored in small plastic bags in a washresidue box and kept on the rigsite as a reference set.
3.2.2 3.2.2.1
Biostratigraphy
14
Palaeontology
Detailed palaeontological investigations cannot normally be carried out at the wellsite due to the time constraint. Therefore the samples to be examined have to be selected very carefully, e.g. samples that contain a high For percentage of "new" lithologies. of the material the procedure is as
the preparation
and examination
follows:
a)
for slightly or non-consolidated rocks and consolidated fine clastics: - rinse the cuttings - if necessary, dry and crush if time available, soak or boil in water (or for harder shales use the petrol method see Appendix 3.2.2.1.1) wash the sample through two (20 and 200 mesh) or three sieves (20, 100 & 200 mesh)
sieve it through a set of table sieves examine and pick the various fractions (isolated larger foraminifera might have
to be thinsectioned
or
3.2.2.1.2).
When investigating a thick monotonous sequence of soft rocks it is time saving to prepare a combined sample be using e.g. a tea spoon of cuttings from samples at 20 m spacing over a 100 m interval. If a faunal break is discovered in such a sample the actual depth of the break has to be traced by examination of the individual samples.
b)
for hard consolidated rocks: rinse the cuttings examine them wet under the microscope with the same magnification as for the investigation of thin sections. In carbonates, etching the cuttings by dipping them for a few seconds in 10% HCL and in water there-after, may facilitate the recognition of microfossils and particles. - select if necessary "the most promising" pieces for thinsectioning (see appendix 3.2.1.17)
The time stratigraphical subdivision of the penetrated sequence is established by comparing the encountered microfossils with the wellsite reference collection (see 1.4), your pocket collections and/or literature data from surounding areas. The more detailed palaeontological studies are usually carried out at SIPM (EP/121) at a later stage.
- 15 3.2.2.2
Palynology Palynological investigations are carried out on a routine basis at the wellsite in particular cases only (e.g. in areas with mainly terrestrial sediments). They are performed by a palynologist or a stratigrapher with a sound palynological background. The standard preparation method of rock samples for palynological investigation is presented in Appendix 3.2.2.2.1 and the coal rank classification and organic metamorphism table in Appendix 3.2.2.2.2. In case no palynological investigations have been carried out (see also chapter 4 "special investigations") it is still advisable to evaluate with EP/121 the desirability of a palynological investigation over particular intervals. Note that the wellsite palynologist is usually occupied fully with palynological sample preparation and analyses as his prime duty. If time available he will monitor activities as outlined in this manual.
3.2.2.3
Nannoplankton
studies
These studies are usually not carried out at the wellsite because of lack of a high power microscope, reaching a magnification of at least 1000 times. However if such a microscope is present for palynological investigations, it is recommended to check the marine sediments on their nannoplankton content. For the preparation of the material and the observation method reference is made to Appendix 3.2.2.3.1.
3.2.3.
Environment
of deposition
A preliminary interpretation of the environment of deposition of the penetrated sequence can be achieved at the wellsite based mainly on the encountered fossil assemblages and the lithology. For the interpretation of the depositional environment based on isolated foraminifera (mainly from clastic sediment) see Appendices 3.2.3.1,
3.2.3.2
and 3.2.3.3
3.2.3.4
3.2.3.11.
See also paragraph 3.2.4.3: Environment of deposition from wire line logs. For the Group's terminology reference is made to the "Environmental Classification Scheme" (Appendix 3.2.3.12) The subsequent detailed study is carried out in the laboratory and reported in the final well report.
3.2.4 3.2.4.1
Wireline
logs
General
The relationship between the wireline log responses and stratigraphical parameters is evident. The wireline logs can be used for a "quick look" interpretation as soon as they become available and for subsequent more detailed stratigraphical evaluation. The "quick look" interpretation usually proves that the reported levels of stratigraphical boundaries based on cuttings have to be revised to match the wireline logs.
- 16 -
The updated stratigraphical subdivision operational base (and EP/11, SIPM). Before studying the wire1ine logs:
-
has
to be reported
to the
mark washouts
log/tools/programs
(for abbreviations
3.2.4.2
Lithology
from wire1ine
Lithology
GR
SONIC
DENSITY
RESISTIVITY
Clay/Shale Coal
low high
For further details see Appendix 3.2.4.2.1. For the lithological interpretation of the wire1ine logs the transparent "Wire1ine Log Response Charts", Appendices 8.1-8.4 useful.
are
Gamma
Ray Log
(GR)
The GR is a good tool to separate clay, claystones and shales from other lithologies. The content of radioactive compounds in clay, claystones and shales is generally high (giving, high GR readings) compared to that in sands, carbonates, evaporites and coals. There are exceptions: high GR readings are obtained in sands containing relatively high concentrations of mica, zircon or glauconite and in potassium salts.
Potential showing
Curve
clay membrane effects) can also be used for "shale" (+) / non-"shale"
(-) separation. The log, however, is useless in oi1based mud or if there is insufficient contrast between the salinity of the mud and the formation water. In salt-water-based mud readings may even be reversed. Moreover the tool is rather sensitive to hole size.
17 -
CNL)
Neutron logs basically record the hydrogen content of the formation. Therefore they can be used to identify shale/clay (stone) units which because of clay bound water generally give higher readings than (porous) sands/carbonates.
Sonic
Log
(BHC)
The Sonic log measures the velocity of sound waves in terms of transit time (microseconds per foot or m). It indicates "shale" and "shalyness" due to its sensitivity to the low sound transfer in clay minerals. It is sensitive to wash-outs.
Formation
Density
Log
(FDC, LDT)
The density tool measures essentially the electron density of the formation, which is related to the true bulk density expressed in gr/cm3. For identification of lithologies it is used in combination with the GR and for crossplotting (overlay) with the Neutron and Sonic. The overlays are discussed below.
Density
(FDC of LDT)
/ Neutron
(SNP or CNL)
overlay
This is a good method to identify lithologies (see Appendix 3.2.4.2.2). The Neutron Log is considered to indicate (in non-"shales") the hydrogene content of the pores, thus recording porosity. The Density log is considered to indicate the density of the frame work. Therefore, for the same porosity different rock types give different density readings. Overlaying a transparency of the Neutron over the Density (or vice versa) and aligning the limestone porosity scales of
the two logs, by overlying the density line of 15% porous limestone
2.45g/cm3 over the 15% porosity line on the neutron shows that a variety of different and characteristic separations for the main rock types other than limestone. Presence of gas effects the Density-Neutron separation, and dolomite may be interpreted as limestone and limestone may be interpreted as sand. Also the presence of minerals other than quartz, calcite or dolomite, e.g. mica, glauconite, pyrite, feldspar can alter the separation. For example micaceous sandstone may give a shale/dolomite separation.
Density
(FDC or LDT)
/ Sonic
(BHC)
overlay
This method serves well to separate "shales" from non-"shales" (see Appendix 3.2.4.2.2). The Sonic indicates "shale" and "shalyness" very effectively, due to the low sound transfer in clay minerals. The Density is considered to indicate the density of the framework and thus to reflect the true porosity, also in "shales" and "shaly" rocks.
18 -
Overlaying a transparency of the Sonic over the Density (or vice versa), so that the 2.5 gr/cm3 line of the Density log is overlain the 80 ms/ft line of the Sonic, shows that there is a significant separation for shales, sand or clean limestone.
by
3.2.4.3
Environment
of deposition
from wireline
logs
In clastic sediments particular GR/(SP) log shapes are, in combination with the information obtained from the faunal/(floral) analysis, of significance for the evaluation of the depo~itional
environment. Examples are given in Appendix
3.2.4.3.1
to
3.2.4.3.3.
Sequences of these GR/(SP) log shapes give certain log patterns which, again in combination with the faunal/(floral) data, are indicative of particular environmental conditions. For instance:
-
monotonous
curves
or
a repetition
of
similar
3.2.4.3.4)
shapes
suggests
balanced
and
another (i.e. a
a change
from
one
ordered
sequence
of
shapes
into
change
from
one balanced
condition
into another)
indicates
transgression or regression.
(see Appendix
3.2.4.3.5)
on the GR as
are usually reflected follows: shape, - balanced conditions by a "Cylinder" - regressive conditions by a "Funnel" shape, by a "Bell" shape. - transgressive conditions
3.2.4.4
Structural
geological
data
from wireline
logs
Structural interpretations of the drilled sequence are based on the recognition and interpretation of particular patterns of the arrow plot of the dipmeter log (HDT) showing azimuth and dip of the strata. Examples of dipmeter patterns and their interpretation are given in Appendix 3.2.4.4. Use all stratigraphical data for the structural analyses, especially the presence and position of unconformities and faults, which became apparent during the stratigraphical study.
3.2.4.5
Porosity
and Permeability
from wireline
logs
There is at present no log that measures permeabilities. Some logs give indirect permeability indications, but they are usually not very reliable and their interpretation is better left to the petrophysisists. The standard porosity logs are the Neutron, the Density and the Sonic. Their responses are usually a combination of porosity effect and clay effect. The clay effect is generally largest on the Neutron and smallest on the Density log) Correlation between GR and porosity logs normally gives a reasonable indication of the porosity/clay distribution and thus of the porosity
3.2.4.5)
- 19 -
3.2.4.6
Source
Rocks
from wireline
logs
Source rocks are generally recognized on wireline logs by a relatively lower density and a relatively higher resistivity than the surrounding non-source rocks. In addition the source rock intervals usually show a relatively high GR response and low sonic velocity reading. (see Appendix 3.2.4.6.1. and 3.2.4.6.2). Above characteristics will aid in the selection of samples for geochemical analysis, in determining potential source-rock intervals where samples are not available (e.g. exchange well), and assist in regional mapping of potential source rock units.
3.3
Reporting The OPCO's reporting and administration regulations must be followed. The lithological description by the mudlogger is usually transmitted on a daily basis in percentages of rock type per sample. (see Appendix 3.3.1). This report is normally accompanied by a copy of the relevant part of the masterlog (see Appendix 2.2.2). Check this reporting regularly. In addition the stratigrapher is expected to provide a comprehensive stratigraphical report including: - a subdivision of the penetrated sequence into litho-units - a lithological description of these units - a time stratigraphical subdivision - an interpretation of the depositional environment - a correlation of the sequence with the local rock stratigraphy
-
These data have to be reported on a daily, weekly and monthly basis. Especially the daily reports must give all essential stratigraphical/ geological details, but should not to be overloaded with data of interest to specialists only. Initially the lithological descriptions and the drilling speed log are used to define boundaries, but these have to be updated as soon as the wireline logs become available and subsequently reported. It is advisable to compose a stratigraphical well data sheet (see Appendix 3.3.2) and mufax, or send a copy of the relevant hole section to the operational base on a regular basis. When drilling critical hole sections or if particular findings might influence the drilling programme (coring, logging, total depth, etc), it is recommended to report important stratigraphical data immediately, to the Operations Manager and the exploration focal point, as and when they become available. Moreover, it is recommended to communicate with the focal point if this might improve the interpretation of observations. Make sure that the OM (CPE) is informed about the content and results of these discussions. The final stratigraphical report that has to be incorporated in the final well report, is dealt with in chapter 6. Parts of this report can be prepared on the wellsite (including the enclosures) but is normally finalized at SIPM (EP/121).
4. Special Investigations
20 -
-4. 4.1
SPECIAL
INVESTIGATIONS
General
In particular cases it might be necessary to initiate a special biostratigraphical or geochemical investigation, to be carried out by SIPM EP/121 or KSEPL LRE/4 respectively (addresses see Appendix 4.1.1) If the results are urgently required, it is advisable to have the minimum amount of material required (see below) carried safehand to Rijswijk (or mailed at an airport nearest to Rijswijk) as soon as possible. Moreover, inform EP/121 and/or KSEPL LRE/4 by telex about the dispatch details as well as the type and urgency of the investigation required. The PEC and/or the OM have to be informed as well. A few notes on the various investigations are given below.
4.2
Biostratigraphical
investigations
by SIPM EP/121
If dating of the penetrated sediments, essential for the short term operations, cannot be achieved at the wellsite, the following investigations to be carried out by EP/121, might be requested: For marine sediments:
- a micro-palaeontological investigation: A minimum of a table spoon of slightly rinsed sample material is required. Select preferably the softer sediments (for washing) though hard carbonates can also be used (thin-sectioning). - Nannoplankton investigation: (for sediments of assumed post-Triassic age only) Send calcareous shales, marls or argillaceous limestones rather than non-calcarous coarser clastics or hard recrystallized carbonates. A minimum of a small teaspoon (0.5 cm3) of clean sediment is required.
in general
and marine
deposits
of assumed
a palynological investigation: Select dark coloured shales/siltstones rather than red beds, clean sandstones recristallized) carbonates. (see Appendix 4.2.1) A table spoon of slightly rinsed material is sufficient.
or
(hard
For sediments
of unknown
depositional
environment:
These need a comprehensive biostratigraphical investigation. A minimum of two table spoons of slightly rinsed sediments is required.
- 21 -
4.3
Source
Rock
investigation
by KSEPL
The presence of dark sediments (e.g. dark brown-black organic shale) in the cuttings might indicate that source rocks have been penetrated. Source rocks are sediments with sufficient amounts of suitable organic matter to generate and expel hydrocarbons. It is advisable to send samples (ca. 100 g of slightly rinsed cuttings per sample) of such sediments to KSEPL (for address see Appendix 4.1.1) for geochemical analyses. Samples should not be heated above 600C to avoid oxidation and have to be packed in special plastic bags. Moreover state whether organic mud additives (e.g. walnut shells, coal, etc) have been used. At the wellsite a rapid scanning for source rocks is achieved by the pyrolysis (chemical decomposition be heat) test tube method (see Appendix 4.3.1). Source rock intervals (>2 feet) identified on wireline logs (chapter 3.2.4.6 and Appendices 3.2.4.6.1 and 3.2.4.6.2) should be sidewallsampled for geochemical investigations. In other words: (sidewall-) sample for geochemical analysis all intervals that give a low density/high resistivity (/high gamma ray and relatively low sonic velocity) reading, which can not be explained physically (lithology, hydrocarbon content) or mechanically (mal functioning tool, wash out, etc.). Cindered (burned) cuttings are unsuitable for geochemical investigation.
5.
earn Work
5. 5.1
TEAM WORK
22
General
The wellsite stratigrapher petroleum engineer and the matters and to inform them updated formation tops. To know the rig jargon and to operations (see also 1.9). has to maintain regular contacts with the toolpusher to keep abreast of operational on relevant stratigraphical data like e.g. function satisfactorily he is supposed to gain a basic knowledge of the various
5.2
Assistance Hydrocarbon
to
the
Petroleum
Engineer
(PE)
5.2.1
detection
Hydrocarbon detection and recording is. in first instance. the responsibility of the Petroleum Engineer (PE). However. the wellsite stratigrapher is expected to be able to take over these duties as and when necessary. The methods commonly used to detect hydrocarbons in rock samples are assembled on Appendix 5.2.1. Fluorescence of mud additives such as diesel. asphalt. soltex, etc.. as well as pipe dope and mineral fluorescence should not be mixed up with hydrocarbon shows.
5.2.2
Wireline
logging
The PE might request the wellsite stratigrapher to attend the wireline logging operations or even supervise the logging. Therefore. it is advisable to acquire a basic knowledge of the actual wireline logging practice. (see chapter 9 in BECKMANN 1976)
5.3
Assistance
to
the
mudlogger by it
In case the mudlogger is overloaded penetration or an instrument failure) wellsite stratigrapher carries out descriptions of the cuttings during
work (e.g.
during
a fast
if the
6. Final Well
eport
6. 6.1
FINAL WELL REPORT (WELL RESUME) General
23
The wellsite stratigrapher assists the regional geologist (EP/ll) or operations manager in completing the geological part of the final well report. He prepares the chapter stratigraphy and contributes to other geological subjects such as: geological summary, comparison prognosis versus results, structural results, potential reservoirs, seals and source rocks, regional correlation etc. His main contribution to the final well report is the well completion log. He is advised to start this work already at the wellsite. The various subjects, as well as the appendices and enclosures of the well resume, are discussed below. Experience shows that government authorities, and partners like national oil companies prefer to receive one single compound report rather than various volumes of special reports. In some countries the government even requires a standard report format.
6.2
Timing
Generally, the well resume has to be presented to authorities within 3 months after completion of the well. This implies that the report should be ready for checking by SIPM approximately two weeks before presentation. Enclosures are to be completed first, to enable draughting department to finalise their work in time. Therefore, the draughting dept. has to be informed on the expected workload.
6.3
Contents The contents of the various chapters that normally geological part of the report are briefly reviewed constitute here. the
6.3.]
Geological
Summary
This normally consists of: - a concise description of the lithologies or the rock stratigraphical subdivision, the time stratigraphical subdivision and the interpreted depositional environment of the penetrated sequence. - a comparison of the sequence with the one predicted in the well proposal - a brief discussion of: structural results, objectives (expectation versus result), hydrocarbon shows/test, encountered potential reservoir rocks, source rocks and seals, coring, sidewall sampling and TD.
- 24 -
6.3.2
Well
6.3.3
- a brief discussion of the various investigations carried out and the regional stratigraphical data applied for the interpretation
-
- an outline of major stratigraphic events - a statement of significant hiatuses, faults, Subsequently penetration. Start Unit with name : top and bottom : in m/ft :-e.g. clay with unit by unit is described
in detail
in sequence
a listing
of the following
data:
in m/ft
bdf
subordinate limestone
siltstone and
between clay
- Lower
contact
: e.g.
silty
clay unconformably
overlying
e.g. marine,
Then
present
in detail
the
- environment
6.3.4
Structural
results results are discussed and compared with the structural originally interpreted from seismic and presented in the
6.3.5
Petrophysical
evaluation
of potential
reservoirs
As a rule this evaluation is carried out by the petroleum engineering department. However, the stratigrapher might be asked to supply a detailed lithological description of potential reservoirs, including permeability estimates.
6.3.6
Source Rock potential
25
Generally the stratigrapher initiates, in consultation with EP/11 and/or the operations manager, a source rock evaluation of particular intervals (by KSEPL). The results of this investigation are briefly reviewed in this chapter. The details of the source rock evaluation are normally presented in a separate KSEPL report which is included in the well resume as an appendix.
6.3.7
Conclusions
and recommendations
Start this chapter with a review of the stratigraphy encountered and the results of the petrophysical evaluation. (potential reservoirs, hydrocarbons). Subsequently analyse the targets and prognosis versus findings. Then discuss the new information gained and the modifications to the original geological interpretation and analyse alternative prospects.
6.4
Appendices
(/Textfigures)
and Enclosures (/textfigures) and enclosures illustrating to be added to the final well report. Examples
6.4.1.1 - 6.4.2.5.
6.4.1 6.4.1.1
Appendices Stratigraphical summary table (Appendix 6.4.1.1): showing the succession of the penetrated sedimentary packages/rock units and their: boundaries (in m bdf), thickness, lithology, age and depositional environment, source rock potential, estimated reservoir rock potential and eventual remarks. Timestratigraphical subdivision (Appendix
6.4.1.2)
presenting
(from
the
top to bottom) the various time units interpreted, incl: log tops, biostratigraphical tops observed in the samples, and thickness.
Core description and an updated typed version from
6.4.2.1)
Compiled
general well data: coordinates, elevation completion dates, total depth and status location map
26 -
stratigraphy stratigraphy
progress technical collected: logs run data: casings SWS, etc. cores
cuttings,
indications properties wireline log data: azimuth interval and dip velocity, density, etc.
interpretation: Log
6.4.2.2
Well
Completion
(Appendix
6.4.2.2)
This enclosure is the most important stratigraphical document of the final well report. The OPCO may prescribe a standard format for this log. It is recommended to use a 1:1000 scale and to present at least an interpreted lithological column flanked by the GR and caliper logs on the left and the FDC/CNL (or sonic log) and a concise lithological description on the right, and a time- and rock stratigraphical subdivision as well as an environmental interpretation on the left or the right. If the wireline logs are digitized a computer print (as described above) is available from EP/223. A comprehensive completion log usually illustrates at its top the followiqg data as well: - general - location - wire line data: map logs run recorded used coordinates etc, see well summary sheet
hole
temperatures types
sizes
and mud
casings,
losses,
test
27
6.4.2.3
6.4.2.4
Sheet
(Faunal
and/or
Floral
Distribution
Chart)
This enclosure illustrates the distribution of the fossils recorded withing the penetrated sequence. The timestratigraphical and environmental interpretations of these data are normally presented on this distribution chart as well. The established rock stratigraphical subdivision and the interpreted lithological column flanked by wireline logs and relevant technical data like casings are usually presented along the left side of the chart.
6.4.2.5
Geophysical
Well
Data
Sheet
/ T-Z Graph
(Appendix
6.4.2.5)
This graph, basically showing the link between stratigraphical horizons and their one way reflection time, is normally constructed by the geophysical department. The stratigrapher, however, might be asked to
6.4.2.6
Well
Correlation
If stratigraphical data from nearby wells are available it is advisable to illustrate their correlation with the penetrated sequence.
References
REFERENCES
28
Asquith, G.B. and Gibson, C.R. (1983) Basic well log analysis for geologists. AAPG Tulsa, Oklahoma USA (PALLAB 2371)
Batjes,
Well-site E104.
Geologists.
Beckmann, H. (1976) - Geological Prospecting of Petroleum. (Geology of Petroleum Vol. 2) Ferdinand Enke Publishers Stuttgart.
R. (1976)
Publishers
The Hague.
e.E. (1959) A laboratory manual on techniques for geologic observation. Unpublished company report EP-34126 Atlas Diplog. Dresser (1983) Analysis and Atlas, Dresser
used
in
preparing
carbonate
rocks
Dresser
Practical Industries,
Eckert,
A proposal EP-59030
for
Classification,
Terminology
FEigel,
Gary,
M. et a1. (Eds) (1977) Glossary of Geology. American Geological Institute, C.e.M. Methods rocks. Unpublished (1977) for recognition company report
Washington
D.C.
Gutjahr,
and
evaluation or
of
immature
and
mature
source
EP-47472
RKSR.0007.76
Hobson,
G.D. Ed. (1980) Development in Petroleum Applied Science Publishers (art. by Alger,R.P.)
29 -
Porcupine
Basin,
offshore
Hoogkamer,P.J.C., Prins,B. and Slissli,P.E. - Stratigraphy of Offshore Expl. Well Petro Dev. Co. Teoranta, Ireland. Unpublished company report EP-49357
(1978) 35/13-1,
Irish
Shell
Juhasz, 1. (1978) - The use of wireline logs in sedimentary geology, Unpublished company report EP-49331 or RKGR.OO17.78
a concise
overview.
Juhasz, 1. (1978) - Log analysis of source rocks. An introduction to the use of wireline logs in the recognition and evaluation of source rocks. Unpublished company report EP-49977 or RKSR.OO33.78
of cores
for
logs:
some basic
data
for
John
London.
Mabillard, J.E. and Corbin, S.G. (1983) - Oman guide to wellsite geology.
Unpublished company report EP-59084
Majewske, O.P. (1969) Recognition of Invertebrate Fossil Sections. E.J.Brill, Leiden, The Netherlands.
Fragments
in Rocks
and Thin
Meyer, B.L. and Nederlof, M.H. (1976) - Recognition of Source Rocks on Wireline Logs.
Unpublished company report EP-47649
Meyer, B.L. and Nederlof, M.H. (1984) - Identification of Source Rocks on Wireline Logs by Density/
Resistivity and Sonic Transit Time/Resistivity Crossplots. The American Association of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin,
- 30 -
Moore, P.F. and Gigon, W.O. / Revised by Dorsman (1964) - Terms and symbols for the description of carbonate rocks.
Unpublished company report EP-33671 (revised)
Moore, R.C. (Ed.) (1964) - Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology. Part C.1 and C.2 The Geological Society of America and The University of Kansas New York. Murray, J.W. (1973) - Distribution and Ecology of Living Heinemann Educational Books, London.
Press,
Benthonic
Foraminiferids.
Nagtegaal, P.J.C. (1974) - Selected Gamma Ray Log Patterns Representing Siliciclastic Depositional Sequences and Reservoirs, NW Borneo. Unpublished company report EP-45588.
NAM BV
- Petroleum Engineering Operations Unpublished company report. Pirson, S.J. (1983) -.Geologic Well Gulf Publishing Postuma, J.A. - Manual Elsevier Procedures Manual.
London,
Paris,
Tokyo.
London,
New York.
Reading, H.G. (Ed.) (1978) - Sedimentary Environments and Facies. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford, Ross, W.C. (1983) - Depositional
London,
Edinburgh,
Melbourne
sequence
Analysis
with
an Example
from
the Baltimore
Canyon.
Unpublished Shell Oil Co. report; EP-59459.
Rutten, K.W. (1981) - A review of logging tools and interpretation. Unpublished Shell handout. Course E1.04. Rutten, K.W. (1981) - Wire line log response in Carbonates and Evaporites. Unpublished Shell handout. Course E1.00. Rutten, K.W. (1981) - Wireline log response in Clastic Sediments. Unpublished Shell handout. Course El.00.
31
Rutten, K.W. (1981) - Geological aspects of modern wire line Unpublished Expl. Seminar handout. Schlumberger Ltd. (1971) - Fundamentals of Dipmeter Interpretation. Schlumberger Ltd., New York.
log interpretation.
Schlumberger Ltd. (1977) - Services Catalog. Schlumberger Ltd., New York. Schlumberger Ltd. (1981) - Dipmeter Interpretation. Volume Schlumberger Ltd., New York.
1 - Fundamentals.
(1975) - REGEO: Computer Handling of Regional Geological Unpublished company report EP-434731 (Additiona~ Corrections: January 1977) Int. Petro Mij. (1976) - Standard Legend. Unpublished company report. Int. Petro Mij. (EP/121) (1984) - EPIPAL User Documentation. Part I : Data Preparation Guide for EPIPAL Part II : Species Tables and Data Display Guide Unpublished company report EP-61150 I & II. Int. Petro Mij. (1985) - Operational Geology. Handouts of the course E104.
Data.
Shell
Shell
for EPIPAL.
Shell
Stainforth, R.M. et al (1975) - Cenozoic Planktonic Foraminiferal Zonation Index Forms. The Univ. of Kansas Pal. Contr. Article 62. Swanson, R.G. (1981) - Sample Examination Manual. Methods in Exploration Series,
and Characteristics
of
AAPG
Tulsa
Oklahoma
74101,
USA.
Taylor, J.C.M. (1977) - Sandstones as reservoir rocks. in Development of Petroleum Geology, Vail,P.R. et al (1977) - Seismic Stratigraphy
Vol.
1.
and Global
Changes
of Sea Level.
32
Manual of Larger
company
Generic
Description
and
Stratigraphic
Value. Unpublished
EP-36421
Appendices
General
Appendix
TIME-STRATIGRAPHIC TABLE
Gen.1
GENERAL CLASSIFICATION
."
ISOTOPIC ..GEm
i
UJ
OUATERNARY ~00
i i
Holocene Pleistocene
Holocene
OUATERNARY
PleIstocene
Pasadentan 1
2.8 2.8 5.2
-2.8
t'ocene N lH U Miocene
0 "-2.8
Ti
TU!
MIocene
MI
}~
s:
24
0
NN OU TERTIARY TT
CH RP LF LT yp TERTIARY
saVlan
Oligocene Pyreneean Eocene
Lattorflan
I
Z
LU U
}! ,,
I'T1
P"abor"an IBarton'an\ PR
Eocene
37
i
I
EO
LutetJan
Ypresran PC
Paleocene
Senonian
SE
Upper 12
KU CO TR CE
Gulflan
} Sub-Hercynian
96
CRETACEOUS KK
Cenomanian
Albian11,
Apllan BarremIan
AB AP BR HT VA BE y,
CRETACEOUS
Austnan (Oregonian)
lower
Ie
KL Neocomtan NC
Comanchean
126 m )to :0 r-
0 NN 0::1;
(f) JURASSIC' LU JJ
Tithonian Upper!'
TI
91
I !
I
}
Upper
JURASSIC Middle
-< :>
r\)
Late
K,mme,,",
(Nevadan)
Z m
143
JU
KI
OX CN BT BJ AA TC PB 8M HE RH NO CR TRIASSIC LA
I MlddleB' !
JM
::I;
178 Lower
I
TRIASSIC' 111' RR
LowerB
JL
!
Upper rr.U) RU
Middle lower
'10M) RM '1oLt RL
Upper
PU
Kazanian Kungurian
PERMIAN~I.I
pp Lower PL Sakmarian SR Artinskian AT
Leonardian
(.)
Wolfcampian
Orenburgian Upper CU z (/) Stephanian ST Gzehan Moscovian Bashlunan Namurian.~ NM Namunan.\ Visean
OR GZ PENNSYLVANIAN MO BA NA VI TO MISSISSIPPIAN
Virgilian Missourian Desmolneaian Derryan (Atokan) Morrowan Erzgeblrglan (Old Wichita) Chesterian.
Sudetlan
289
0
N CM
I
Asturian (Arbuckle) Young Wichita
m :0 (')
ON Q.
LU
CARBONIFEROUS"
CC
Middle
.; u;
I'll
Westphalian
WP
-< Z );
341
<
Lower
CL
Meramecian Osagean
-I
<
Q. Upper OU
Dmantian
01
Tournaisian Famennian Frasnian Givetian FA F8 GI
Kinderhookian Bradfordian Chautauquan Senecan Erian CoUYlnlan(Eifelian) CV DEVONIAN DD Coblencian Lower OL CI Siegenian Gedinnian SG GO Emsian ES Ulsterian
Bretonian Acadian
367
Middle DEVONIAN
OM
P.T.C.
......... Bretonian
I
I
Upper
DU
FA FS GI
Acadian
367 -
0 N ON
DEVONIAN
Middle
DM Couvlruan (Elfelian) CV
.............Mid De\/onian
DEVONIAN DD
Coblenclan Lower DL CI
I
Emslan
Slegenian
396
I
tl. SalopIan SILURIAN'
IGOTHLANDIAN) SS
Gedmnlan
PD LD WN SILURIAN
f-- 416 -
Cayugan
LU
Niagaran
-I
tl.
Llandoyerlan LO Medinan Taconian Ashg tllian AS Cincinnatian 0 r m 0 0 Z ); Z
-446-
CaradocIan
CD
ORDOVICIAN 00
lIandedlan
LE ORDOVICIAN
Champlamian
lIanvltnlarl
LI
Arenigian Tremadocian 1
AR
Canad,""
TM
I
Upper
(CUi EU
Potsdam.an
PO
Trempealeal.uan ~I Franconian ~I
Sardinian
-509-
IDresbachian
524
Middle CAMBRIAN
ICMJEM
Acadian
AC CAMBRIAN
Albertan
11
EE
Lower
ICLI EL
Georgian
GE
Waucoban
575
REMARKS
ON "TIME-STRATIGRAPHIC
Cambrian-Ordovician authors.
transitional
beds attributed
to the
10 11
Subdivision "Gault"
acc. to "Colloque
inf~rieur"
19631.
In French usage, Gothlandian and Ordovician commonly grouped as Silurian(OGI. Here, Anglo-American definition of Silurian!SS) ::: Gothlandian is adhered to. Subdivision acc. to "Report of the Commission on the stratigraphy of the Carbon. iferous of the National Committee of Soviet geologists" (Heerlen, 1958J. In WeStern Europe the Carboniferous is subdivided into Lower Carboniferous Dinantian) and Upper Carboniferous (= Silesianl. ('" 4 In Western Europe Namurian(NM) comprises Namurian "A", "B" and "C", When used in its original sense Namurian(NA) corresponds to Namurian and "B", "A" Schenck world: et 81. (1941,.BuII.A.A.P.G., Upper Permian Middle Permian Lower Permian vol.25) proposed a "Standard Permian" of the
12 13 14
Subdivision
franc;ais"
The tim~stratigraphic
position
Subdivision ace. to "Proceedings of the 3rd session in Bern of the Committee Mediterranean Neogene stratigraphy" (19641. Ref. BuII.Geol.Soc.Am., After Stille (1924,19401 1943-1954, vol.53-65. (19471.
15 16 17
and Umbgrove
{ {
Djulfian Penjabian Guadalupian Artinskian Sakmarian into Lower Permian Tartarian). (SakmarianNote'
Ref. Contributions to the Geologic Time Scale f1978, AAPG, Studies in Geology no. 61.
is subdivided (Kungurian-
For computer-filing purposes some names and codes are only of local value and should be avoided as much as possible, also since often a rock-stratigraphic interpretation is included, e.g, Portlandian(PT), Urgonian(UGJ. Continental or transitional facies, straddling internationally accepted boundaries, often received formal names. Due to the controversial units their use should be avoided as much as possible, e.g.: Downtonian Strunian Autunian Purbeckian Wealden Garumnian Tongrian (DW) (SU) (AU) (PKI (WE! (GA! (TGJ Silurian Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper time-stratigraphic nature of these
The terms Rotliegendes, Zechstein, Buntsandstein, Muschelkalk discarded as they apply to rock-stratigraphic units only. Subdivisions 8 acc. to "Coltoque International du Jurassique"
and Keuper
have been
(Luxembourg,
1962).
The terms "Lias" and "Dogger" do not coincide with "Lower Jurassic" and "Middle Jurassic", respectively. Lias comprises Hettangian-Toarcian, Dogger coincides with Aalenian-Callovian. The terms "MaIm" and "Upper Jurassic" are synonyms, Precise definition of Kimmeridgian and Tithonian is still lacking. Under the presently preferred interpretation of Tithonian, the Portlandian would correspond to the upper part of the Tithonian IHallam, 1966, Earth Science Review!.
Eocene
Lower Oligocene Ci) 0) ID I\) ... CI) "N
SHELL
INTERNATIONALE
PETROLEUM
MAATSCHAPPIJ
THE NETHERLANDS
MARCH
1980
Appendix Gen.2
STRATIGRAPHIC
TERMINOLOGY
raphic
Units)
Sio-stratigraphic Units
(Faunal. Zone Subzone Zonule Floral Units)
Ti me-stratigraphic Units
(Chrono-stratigraphic Erothem System Subsystem Series Stage Units)
Geological Units
(Geochronological Era Period SubperiOd Epoch Age,Subepoch Example: Cenozoic Tertiary
Time
Units)
Tongue Layer Examp.le: Group Globorotalia Globigerina Bolivina :3 Zone 12 Subzone 4 Zonule
Early Eocene
Tertiary
Lutetian Definition: Geological time units are abstract, non- material units used to subdivide the history of the earth into discrete time intervals. Geological time units are defined by time-stratigrophic unita in their type area. Geographic and other names used for geological time units are Identical with those of the corresponding time-atrotigraphic units: the Devonian Systern was deposited during the Devonian Period.
Definition: A rock- stratigraphic unit is a subdivision of the rock sequence distinguished and delimited on the basis of lithological cri teria and its position in the sequence. A formal rock-stratigraphic unit consists of a geo. graphical nome combined with a descriptive lithological term or with the appro. priate rank term alone. Capitalization of the first letters of the composing warda is recommended.
Definition: A bio-stratigraphic unit is a body of rock strata characterized by its can tent of fossils contemparaneous with the deposition of the strata. The nome of a zone. subzone or zonule consists of the name(s) of the characteriatic fossil or fossils combined with the appropriate rank term.
Definition: A time-stratigraphic unit is a subdivision of rocks considered solely as the record of a specific interval of geological time. Time-stratigraphic units are defined by on actual section of strata in a type' area.
The stratigraphic terminology is largely based on the "Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature" of the American Association of Petroleum Geologists (1970). However, it should be realized that, although widely accepted, this code still contains some controversial points.
Appendix Gen.3
1ST-ORDER CYCLES
TRANSGR.
REGRESSION
PERIODS
EPOCHS
PLIO-MIST MIOCENE OLIGOCENE
EOCENE
-TRANSGRESSION
REGRES.TIONS
!1:rd
Tc
NOTA-
TERTIARY
---
-----------
-Ti!
.TaKb
CRETACEOUS
E M L
Ka J TR
L P
JURASSIC TRIASSIC
PERMIAN PENNSYLVANIAN
MISSISSIPPIAN E E
E
E M-L
L
en z 0 =:i .....
300 ::E
LU
::E
i=
~0 ..... 0 LU
~400 2
DEVONIAN
SILURIAN
~ORDOVICIAN
M-L
D-M
::E
i=
400 S:2
L ~M O-S 0 ..... 0 LU
500 CAMBRIAN
E
M E PRECAMBRIAN
l
C-O
500
Appendix Gen. 4
GLOBAL TRANSGRESSION
GEOLOGIC en en c :r 2..g a: n. ~w
AGES
MAGNETIC
REVERSALS
STANDARD AGES
!
0
w ::Ii :J Z 0
tr
< 0 ~ 0.
TRANSGRESSION
-..
REGRESSION
5
w Z w (.) 0 0 0 i
> . ,I cc
w Z ~W
(.)
0
0
:5
CHATTIAN
RUPELIAN
CJ
~:i
<
PRIABOLIAN w z w (J 0 w BARTONIAN 0 0
18
i
cc c(
LUTETIAN
YPRESIAN
-11=
W Z W (.) 0 c Q.
C( I>~cc cf
THANETIAN
-- I-
14
DANIAN MAASTRICHTIAN
iiii- 27 I~ 30
CAMPANIAN
SANTONIAN
w ... C[
I-
33
...
CONIACIAN
TURONIAN
- 34
CENOMANIAN
ALBIAN
APTIAN
>... a: <II(
w
BARREMIAN
L =~jii_MID
M5
JoA11
MI5
c ...I OXFORDIAN
.
!!!!!
--
M2J
--1.125
CAllOVIAN
(,,)
~0 0
BA THONIAN
i
BAJOCIAN AALENIAN
TOARCIAN > .... Ct <C w PLIENSBACHIAN
I . .
I
SINEMURIAN It) ...... CD ,.., N 0> II) (!) HETT "NGIAN TRIASSIC
Appendix
Gen. 5
CONVERSION
TABLE
(AFTER SCHLUMBERGER)
Depth
Temperature
OF 32 50
Pressure
Mud Weight
MPa
0 10 1.1
~m
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800 4000 ~4200 4400 4600 4800 5000 5200 5400 ~5600 5800 6000 6200 6400 6600 6800 7000 7200 7400 7600 7800 8000 8200 8400 8600 8800 9000 9200 9400 9600 9800 10000 1m 0
~ft
2L
C 0 10
sqem 0 100
psi 0
atm
0
JL
ee
1.0
Ib
eu ft 62.4 64 66 68 70 72
Ib
gal 8.345 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 Il.!i 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 .900 17.5 18.0 .950 18.5 19.0 1.00 19.5 20.0 1.05 20.5 1.08
62.43 Ib/ft3
ft .433 .450
20 30 100 40 50 60 150 70 80 200 90 100 110 ~800 250 120 130 140 ~300 150 160 170 350 180 1300 190 200 400 210 1500 220 450 230 240 250 500 260 270 280 550 2000 290 300 1800 1600 1400 1100 1200 900 600 700 400 500 200 300
20 1.2
.500
30
6000
40 50
.550
1.3
7000 8000 9000 10000 11000 12000 13000 14000 15000 16000 17000 18000 19000 20000 21000 22000 23000 24000 25000 26000 27000 28000 29000 30000 31000 32000 33000
.600
700 800
12000
.700
t/J en Q)
16000
1100
110
1.8
.800
18000
1200
ct C> c: '6 c: 0
118 120 122 124 126 128 130 132 134 136 138 140 142
cf/)
0 () .850
140
1500 1600
150 160
2.1
1700
2.2
180
2.3
2.4
30000
"2:5 em x 14.22
1 glee
C
of
= (OF =
32) x 5/9
(OC x 9/5) + 32
= kg/sq
=
Mpa x 145.038
= 3.28
ft
= Ib/ga1/19.27
= Ib/ft3/144
.\!? ~0> CD
(.!)
Appendix
Gen.6
ALPHABET
RADIO CALLWORDS
A B C D E F
G
ALFA BRAVO
CHARLIE
DELTA
ECHO
FOXTROT
GOLF HOTEL
INDIA
H
I
JULIET
KILO LIMA
K L
M N
0
MIKE
NOVEMBER
OSCAR PAPA
P
Q
QUEBEC
ROMEO
SIERRA TANGO
UNIFORM VICTOR
S T u
W -
WHISKY
-
X - X
,.. .... IX)
I') N en ID (!)
RAY
Y Z
YANKEE
ZULU
1. Preparation
For Duties
Appendix
1.8.4
I.
II.
III.
IV.
CONSUMABLES
V.
VI.
CHEMICALS
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
VII.
STATIONARY
VIII.
LIBRARY
Appendix page 2
1.8.4
1.
MICROSCOPES
& ACCESSORIES
Microscopes
Pol
NIKON
SMZ-2
(with
or without
ZEISS
lamp(s) source ("schott Kaltlichtquelle KL 150 B") roll film and/or polaroid)
(for stereomicroscopes;
(for core
examination)
Appendix page 3
1.8.4
II.
Bag sealer, Balance, Chemical Core Cutting Cutting Draining Drawing Drying Fire First
for
sealing
plastic
bags
(electrical)
installation
(for
lapping
rock
slides)
to be installed
above
the
a multi-purpose including
Fume cupboard,
Grinding machine
Hot plates
model
for
drying
wash-residues
for
preparing
thin
sections
20 x 20 cm)
vacum mover
equipment machine
rock
Settling tank
Sink assembly Storage racks
Trolley Type
collection cabinet(s)
~
"cD rt) N 0> <D ~
Appendix
1.8.4
page 4
III.
EQUIPHENT
flat bottom
3.5 cm 6.5 cm
porcelain. glass.
round
bottom with
graduated
250 cc and
Dropping
- plastic. with leak-proof dropping with snap cap. approx. 50 cc - glass. with pipet approx. 50 cc stopper
closure
and rubber
nipple.
indicator 50 cc
solution chemicals:
Plastic. Reagent.
narrow wide
mouth. screw capped. for storing 100 cc. 500 cc and 1000 cc with stopper: 250 cc and
mouth
1000 cc 1000 cc
Wash.
plastic. small
with
nozzle
(00). medium
blower with
type wicks
spare
Burners
Casseroles. Coats
Bunsen
porcelain. fire-proof. men's approx. style 130 cc style metal
- laboratory.
white:
and women's
Comparators:
plastic
(transparent).
10 cc.
cc)
trays trays
five round
(with spout
emptying
stand)
shields. hole
full plates
Finger
3 depressions. 9 depressions
and
Fupnels - plastic
Gauzes. with
asbestos
centre.
Geological Glass
plates.
Appendix
page 5
1. 8.4
Gloves - laboratory,
and acids
"rubber"
resistant
to a wide
range
of chemicals
Goggles
Hand
lenses,
horseshoe tape,
type with
metric silicone
- cutting
& pestles,
-.small - larger
holders for needle needles measuring chart type, (Geol. capacity Soc. Am.) 10 cc holder
color
splitter for geologist - table, (0. Dreher) (20, 35 and 100 mesh), with cover
set of 3 sieves
washing:
iron,
20 mesh,
electrical,
(100 mesh)
for repairing
and
200 mesh
sieves
Soldering
Spatulas, Spatulas
double - spoon
end, type,
semi-micro, single
acid-proof
Stamp box, with isolated for stamping labels Stand for Tragacanth, big model - wooden, rods, H2O
letters
and HCI card-board flat, approx. core boxes 18 x 150 mm 5 rom 6 rom of sedimentary
glass
- length - length
"Tape worm(s)", guide for lithological description rocks (tape model) by KEMPTER, E.H.K. Thermometer(s) Test Test Test Timer Tongs tubes, tube tube - laboratory, chemical, approx. -10 to 250C
130 x 14 rom
- signal
interval, length
range approx.
0-60 min. 22 em
- crucible,
Appendix
1.8.4
page 6
Transparancies
of
- distribution
charts
- in meters,
Triebel Tripods,
trays for burners, diam. with round top, height approx. 12 cm approx. 21 cm,
Tweezers, Watch
stainless steel, length approx. pointed mouth types diam. fine approx. 60 mID and
and
glasses: very
Whetstone,
\0-
Appendix
1.8.4
page 7
IV.
CONSUMABLES
Bags
Bags
-
linen, plastic
warp
twisted,
size
15 x 25 cm 8 cm, thickness
15 cm, thickness
(geochemical)
- 12 x
- 30 x
0.1 mm
0.1 mm
Boxes
Boxes Boxes
core,
- core, - photo,
-
Boxes
Boxes Boxes
Boxes
picking slide
wooden, recommended inside dimensions: 460 L x 210W x 320D mm plastic, capacity 100 slides
- sample, thin
section,
residue
- wash
Bulbs
- microscope powder,
Carborundum
saw blades discs, disc paraffin, wide for preparation with plastic white, white, of Poly cap, blue blue Pol PS 230 size approx. 40 x 20 mm diam. 18.5 cm
glass,
-
mouth
Labels
sample;
- large: - small:
Lables Lens
self-adhesive,
for glass-slides
Materials
cards
Pellets
Plug bits Polishing Sample Sample powder (Tube SN02' cards sheets, for cutting-, sidewalland core samples REEK)
administration description
3.2.1.3-3.2.1.5)
wooden
Slides
Slides Slides Slide Slide
Chapman
- glass - picking trays, trays cardboard - map form core 60% Sn, 40% Pb, diam. approx. 4 mm
Solder,
N , ~
colophony big
Staples, Wire
~ ~ N ~ ~ ~
netting,
20 mesh,
100 mesh,
200 mesh
Appendix
1.8.4
page 8
v.
CHEMICALS
Aceton
Alcohol, Alizarin Aniline Araldite Barium chloride industrial Red., paint, dry powder
Bees wax
Benzine
Bromoform Canada (3.9
2.60)
balsam
Carbondisulfide Carbon tetrachloride Chloroform Chlorothene Distilled Hardener Hydrochloric Hydrogene Lakeside Methylene Nitric Oleum Poly acid (36%) water
peroxide no. 70
blue
acid caryophyllum
Pol PS 230,
plus
catalyser
ferricyanide sulphocyanate O.
(cone.,
Tragacanth
CD
Appendix page 9
1.8.4
VI.
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Broom
Brushes
for cleaning for cleaning for cleaning table wash sieves basins (1" flat)
test-tubes
Bucket
Can-opener Clothes pegs, wooden
Dusters
Dustpan Dustbin, Dexion & brush with angle lid and pedel & shelves, roll for building storage racks
Extension Flash
flex,
type type
light,
non battery
Kleenex
Magnifying Packing Sponges, Spoons, Sprayers, Tool kit, glass, with handle
paper "scotch plastic for washing containing: samples 1 hammer, nail 1 "waterpump", 1 screwdriver, pulling pliers, small type adjustable bright" and common type
type
1 1
1 1 1 1 1
1 watchmakers
" "
, medium , star-type
screwdrivers set (COLEY)
waterproof emery cloth junior saw, bow type "combination" pliers set of files (small) hobby knife pro pincers
Towels
Tubing, plastic, a few metres
Twine Vim
Wash leather gloves
Working
(\j
"-
en N '" m (!)
VII.
STATIONARY Ball points, black, pocket wallpaper, pencils, red type and deskand blue set type, of 12 small and big and blue
Calculator, Calenders, Carbon Coloured Clips Diary Drawing Drawing Envelopes, Field Files Graphic Glue, Ink Ink Letter Lifax Markers paper Lero, books pins set,
black
fold
back
incl. various
drawing airmail
pen
set,
lettering
set
("Leroy")
Pritt-stick, black
Velpon,
Bisonkit
India,
pad embossing booklets, tool with : (DYMO M-20), alphabets and with refills big + small, yellow and black orange and red spare tapes, black, blue & red
clips
felttip
closing
wash
residue
bags)
Pencils, Pencil
Penknives, Perforaters Plastic
2H
type, and with replaceable model blades
4 holes
02
with
alphabets
and
refills ones
small and
Appendix
1.8.4
page 11
Scissors
Staples Staplers
Stamp pad ink
Tab cards
Tape
Tracing
Appendix
1.8.4
page 12
VIII.
A.
LIBRARY
Publications
for Geologists.
BECKMANN, H. - 1976 Geological Prospecting of Petroleum. (Geology of Petroleum vol. 2). Ferdinand Enke publishers Stuttgart. BLATT, H., MIDDLETON, G. & MURRAY, R. - 1980 Origin of Sedimentary Rocks. Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Yersey. BOLTOVSKOY, E. & WRIGHT, R. - 1976 Recent Foraminifera. Dr. W. Junk b.v., Publishers The Hague. COOK, H.E., HINE, A.C. & MULLINS, H.T. - 1983 Platform ma~gin and Deep Water Carbonates. SEPM. Short Course No. 12, SEPM, Tulsa. J.R. & STANTON, R.J. - 1981 Paleocology, Concepts and Applications. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
DODD,
ELF-AQUITAINE - 1982 (REECKMANN, A. & FRIEDMAN, G.M.) Exploration for Carbonate Petroleum Reservoirs. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. ELLIS, B.F. & MESSINA, A.R. - 1965-1967 Catalogue of Index Larger Foraminifera, American Museum Nat. Hist., New York. ELLIS, B.F. et ala - 1968-1969 Catalogue of Index Smaller Foraminifera, American Museum Nat. Hist., New York. FICHTER, L.S. et ala - 1979 Ancient Environments (Interpretation Burgess Publishing Co. Minnesota. FLUGEL, E. - 1982 Microfacies Analysis of Limestone. Springer Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, FRAKES, L.A. - 1979 Climates throughout Elsevier Scientific
vol.
1-3.
vol.
1-3.
of Geologic
History).
New York,
Q m ~ ~ ~ m , N m
Appendix
1.8.4
page 13
FRIEDMAN, G.M. & SANDERS, J.E. - 1978 Principles of Sedimentology. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York. GARY, M. et al. (Eds.) 1977 Glossary of Geology. American Geological Institute,
Washington
D.C.
GIGNOUX, M. - 1950 Stratigraphic Geology. (English translation edition, by Woodford, G.G. - 1955). W.H. Freeman & CO., San Francisco HALLAM, A. - 1981 Facies Interpretation and the Stratigraphic W.H. Freeman & Co. San Francisco. HAM, W.E. (Ed.) - 1962 Classification of Carbonate Rocks. AAPG Memoir 1, Tulsa, Oklahoma, USA.
from
Record.
HARLAND, W.B. et ale - 1982 A Geological Time Scale. Cambridge University Press. HAQ, B.U. & BOERSMA, A. - 1978 Introduction to Marine Micropaleontology. Elsevier Scientific Publishing Co., Amsterdam.
HEDBERG, H.D. (Ed.) - 1976 International Stratigraphic Guide. A guide to stratigraphic classification,
terminology,
and procedure.
John Wiley
&
HEDLY, R.H. & ADAMS, C.G. (Eds.) - 1974, Foraminifera. Vol. 1, 2 and 3. Academic Press, London, New York. HOROWITZ, A.S. & POTTER, P.E. Introductory Petrography Springer-Verlag, Berlin, - 1971 of Fossils. Heidelberg,
New York.
Ku}IMEL, B. & RAUP, D. (eds.) - (latest edition) Handbook of Palaeontological Techniques. W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco and London. LOGAN, B.W. et ale (Eds.) - 1970 Carbonate Sediments and Environments. AAPG Mem. 13, Tulsa. LAPORTE, L.F. (Ed.) - 1974 Reefs in Time and Space. SEPM Spec. Publ. 18.
N , ~ ~ N $ ~
Appendix
1.8.4
page 14
LYNCH,
Tokyo.
MAJEWSKE, O.P. - 1969 Recognition of Invertebrate Fossil Fragments Thin Sections. E.J. Brill, Leiden, The Netherlands.
in Rocks
and
M.E. - 1977 Modern and Ancient Lake Sediments. Blackwell Scientific Publications,
Oxford.
MAYER-GURR, A. - 1976 Petroleum Engineering. (Geology of Petroleum, vol. 3). Ferdinand Enke Publishers, Stuttgart. MONTY, C. (Ed.) - 1981 Phanerozoic Stromatolites. Springer-Verlag, Berlin.
Case Histories.
MOORE, R.C. (Ed.) 1952-1981 Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology. Part A-X. of Kansas The Geological Society of America and The University Press, New York. (Office International de Librairie, Avenue Marnix 30, 1050 Bruxelles). MORKHOVEN, F.P.C.M. van - 1962-1963 Post-Palaeozoic Ostracoda. Their Morphology, Taxonomy and Economic Elsevier Publishing Co., Amsterdam.
Use.
Vol.
I & II.
MURRAY, J.W.
1973
Foraminiferids.
PAULING,
L.
1949
to Descriptive Chemistry
General Chemistry. An Introduciton and Modern Chemical Theory. W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco.
PAYTON, Ch.E. 1977 Seismic Stratigraphy applications AAPG Memoir 26, Tulsa, Oklahoma.
to hydrocarbon exploration.
PETTIJOHN,
F.J.
1975
New York.
PIRSON,
S.J.
1970
Texas.
Q ~ W N ~ m , ~ 0
Appendix
1.8.4
page 15
POSTUMA, J.A. - 1971 Manual of Planktonic Foraminifera. Elsevier Publishing Co., Amsterdam, POTTER, P.E. et ale Sedimentology of Shale. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. PRAY,
London,
New York.
L.C. & MURRAY, R.C. - 1965 Dolomitization and Limestone Diagenesis, a Symposium. Soc. Econ. Pal. & Min. Special Publ. 13.
PURSER, B.H. - 1983 Sedimentation et Diagenese des Carbonates Institut Francais du Petrol.
veritiques
recents.
RAMSAY, A.T.S. (ed.) - 1977 Oceanic Micropalaeontology, Vol. 1 & 2. (Vol. 1 includes: "Mesozoic Planktonic Foraminifera, a world-wide review and analysis", by MASTERS, B.A.). Academic Press, London, New York, San Francisco. RAUP, D.M. & STANLEY, S.M. - 1971 Principles of Paleontology. W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco.
READING, H.G. (Ed.) - 1978 Sedimentary Environments and Facies. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford, Melbourne.
London,
Edinburgh,
RECKMANN, A. & FRIEDMAN, G.M. - 1982 (ELF-AQUITAINE) Exploration for Carbonate Petroleum Reservoirs. Elf Aquitaine. REINECK, H.E. & SINGH, I.B. - 1973 Depositional Sedimentary Environments Terrigenous Clastics). Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg,
to
RIGBY, J.K. & HAMBLIN, Wm. (Eds.) - 1972 Recognition of Ancient Sedimentary Environments. Soc. of Econ. Palaeontologists and Mineralogists. Special Publication no. 16. ROBASZYNSKI, F. & CARON, M. (Eds.) - 1979 Atlas de Foraminiferes Planctoniques du Cretace Moyen et Tethys). Cahiers de Micropaleontologie, 1 & 2 (1979) Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, Paris.
(Mer Boreale
SCHAFER, C.T. & PELLETIER, B.R. - 1976 First International Symposium on Benthonic Foraminifera Continental Margins Maritime Sediments, Spec. Publ. no. Nova Scotia.
of 1, Halifax,
Appendix
1.8.4
page 16
SCHOLLE, P.A. - 1979 A Color Illustrated Guide to Carbonate Rock Constituents, Textures, Cements and Porosities. AAPG Memoir 27, Rodgers Litho, Tulsa, Oklahoma. SCHOLLE, P.A. - 1979 A Color Illustrated Guide to Constituents, Textures, and Porosities of Sandstones and Associated Rocks. AAPG Memoir 28, Rodgers Litho, Tulsa, Oklahoma. SELLEY, R.C. Ancient Science - 1970 Sedimentary Paperbacks
Cements
San Francisco.
STAINFORTH, R.M. et ale - 1975 Cenozoic Planktonic Foraminiferal Zonation and Characteristics of Index Forms. The Univ. of Kansas Pal. Contr. Article 62. SYKES, J.B. (Ed.) - 1976 The Concise Oxford Dictionary University Press, Oxford. TOOMEY, D.F. (Ed.) - 1981 European Fossil Reef Models. SEPM Spec. Publ. 30. VAN EYSINGA, F.W.B. (Comp.) Geological Time Table. Elsevier Scient. Publ. - 1975 Co., Amsterdam.
of Current
English.
VAN HOUTEN, F.B. (Ed.) - 1977 Ancient Continental Deposits. Benchmark Papers in Geology, 43, Dowden,
Hutckinson
& Ross.
VISSER, W.A. - 1980 Geological Nomenclature. Royal Geological and Mining Society of the Netherlands. Martinus Nijhoff, The Hague, Boston, London. WALKER, R.G. - 1980 Facies Models Reprinted with revisions from a serie of papers in Geoscience of Canada. 1976-1979, published by the Geological Association Hamilton, Ontario, Canada. WELLER, J.M. - 1960 Stratigraphic Principles and Practice. Harper & Brothers Publishers, New York.
Canada,
Q m w N ~ ,m ~ N
Appendix
1.8.4
page 17
WHALLEY, W.B. (Ed.) - 1978 Scanning Electron Microscopy in the Study Geo Abstracts, Norwich, England.
of Sediments.
WHITTAKER, A. (ed.) - 1985 Coring Operations. Procedures for Sampling and Analysis of Bottomhole and Sidewall Cores. D. Reidel Publishing Co. Dordrecht, Boston, Lancaster. WILSON, J.L. - 1975 Carbonate Facies Springer Verlag, WRAY,
J.L. - 1977 Calcareous Algae. (Developments in Palaeontology and Stratigraphy, 4). Elsevier Scientific Publ. Co., Amsterdam, Oxford, New York.
ZACHARIASSE, W.J. et al. - 1978 Micropaleontological Counting Methods and Techniques - an exercise on an eight meters section of the Lower Pliocene of Capo Rossello, Sicily. Utrecht Micropalaeontological Bulletin nr. 17. Loonzetterij Abe, Hoogeveen, The Netherlands. ZENGER, D.H. et al. (Ed.) - 1980 Concepts and Models of Dolomitization. Soc. Econ. Pal. & Min. Spec. Publ. 28.
B.
Unpublished EP/13
Company
Reports
& EP/24 - 1975 (EP-43731) REGEO : Computer Handling of Regional Geological (Additional Corrections: January 1977).
Data.
EP/12.1 - 1984 (EP-61150 I & II) EPIPAL User Documentation Part I : Data Preparation Guide for EPIPAL Part II : Species Tables and Data Display Guide
for Palab.
MEYER, B.L. & NEDERLOF, M.H. - 1976 (EP-47649) Recognition of Source Rocks on Wireline Logs. MOORE, P.F. & GIGON, W.O. - 1964 (EP-33671) Terms and Symbols for the Description of Carbonate Rocks.
SHELL INT. PETR. MIJ. - 1976 Standard Legend. Exploration & Production
Departments.
Generic
Description
and
~ , m ~
N ~ ~ ~
Appendix
1.8.4
page 18
C.
Periodicals Alcheringa; Bibliography Cahiers Catalogue an Australian and Index Journal of Palaeontology
of Micropalaeontology
Contributions AASP
Cretaceous Research
Facies
General Geobios; Grana; Handbook Journal Journal Journal File of Fossil Spores and Pollen Paleoecologie
Stratigraphie
of Cenozoic Foraminiferal
of Micropalaeontology of Palaeontology
Lethaia
Marine Micropaleontology Rijks Geologische Dienst
Mededelingen
Micropalaeontology Newsletter Newsletter Newsletters Palaeobotanist Palaeogeography Palaeontographica Palaeontographica Palaeontologische Palaeontology Palynology; Pollen Review Revista Revue Revue Rivista Stereo Utrecht AASP Palaeoclimatology Abt A Abt B Palaeoecology Amer. Assoc. of Stratigr. Palyn.
Chitinozoa on Stratigraphy
Palaeozoologie-Stratigraphie Palaeophytologie
Zeitschrift
de Micropaleontologia
of Ostracod
Shells Bulletins
Micropaleontological
Q m w N ~ ,m ~ ~
Appendix 1.8.5
SKETCH
OF LAYOUT
FOR
A SMALL
GEOLOGICAL
LASORA TORY
TABLE
SINK
~ ~
TABLE
-- """....
"4
SHELVES
TABLE
D
Aid
CUPBOARD
CUPBOARD
First
Kit
DESK
BOOK CASE
,
"
\
, \ I
a
FILING CABINET
TABLE
DESK
Scale: approx.1:25
DRILLING
Information Final Mud p'rovided: (target) depth type details info. numbers reservoir
PROGRAMME
Hotel/casing Cement, Logging sizes type/volume required
Appendix
1.9.1
pressure
estimates
Procedure:
equipment
in drill casing
- drive/wash
in
conductor
spud adding
make
collars
and
drillpipe
singles
hole
and
housing,
BOP's,
test
spool,
install
"X"
bushing
ahead run
total and
casing
MAJOR COMPONENTS
OF THE
DRILLING
RIG
Mud
System Mud tanks mud Duplex, T~iplex, pumps, mixing and pumps, double single reciprocating acting acting for equipment
auxiliary, treating
Hook
Links and elevators
Swivel
Wire Dead rope line (drilling anchor line) Bulk Mud
storage, guns,
bentonite, jets
barytes
&
cement
bottoa
Auxiliary brakes
Rotary Rotary
Multi-channel recorders
Tong torque indicator rate counter recorder (Geolograph)
Penetration Prime Movers, Independent Diesel-electric; ilc engines Ward-Leonard Smith-ring Thyoristor Gas turbines system system system Pump Mud Pit Mud Gas stroke flowmeter level weight detectors flow
recorders recorder
Annular
detector
Power
Well
Control
Equipment, bag-type)
twin-disc
"CD rt'> N
Air Link
API
clutches
belt
rubber
chain
drive
drive
Trip
<0 '"
C)
vee-belt
Standpipe
Appendix
1.9.2
Mudscreen. Drill ing Auid Section of Drilling Aoor. Operaled Operated Blowout Preventer. Blowout Preventer (.Mastervalve,J and Chakes,for Drilling Auid
and Rotary
Hose.
R. Cut-Out
G. Derrick Floor.
S. Hydraulically
Hydraulically
J. Ratary-Machine
U. Outlets,provided
wrthValves
W Cementbond X. Drillpipe.
O. Main Transmission
Pipe (.Drillcollars.)
at Bottom
P Suction
Q.Pump.
Tank.
of Drilling String.
Aow of Drilling
R L
s
U T
\\
\<-
1:
.
G H J
RIG
MANPOWER .
RIG
Appendix 1.9.3
QQ!!ill!
Co.pany a) Rouatabout Crew Rouatabout Puaher rrlfe 2.!! Barge Engineer la tcbatander I.) Crane Opt 'r( 0) Radio Opt'r(o) T. P.
Dri !ler hsiatant Drlr Derr1ckllsn Floormen 3/4 Motorman Rig Mechanic
Petroleum Engr. lIudlof,ger( s) lIud Engr. Cementer Divara (5) Directional Engr. Schlumberger (3)
Geologistl Strat 19r
apher (Palaeontologht/Palynologist)
6-10 .an
etc.
(5 to 17 men)
ca~e~~~g Staff
On Board I
50 to 90 me"
MUD TREATING
MUD-GAS
SEPJ.RATOR
EQUIPMENT
\,
HO I "'XING Pu..
UNIT
,-. :9C12':~~I~~L~~:S
:I:l
M'.
-"'''(0 MUD
!!.2!.1J.. I
I 8urlvI[ 'AHIC.. .nll LJIIiKI "'''''luP OIIITTIO '011 C""."Y. OIIIT'I'IQ, . III ,,"Itlane 100 a..
CfllflllfUGf
I'OWfR .oMIt
SKID UGfNO
SAC.ED
MUD I'I1IIIIIMOUII.
1. UKtw'K.8&&
. .-
--
f.Ur4l'
CASING SCHEME
CASING
-, HOLE
S"I'OYI "PI
10'/>.' DMVIH
10'/..,
,.,.",.
10'/..,
SoIWAa
13 1,.-/ fT II,.
10 'I; / 14 'I."
CASlW
'~../tZ
8j.-
CD "., "-
~ON
STRING
7-/.
'1.8
.'/.0/0'
Appendix 1.9.4
MUD CIRCULATION
KELLY HOSE
STANDPIPE
SWIVEL
KELLY
TABLE
---MUD
FLOWLINE
RETURN
...;,
CD
EG.347
Appendix 1.9.5
DIAGRAM
;
OF SELF-SUPPORTED PLATFORM
j
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. D.C Af.. generators A.C generators Air compressor (die~e!) Air compressor (el!'clroe) Excitl'rs DC. switchboard A.C. switchboard Dr,twworks Rotary table Swilchboard Sand 'eel Koomey closing unil Dog house Walk way Moo pumJ's Cenlrifugal pumps Switch~ard lB. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23 24. 25. 26. 27. 2B. 29. 30. 31, '32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 3R. 39. 40.. Active mud I~n'" Trealing mud lank Re!WIrve mud slorage DriliinA wdler tank Hydrophoo,s F,~h water prtlssu,e sel Sail water tank Salt waler pressure s.et Dr;nking water tank Drinking waler pumps Hydrophoor Boilers Eme<gency A.C.generaling s.e1 rire fighting water pump (dine!) Fire fighling water I'ump(ftlectric) R_II'8 mud slorage Distillation unit Workshop Workshop Switchboard Warehouse Baryte or cement silos Fill tank
41. 42. 43. 44. 46. 46. 47. 48. 49. 60.
SurAe lank Cementing unit (electric) Air compressor Switchboard AUK. pipe rack Derrick Cran.. Well logging unit Livino quarters Heliport
-.,
c
~
-~--
,, .'J~,I
/-~ ~~';)-,(~~~
:/
~..
-I
,I i 0 rr
-_u.-.J
I
';
.-
':n,"..i;'
'~rg ) i
'
..'
-t CD
e
l__~'
I =zr
~ -~~-
,/.,
1 .I'8~"I( ?'. 1 t, Ir~ 1 . ~ 'I"~ I.~ f ::t! IQ:1~li~; _ .. 'Jt ' P/! ."'J!,~,~I ~I 1.,..1
I
. 0-'--
fO'
1 I '
..~
1
2
I,
J~I
JJ
,("'~IJ CT'
i r"';j' (~'
I~"J
61 62 53
'f.,' ~
,I" I',;;
4-
2.
ock Sa
pie
andling
Appendix 1.2J
WELL:
CO-ORO. :
TERTIARY
E~T. DURATION:
I
650
CRETACEOUS
iOOO
H70
III I I
=;=
1 U i 2.'12 hole
ilK. . Re~\edor
f4BO
TR\ASSIC.
~750 iB~O
..... ..
-r ~:. .
iO%1I t550
zooo
PERMIAN
1 76/s.2S00m
b Y2 n
t hole
. OBJECTIVE
CARBON IF.
3000. ._.
~O80 .
.,.. .....
. . ..
..24J1C!dor
UQ8
.. . "T'"
0 PQ~SI8L! O&JECTIVE
TD 32QOm
CD
"CD
I') N 0> co C>
EG.620
Appendix
1.8.1
a mudlogging
part of the
unit necessary
present, items)
this
contracter
supply
Stereomicroscope Hicroscope Hotplate Bulbs Lens Picking Tweezers }1icroscope Ejector Diamond Spatulas Glass stirring plates examining examining tray glasses slides slides for pointed for tissues needles (flatbrushes lamps
(with and
polarisation Transformer
outfit)
microscope
lamps
and
pointed (small/OO,
pencil
rods
trays tray
(one
and
five
cell
model)
Chapman Picking
Coverglasses Glass Slide Sample Sample Sample Slide Picking Thin slides labels bags boxes labels trays slide section
picking
slides
(self
adhesive
for
glass
slides)
description
Appendix
1.8.1
page 2
Carborundum Hortar
& Pestle & Rack tubes (for SR detection flat bottom by pyrolysis) 12 and 24 cm)
(diam.
(20, 100 and 200 mesh)" (set of 3 sieves table sieves (50 cc) with nozzle assembly: 250 cc with cover and receiver)
bottle plastic
Funnel
Alcohol Handlens
diam.
100 rom
(metal
and plastic)
Colour
Tape-worm Felttip Alzarin Nethylene Lakeside Tragacanth (Hydrochloric Stationary coloured acid, 10%) carbon paper, pencil sharpener, a set waterproof red S blue No. 70 markers, big, red and black, to mark cores
(incl. pencils,
envelopes,
self adhesive
tape)
Manuals
Small toolkit (incl. a watchmakers screwdrivers set).
S? ..... CD fC') N $ C)
Appendix
1.8.2
LIST
OF RECOMMENDED
EQUIPMENT
AND
CONSUMABLES
FOR
PALYNOLOGICAL
INVESTIGATIONS
AT THE WELLSITE
1 pce
light, max. magnification 1000-1250x, lamp, spare bulbs and immersion oil.
or Leitz.
comparator.
Centrifuge, make BHG, type Z 364, 220 V, 330 W, complete with head for 100 cmss tubes, 4 reducing sets for 15 cmss tubes, and spare fuse. Hand centrifuge, with
10
1 pce 1 pce
glass Lab.
tubes, Instr.,
cap. model
15 cmss
to fit centrifuge. 25 W,
Turbo Mixer, make Techn. with spare nylon fork. Hot plates, make EGO, cables and plugs. Transformer, Electric Nickel
metres
2 pces
complete
with
220/127
with
cable
cables, microsieves
(mesh no.
length
multiple
in stainless
806), make VECO.
steel
setting,
hole
diameter
micro-
2 pees 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 8 pces
ditto, 20 micrometres
ditto, Metal 30 micrometres burner nail
Hammer,
Plier. Baco.
Screwdriver, ditto, ditto, Nickel Picking Glass size size size 1.6 x 9 x 200 mm.
3 pces
10 pces
"
\!)
CZ) ,.., N
9)
Appendix
1.8.2
page 2
China
markers,
make
different tubes.
colours.
for washing
cleaning
powder. detergent.
2 boxes
1 booklet
size
2 pairs 1 pce 1 pce 1 pair 4 pces 4 pces 2 pces 10 pces 2 pces 8 pces 2 pces 2 pces 12 pces 8 pces 2 pces 5 pces 1 pce 1 pce
gloves,
coat,
grey, safety
size 54 10-12.
towels".
Towels.
Floor mops.
Small Rolls
basins,
with
spout,
500 cms3.
0 160
rom.
~
.......
.... N 0\ CD
<.!>
CD
Appendix page 3
1.8.2
Centrifuge ditto, ditto, ditto, Residue Cardboard Plastic ditto Plastic Box with
tubes,
capacity
100 cms3.
08
45 rom, with
corks.
2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 5 pces 2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 5 pces 3 pces 1 pce
200 pces
boxes stands
centrifuge tubes.
tubes.
100 sheets
filtering slides,
0 185
make
rom.
Menzel,
"cleaned",
100 cover-glasses,
32 x 22 rom.
make
Chance
no.
I, size
20 x 20 rom.
size
Wooden
box
glass
slides.
Cardboard Wash
for slides.
basins,
plastic. paper.
pH indicator sheets.
boxes.
120-150
rom.
black,
water-proof.
type HB.
CD "
N "" 0> Ii) (!)
Densimeter,
Sodium
capacity
up to at least
s.g.
2.2.
carbonate.
Separate
Chemicals
(to
be packed
in
separate
boxes/tins
of
or
1 litre):
15 litres
5
1 1 15 5
"
" " " "
Hydrochloric acid, 36% Hydrofluoric acid, 40% Nitric acid , 60% Ammonium hydroxide,25% Alcohol, denatured Water, destilled.
.,. U) "I<) N en \0 CI
i -j
to
""
".
,
Takes most of the laboratory material, serves also as cupboard and undercarriage for fume-cupboard in the lab-room.
,~f,,/
/
j - .J ,,~-----I
..
~
I ~61
I
..' I em---eo:
I
Box
Nr.
: approx. 12 kgs.
and as work-
Takes the folded-in fume-cupboard some small lab. items; may serve bench in the lab-room.
-1
'
40cm---..
.,
E
'.)
i
:-Z6cm
/I -j) -l
I
:> ...
I t
l
!
-r
:.-:'-;:: 1,/
:\
':
::~,-;;
(/
I
J.
Fume-cupboard Consisting of made
I L -.; 15.5;
I.
J
",'
T
.
~
I
,~
I
I'" ~
' ~-~~:a
"
'...,
I I
/I
'-..:
"
I
I
,
I
I ,I
II , ,
~ ..
\
""
''''~''''
, !
1) base 4 mms
plate, thick.
of white panels,
plastic made of
2) folding-in !
vertical
I 1
I I I I 1 I I I ,
. . . ..
~
~_.-:
.!
I
1
.
transparent plastic,S mms thick; fan in rear panel, make ITHO, type VR 20/1, 220 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz, 70 W max. 3) covering panel with made of transparent hinging plastic front lid, 5 mms. thick.
I
!
/:~::~o:-.:-_-c~::=::::::~::::::::::~====::=:
//~/
--1
_: - -7.~1 /1I
"1"
4) exhaust tube, plastic, fits rear of fan; length 80 cms, inside diameter
'e"
21 cms.
5) spare fan, as above.
':t!~
83cIII
, -I
Appendix 1.8.3
GEOLOGICAL SECTION
rr '-'-'I~ -'. ~:.~.. ~..
: :.
GEOLOGICAL SECTION
~ "CD ,.,
N en ID (!)
processing area
...
Appendix
2.1.1
EXAMPLE
OF SAMPLING
PROCEDURES
Cutting Samples
Samples frequency
purposes
small
bags
(100
gr):
at
Set G
The samples making-up the above sets have to be collected at each sampling depth. The 500 gr samples are to be drained (not washed) and put into plastic or linnen bags. The 100 gr samples have to be washed, dried and put into plastic bags. Set G to be sent to base camp with every available transport for detailed investigation. All samples should be put into boxes which show set identification, e.g. A, B,C etc. Sample identification well name, depth (in mbdf, corrected
All samples have to be labelled with for time lag) and set identification. Sidewall samples
In order to ensure full stratigraphic information it is recommended to shoot SWS at an average spacing of ca. 25 m (these SWS should be shot in addition to those selected for petrophysical and geochemical purposes). Depth and number to be selected on the basis of wireline and litho logs by the petroleum engineer and the stratigrapher (and agreed upon by the base). Each sample to be labelled (with waterproof marker) with well name, depth and shot number on the glass container and depth and/or shot number also (to be scratched) on the metal cover. Core samples programme. basket samples possible.
Should
be collected
whenever
~ "CD f") N en U)
C)
Appendix
2.2.1
EXAMPLE OF
MASTERLOG
C :::I
a IO~ <
...
z:
LL.
~ 0 -I 0 :=1
:I:
..J
\,!]
z: ..J2 <I\J~
-ILJ ~ct: 00. ~ct :x:uJ
...1-
:z: ,..J
-'v) 0;< O~
~1 and C2. % 0 2-
-z: 1-
L\THOlO6\CAL
DE.SCRIPTION
m/hr
20 I!I 10 5 0 0
TOTAL GAS ~O
400CI.
3500 m
0-0.4 C; . C4 :
9'4)
100
............ ~:::z:..........
~,..,.,.
,...,.., r<w ,.....,.. ,.,." ,......,
Marl",qroy
,,-.-
"~-,...,.,
,--
,....,
,......
........
.35sa
I
,...""", .............
LimC!!>~oncz,white.
I I
T.
:?IbCO
. . . .- .
friab\a
Shel Q
dark gray.
~~,.....,
~,."...,.,
.......,
~........,
"3b50
Marl,9rczy.
,...".", ,....,
~""""'
,..... I I I
I'
,...." ,....,. I I
- "'.,...
.::;:: ::;::
5halC!
darK 9ray-brown.
::;::
3700
::;::
- ::;=
--
--
......
m
II) \:)
N '" 0>
::;=
'I
~hQla "bi~um',"Qu~.I b\Q~\( J p'yri~ic.) carbaoac.QQU~ Fra9mQn~s. 5and5~onC! bmadium" ~r}ed, 9rey- light rown.
5h~\e
black
EG.628
EXAMPLE
m
:c
OF CONTRACTOR'S
'TI Z ~
Appendix
2.2.2
MASTERLOG
~ ~
:c
I/) "
I
i 2I i ";:;~ . :
"" ~
III
0000 ~ i ~ ;! ~ 3 ,zI 3 $ 3 It :t
i~ L~ ~ ii
i~
0 e>nt;> y -I
h~H -i~.":"
88
ii!~
B "I
I
:t
'Eii ~ :U m
;U
!!j
::D r-
~~;
!I
51!
;
.
::e'
rr-
0 0
~ z 0-<
;::: ):. e5
I:
~ ~ ~
&
-~
~~
..
I 000
! .:
j
, ~ I I
~
'
c.. ~
,,~
:
!
!
~~~ ~.
..
ji
.
7' w I\)
~ C/)
Cd
MUD
W \\c~N ~J V 'V.~~I\i-t:.e", J.>v :\.~I) IC"~I y Pt4::'I~ Y~1.J p.)w\l .n..:a.i\l.\1t1, G GeI.I;):.'OJh I ,. i.L. Vi~lcl "'...~ I'; Me U..,g ~c u..""n, n Cr~6Ckt'unl"nl:.&pymi F-n h,Or~n pVltmh., R:n M...o I :a.h f) tro ,,,.on;1 NT.. ..".,...,hat.,. '1.;:..1;.111, 1.-. m ;ml LC l~1 o;-'"~
I "'I.~
'
DRILUNG
NB Nt:...bli RR Rurun IMt OBD_bit T8 T.JI'b,Jdn" C8 CUI. LId
I UTHOLOGY
f!
I ,
CORES
WOaW.,;'.. onbot f
fWu pp Rut.alCln 1G Tnu~
CIG C.,JflntICa.oo
i'I<.~":r.J ., 0I!II'w8lon
r-.~~-~~'~~!~!
PU'''P~cuur.1
OM
,rpm)}
I
J
I
T
TESTS
OST i!~~I,.."".rlIetl
L
loUI'Wy
t~ 'j~:~-:-ll.\arl
r"~~:S4I-IlU'tone t -:.~iW
LljP>'"
fZ~G88UCOftM
.Fir ~RFT
"'.Ja~~ ~ ..'
F0,JOuonz""
F":;;;)~
[~.....
")".1'/':",;"
I..:.t";~
1Muog..AII
AATEOF
PEHE1AATIOH
"011...1...0(
[_J ~
...
:c c
~
L
!
'II..
Ll~ t"3~~t_CoII~te
UTHOLOGV CUTTINGS "
.1
~8 g ~
n-in_1I 0 CJ
HVDROCGAS , ,.......
(DF._.e
.o.,"-J./d'U# OGM(~/.'.I
ICAU : I/~" _8I""'-~",-,
ODr1
',J
$
:;Zi;;~~'-
~:;:~~'---'~-'
r'
a
'.
---""liS'. I.
a :
..
6)
..
-:; '.'
'.
.~,,~..
I I
: . ,..
"
is
_l2Of
--11_'
OaI8c~'."
DUCNPTIOH
I.!!!!!!!!!!t-,--
lID""
~ 242
""
~===:=-~_.- ..--
alO'imL 1llIiOI""'~.II06.tg
!!!!.~...'
I!!!II!2!L
-",.....
...' ---
-.''''', -- _7311
::::.u=~~
,~ I
""'.I/ItIOI pt:llflMr.
"""1) ..-..._-~...
M""
~.
.."..,
ID D&IrA.
--'
7425
i . '
_a-
""',
It .
7_t=~~~
7fllQOIbII-7eSl&-",811
J;
i -
~~~-;~~
IIIr.__.
---, -
OW
~11I""""'''' $0.8_""
18_--' 7 ...........
II1II""""'--..7581 ~,.:::::.=-.:=,
,I
.
I
2
---
(i
Appendix page 1
2.2.3
RATE OF PENETRATION
CURVE
(SEE
2)
responses terms
are referred
to with
which
BASELINE:The
trend
is used
as a basecould then
lithology. trend
sequence where
is used
the limestone
d~illing
greater
than
breaks
usually they
althoug~
formation
pressure when
might
be encountered
REVERSED
a fault
is crossed.
A reversed_drilling
BREAK:in the ROP. They oceur when
DRILLI~G
also
decrease away
from the baseline. trend is a gradual, It usually zone" usually indicates where pore uniform, a
TREND:
in the ROP.
pressure
transition
pressures
are increasing.
~ CD
ft) N 0> II) C!)
EG.624
Appendix page 2
2.2.3
COMPACTION
TREND:
more
compacted. be seen
can sometimes
by observing the
J: to.
ROP curve
over
long
intervals.
\ \ COMPACTION
TREND
\,
!
DRIL.L.ING BREAK
SHAL.E
BASE
LINE
TREND
DRIL.L.-OFF
TREND
FAST
SL.OW
10 <t
"-
ROP
CURVE
TERMINOLOGY
EG.625
Appendix 2.2.4
BETWEEN
DRILLING
SPEED (ROP)
LOG
0
MUD LOG
%
20 40 60 80 100
. ..&..~~""'''''..L.-'--'-~..L-'''' ~
~.L:~~~:::~:::'" ,
:~..:
'-~..,:'''
SLOW
----------------- -------------------GI-~
J
~ CI)
...""'..A..~~~""""...:'- ~""' "'...~ """..-' L.""' ""~""~-'-~~"""""",,~ ~-&.~.A.~""'~"""~:::: ~.A.~'" ~ ..&.. ~...L.~ ...""'-L""'..& L.-'--'-""-'-~I:'. -,--' -'-..,L.""""""" ~ -' ~ ~"' ""
L.""'~~....
';:i:;
--------------------------------------
-----------------
~-
.....-
Shale
~ J --~-----~-Bit Worn
-----------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0____-----------------------------------------------------------. ,
---------------------------------------
Very
Low
of
Sand
Increase
in Rop
:. Greater % Silt
Cavings No Slow Down on the Drilling Rate Sandstone
--~::::::::i::::::
...... Q) I<)
0> '" co C)
EG.615
Appendix
2.2.5
TIME LAG
Time lag can be defined as the time required to travel from the bottom o~ the hole to the Time lag should be known hole in order to assigne are sampled at the shale Two methods are available
at any time during the drilling correct sample depth to cuttings shaker. to determine time lag:
TRACER
METHOD
- When a drill pipe connection is made tracer material is placed in the open end of the drill pipe and after resuming the drilling operation the time/number of pump strokes are recorded for the tracer material to arrive over the shale shaker. As tracer material literally anything can be used which will not plug the bit and which can be recognised or detected in the return mud. ( e.g. cellophane, paint flakes, dye, rice or gas producing tracers (Calcium carbide
2 CALCULATION
METHOD In this method it is neccessary to calculate: - the annular volume (between the drill pipe and the wall of the hole) - the - the volume in the drill rate of circulation pipes and drill collars derived from the
.
pump output.
!!!!.
The total volume of the mud (in drill pipes/ drill collars + annular volume) is divided by the pump output to arrive at a Total Circulation (1)
The drill pipe/drill collar volume is divided by the pump output to obtain Downhole Circulation
(2)
The Uphole Circulation Time (Time lag) is obtained by subtracting (2) from (1) this can also be expressed in Number of Pumpstrokes (see example)
,
Appendix
2.3.1
DEPTH
CONTROL
DURING SIDEWALL
(modified after
SAMPLING
NAM)
the following procedure is given. The the depth
In order
to ensure
proper
depth
control
in cased hole) over the section concerned. some detail to facilitate correlation. with the reference log and calculate
c. Depending whether the log reads too deep or too shallow, add or subtract the depth discrepancy from the depth read on the depth counter. Set the depth counter for corrected depth. d. Relog the section. Both logs should match. REFERENCE GR CORREL. GR
-rEPTH-D~~REPANCY(XI
DEPTH. (-0)
- ~
~ ~
Example: Present log reads (x) m deeper than the reference log. Therefore to be subtracted from the depth as read from the camera. "True" depth (D) relative to reference log is now (D) - (x). (x) m has
Appendix
2.4.1
1) Introduction Extracts taken from Petroleum Engineering Manuals of larger OPCO's are presented below to serve as a guide for Exploration geologists on core handling at the wellsite. The PE is responsible for ~his in first instance, but the assistance of the stratigrapher is appreciated. 2) Preparation of core-boxes and other equipment The following items should be available in sufficient condition when the core is taken out of the barrel.
quantity
and
in working
2a)
Core-boxes, with fitting lids. Boxes are usually of wood. Suggested interior dimensions: length: 110cm, width: core diameter + lcm. NB: Some (larger) OPCO's use a set of clearly numbered and marked (Top/Bottom), so-called "derrick-floor-boxes" to collect and clean the core. Lenghts of pipe, cut in two, clearly marked and having stoppers at both ends, can also be used. After cleaning (normally carried out with damp rags), the core is then transferred to the final boxes. Other equipment rags, claw-hammer, nails (3-5cm), plastic bags, large and small, labels .to mark boxes as well as samples and sample-positions, marker pens, indelible, black and red, stapler and staples, packing tape, rulers (of which at least one 50 or 100 cm long) or measuring (roll-type) ) for "sealed" tins with lids ) petrophysical aluminium foil ) samples. crates to transport tins needed for core-description: oil-show detection: UV box, chlorothene, acetone, rock-description: core-description sheets as well hammer, Tapeworm, handless, HCl 10%, etc.
2b)
tape
2c)
Items
3) Lay-out space Prior to recovery make arrangements for cleaning and laying-out undisturbed, safe, well-lit and if possible roomy space.
of core
in an
4) Core-retrieval This may take place on the derrick-floor or on the pipe storage space. Just before core reaches surface, transport the numbered and marked core-boxes to the retrieval area and stack them in a safe place and out of the way. Box-tops should face towards core-barrel. Have one man ready to feed the boxes in the right sequence with tops towards the barrel. Box No.1 is the first to be fed in. It will be filled with the bottom part of the core. Have one man ready to receive the core out of the barrel and for putting the core in the right sequence in the core-boxes or trays. NEVER let this man get his hands or feet underneath core-barrel or core.
Appendix
2.4.1
Page 2
See to it that the driller never lifts the core-barrel more than 30-50cm above the derrick-floor. Heavily mud-contaminated cores may be hosed down with a gentle stream of water before they are put in the boxes. Watch core for HC-manifestations and open fractures as it is retrieved. Make sure that core segments remain in the right sequence and the right
way up.
Transport the place permitted the boxes after the core-barrel has been emptied one by one to where they will be finally processed. (A basket is also but NEVER use a pallet).
5) Core sampling
and description Measure core recovery. If this is not 100% try to establish which part is missing and record the evidence. If you can't tell assume the bottom part lacks. Mark core-fit and orientation as per figure 1 (of this appendix) Note the core-depths, top and bottom, of every core-box (i.e. Bl =
m, Tl (=B2) =
core-labels and/or boxes. Wrap the labels in plastic bags and staple to prevent them from getting wet. Insert the labels, one bottom, one top, in each of the boxes. Carefully sample small pieces of core at regular intervals for lithology, porosity and shows. Avoid core damage. Alternatively, to facilitate the description especially of cores from carbonates, sand a strip along the outside of the core with a small hard electric drill with a sanding disc (medium grade) attachment. The equipment might be barrowed from the rig mechanic. Where core is sampled for petrophysical, stratigraphical or geochemical purposes, clearly mark in the core-box where which samples were taken. Record depth/depth-interval as well as size of these samples. Place labels and preferably wooden blocks, otherwise rags, in places where samples were taken out. Examine and describe the core, and make a reproducible drawing on a suitable scale. Indicate sample-positions. Stay to the point: lithology porosity,
6) Transport Have the core packed tightly for shipment. Check box-numbers, core-depths and addresses. Prepare manifest specifying what is being sent (to whom/what for) and remember once more that PE remains responsible in first instance.
~ m ~ N ~ W ~
Appendix page 3
2.4.1
CORE
HANDLING after
(Modified
1.
2. 3.
4.
Prepare adequate number of boxes, have rags. Set up joints of drill pipe, etc., as required to lay out core.
Supervi se core lay out to insure correct orientatian and order.
Wipe core clean with clean dry rags. Fit core. Space rubble between ends of core. Put rubble in sample sack and mark depths.
5.
Fit Core
Core
..~....' .;":,;,,.:.,.q.-'~ ~ ',""",. ...:''''''.'.
Rubble
Core
.
-'. . ;--, . ,..."'t"-. ,,';,:.,. ..; ;, ';~~. " ",'''':'', ..~ (.1..:~-~': ".1'.:.""':~'..~'.. .' ":..~'::";"..
Mark core
..
A
I.
2'~
-" jl ;"~~:'i'.i.~::.:'"','~:,.:~f~l:J.
. tI.',
e',.
.. '.
.
. ..
Poor Fit .. . '. ..~ .:. r:~~;'~~ ...~~'.)' @ :.. /; J' f:~ I.' ~'~!: "-'~~"
r ._~
No marks
necessary
One chevron
each
Two chevrons
side of break
side of break
6. Strap corej unrecovered interval understood to be at bottom unless known otherwi se.
7. Scribe core with reference lines and depths, using felt marker pens and straight edge. Black line alwavs to left, red to right. It is often helpful to mark top of core portions with T, and base with B.
Bottom(-::~'~~H~~'_:::-=:"~:~-:>?~'~
r~)E ~~~':~~"::~".~~rk:::~~.~~
No Fit Good Fit
~f>;;;
Poor Fit
~.:'~~..f{f!}
Top
'~he red is to the right when the core is the right way up". This is SIPM practice. Shell Oil; however, mark their cores the other way around, see SWANSON, 1981.
PNTH/5,
Nov.
1981
Appendix 3.2.1.1
000 0 0 000
Q
OQD('?O 0 \)Q
()O
0(7
~CJ QO
D vC;
&) 0 OC;r;ODO
00 0
ODD
~OJ
~QP
Q o~ODO
CC1
00
~a~O DOG
C/ 0
'bDO~
~o\J
C)oOO
Q~D
C00P2~
~0 Do ~0()
C/O 0 ()
D~Oo\j
00
(JD
0
()
DOOo~~O
DOo
0
oOoa~Oo
0 aD
Q ~JI '''0
0 C>
aGoG
\)'70
~0 (JQ~
tb OO(j 00 pO 0 00
5
dc]
Q~ ()
~OOO
~o
10
(JD
15
~
0
O
Qo
00000
0
Q
0
Q f>
~0
C
DO~~ \J 0 D~ ~~o 00 0D O V
O'i>
d~'
\:>O()Oooo~
0
~GOo~
o(Jo
0
OOooDcs
<!/J
O f&
O 000
0 ~
f) IW'
~B.ooooO~o 0
o~~'Wo
~Q
O~OO~O 30
Q
CJ~ o~Q
ceo G
~~~o 0 ~o~ooo
40
00 0 Wo
OOPAo
o,oo~\)~
a~O~DOb 0
0 0 (fA UQ
V9
C::::>
OD
~ o~.
O~ 000 ()
0 o&J f1
D
c::> al> 00 0
C)Q
0
C)~
oOoC)~O{)Q~
OVO~O 0 0 ~ 0.O~o\)
50
D~
~ o~~~.~Q ooC:JoQO~ ~
o~~
0
()ti?no~O~(}(//7A~
'0
~l{;D
o 0 (J o~o
DO
000
@a~o~o PoO:O
,\I 10 "II)
60
75
N '" (J\ CD C)
Appendix 3.2.1.2
GUIDE FOR
LITHOLOGICAL (modified
OF SEDIMENTARY ROCKS
a BENJAMINS 1981)
( I APEWORM. )
Symbolsond obbreviotions
NOTES
ON ABBREVIATIONS are
the
presented
(f)
in "informal-abbreviations"
"computer-codings", e.g. for
oblique 1ST
siltstone:
When rules using is
Slst
abbreviations recommended:
adherence
to
the
following
Initial Letters
of Abbreviations
The same abbreviation is used for a noun and the corresponding adjective. However, nouns begin with a capital letter, adjectives and adverbs with a smatl letter. No distinction is made between and the plural of a noun are not used after abbreviations otherwise arise. the abbreviation of the singular
Singular
and Plural
Fullstops
(J
except
where confusion
might
Comma U
Used after a group of abbreviations to indicate the end of the group Example sandstone, grey, hard, coarse grained, ferruginous: 55t, gy. hd, crs, fe (;) Used to separate various tYpes of rocks in one description, e.g. when the main rock is intercalated with other components Example shale, brown, soft. with sand lavers. fine grained, Sh, brn, soft; S Lyr, f, glc glauconitic: Used to indicate the range of a characteristic Example fine to medium, grev to dark grey: gy gy f m, dk Used as an abbreviation' for "and" Example shale and sandstone: 5h + 5st (::tt Used as the abbreviation for "more or less" or "approximate" Example shale with approximately 25% sand: Sh!25%S of an abbreviation is used to indicate Examples very sandy!
well bedded;
Semi-colon
Dash
(.)
Plus 1+)
Plus-minus
Underlining
emphasis
M
ill adjectives (s) or adverbs and indefinite colours
well sorted:
Brackets
gy 1bIJ
on drawings it is advisable
features/structures, bioturbated Packstone benthonic becomes: fossils
Pkst, +~
foraminiferal
pelletoidal
SIUCIClASTIC
ROCKS
(p.2-7)
C. T ex1Ure
(p.8-131
..
(p.t2, 15)
~
~ N 0> CD C)
Standard lef1-right
sequence
for presentation
of alternations:
Evop I Doi-Lsl-Mrll
Sh-Clst-Ssl-CgII
C/Vo-Ig-Met
Appendix
3.2.1. 2
SIUCICLASTIC ROCKS
ADMIXTURE
STREAKS. LENSES
MAIN
ROCKTYPE
STREAKS. LENSES
CJ
c:=J
L=:J
Cl/CL
Cloy
} 1:::-:::-:::1
org/CL
argillaceous
L:=J E=:J
} 1:::-:::-:::-:1
E::J
EJ c::J
L---' J
I~
H...I
~:it~\.(.,~T
Ld
L::J
.;"TO
EZJ
[::-:::::.1 ;~~~;ne
Ed
1<>
Grv/GV
~Gravel
CJLJ
r=J~
'~
Cgl/CG Conglomerate
G'" -68
ESJ ;to
2
UNCONSOLIDATED
BITUMINOUS
ROCKS
STREAKS. LENSES
MAIN
L:J
Ed
II
~ ~
I~~I
Gwke /GK
Greywccke
..
L.....J "LG
I
ROCKTYPE
/PE Peat
ADMIXTURE
STREAKS, LENSES
[[=:] L;]
[[=:]LG 1- -ILG
LJ LG ~ LG
/TF ~Tf
Tuff
Ag,vo/VA volcanic
~ES;]
\III Oil
Agglomerate
~
EXAMPLES OF COMBINED SYMBOLS
L.:.:...:J
[CJ
1111(:"':"";):',.L.IIJI
CI,slt+S Strk /CL SJ.SA SR silty Clay with Sand streaks S,IcI(fld!+Tf Strk/SALCFD+TFSR lithaclastic and slightly feldspathic Sand with Tuff streaks Sh,~,cgl /SHSACG very sandy and conglomeratic Shale
111 AI
RtBd/RT
Root bed
~
~
bit/BT bituminous
~~
3
EXAMPLE OF COMBINED SYMBOLS .. I'" Sh,bit ISH BT .1 :;: bituminous Shale, Oilshole
IGNEOUS
AND METAMORPHIC
ROCKS
ROCKTYPE
rv~~~vl
ADMIXTURE
STREAKS. LENSES
L=:;J
r:::::J
Ivv
vvl
p p p ElllJ
~fe/FG FG ferruginous
IMMMMMI
~.. Glauconite
~Glc/GC
EXAMPLES OF COMBINED SYMBOLS F-::Fol
rack
."""f":."."M
Quartzite
~Morb/MMMB
Marble
~
~
rggj + +
Gns/MMGS Gneiss
PYROCLASTIC ROCKS
Iv!!l
cherty Chalk
-VC
FIi"Tl
11011 0110
vo/VA
volcanic Breccia
Agglomerate;
4
0> II) UI '" m ..... (II ~
Appendix 3.2.1.2
EVAPORITES
MAIN
ROCK TYPE
ADMIX-STREAKS.
TURE Gyp/GY Gypsum Anhd/AH Anhydrite ./SL Salt in general (saliferous) LENSES
rl
~
[""A7l
~~ ~~
Mg C12.6H20 KCI.Mg C12.6H20 KC!.Mg 504' 3H2 0 Mg 504.H20 K2Ca2Mg(504J4.2H20 KCI.Na CI Ca C12.2Mg C12.12H20
r==J EJJ
[S]
s. s.
~ ~ Iffij
EXAMPLE
1****1
~ ~
-/NA
Halite. Racksalt
./KM
K and Mg salts in general
OF MINERALOGICAL COMPOSITJON
./SV -/TY
i+!+!+1
I:t:tfjjj
SV CN
Gypsum :Ca504.2H20 ;density 2.32. Monoclinic cleavage ;scratched by fingernail. Turns white if held over flame. Floats on bromoform of $.9. 2.5 Anhydrite :Ca504;density 2.90-2.98 .Ortharhambic cleavage ;nat scratched by fingernail. Remains cleor if heated Sinks in bromoform of 5.g. 2.5 5
CARBONATE MAIN
ROCK TYPE
STREAKS. LENSES
~ ~
~
calcoreousL
=.J ~
MIXED SIUCICLASTICS-CARBONATES
Dal/DM Dolomite
Dol Lst /DL
~E;J
~ L
~
1-----I
Mrl/MR Mart
I
E:::J EJ
~
~
Dolomite-Limestone
(~equal mixture or nol determined)
=.JI
:z::I
I~> :;:
]+=+~+ }
p::;:r;::q
1
E;J
CJ
SYMBOLS
!-sl,s/SC
sandy Limestone
OF COMBINED
~ ~
Chk /CK Chalk uncons lime/LM Unconsolidated Lime (e. g. calcareous Ooze)
CARBONATE ROCK
~[S]
1==1
TYPES
b:::::i:::::::d
EXAMPLES
MIXTURES OF
~ ~
E2@
Wkst,chk/LS
chalky
CK W Lime-Wackestone
[[J] ~
IDENTIFICATION
OF CARBONATE
ROCKS
REACTION WITH 1011: COLD HCI ~Lst /LS ~Lst,doI/ LSDM ~Dol, calc/ DM LS ~Dal/DM Limestone (90-10011: Caco3J dOlomitic Limestone (50-9011: CaC03J calcareous Dolomite (50-1011: CaC03J Dolomite 1011: Caco3J
Instant. violent. specimen floats and U Moderate. but continuous.
:r:
.~."' ~,~,,~
up reaction.
m'...,. J
Nilto veryweak; beads form slowly during up ~ 10 1/2 hour. Acid becomesmilky.Heating speeds} co
Vi
and ail impregnated Lst/LS may react slowly.
Lst anhd/LS
SH, LSAH
.
It> It> ....... ~ N C1> CO C)
~~h~t~~~=~oise
Darkturquoise
K-ferricyanide
:-
~~~c:~e~:ne
Ankerite
(~)
0.211: Alizarin
Appendix
3.2.1.2
CARBONATE
\J
PARTICLE
SKELETAL PARTICLE
PARTIClES TYPE
Foss/F
6
R5
Whole
fossils,
Bel, ong/SF R2 ~
BCI,rnd/SF
~ ~
<D
<II>
1/16
-4mm
>4mm
-/FLCO
1/16
- 4mm
>4mm }
foraminifera.
-/SF FP@
foraminifera.broken
NON-SKELETAL
~ ~
e @
ABBR. Peld/PT Micrpeld/PM
1/16 - 4mm
>4mm 1/16 ComposIte . . Internal texture
4mm
Lcl/LC
Lel,oggr/LC Psoo/PS
0
AG <YJ 0
Angular
>4mm
}
1/16 - 2mm <1/16mm
Lithoclosts, Rounded
SYM.
GpSI IPS AG CD
9
'*'
Pelletoid
Micrapelle10id
2)
21 For definition
see page 9 B
CARBONATE
OOATED PARTIClES
PARTICLE
TYPES
EXAMPLES
OF COMBINED SYMBOlS
Oo,spt! 00
-0
Superficial
aoid (single-Ioyer)
In general add horizontal bars to any particle cooted with one layer. (See also Fl CO page 8)
00/00 P,so/PD
Onk 10K
0
@
0
@
Onkd/OK
Ooid 11/16-2mml Pisoid 1>2mml Multiple-layer cooling Onkoid 1I/16-2mml Onkoid } 1>2mml
~ ~ ; ~
.
hTWl.
Wkst,peld,bcl/LS PTSFW pelletoidal and bioclastic Lime-Wackestone Lst,chk,onk,suc/DLCKOKS r Dol dolomitic Limestone
chalky and onkoidal. sucrosic
G 0
SKELETAL PARTICLES have the some bask symbol as used tor fossil content ~ supplemented with signs indicating fragmentation, rounding and/or coating. ISee pages 8 and 181
The term PELLETOIDhas various definilions. Loosely defined it is used to describe Lime-Mudstone (faecal) pellets in general. More precisely defined it is a non-layered. rounded non-skeletal particle with a micritic internal texture, between 1/16 and 2 mm in diameter. As such it is a subclass of CD.Silt-sized similar particles ore termed micropelle1oid. 9
ORIGINAL COMPONENTS BOUND TOGETHER DURING DEPOSITION LACKS DEPOSITIONAL ORIGINAL TEXTURE RECOGNIZABLE COMPONENTS NOT BOUND TOGETHER GRAIN SUPPORTED MUD CONTAINS MUD >10%
UME
BOUNDSTONE
PACKSTONE
DURING
MUD SUPPORTED
~E -'::\. ~o
I-(\J D..
W Mdsll
- WACKESTONE
DEPOSITION
~A
M
<10% aph!
UME - MUDSTONE
aphanitic
A
FINE RECRYST ALUZED TEXTURE COARSE xlnl X suel S
crystalline
Appendix
3.2.1.2
TEXTURE
- GRAIN
RANGE
SIZE (Wentworth's
scale. slightly
modified)
NOMENCLATURE
mm 256
I'm
Phi 2J VISUAL -B
CARBONATES(Crystal size)
Bld/BO Boulder
2S
LIJ CbI!CB I-
64
4 2 I
1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1150
-6
-2 -I 1000
500 250 125 63 20
ro~
. }.
coarse crystalline
~xln/ill xln/.
crs xln/S mxln/Ixln/X !xln/!xln/microxlrV-
I.&J crs/C
IZ ILl 0:: c:t m/M f/F !/V w
ill/R
0
1
500fJ.m 250fJ.m
2 fine crystalline 3 4 5.65 very fine crystalline extremely fine crystalline 1) microcrystalline
125fJ.m
63fJ.m < 20 I'm
t-
SIt/SJ
(chalkyl
appearance
= -Log
diameter
11
CLASSIFICATION
(at
Compact crystalline ;often "feather-edge" appearance on breaking Friable. dull, earthy or chalky appearance; particle s~ze < 20fLm;often exhibits capillary Imbibition Visibly particulate, granular or sucrosic appearance ;breaks along particle faces
A/A B/B
11/2
C/C D/D
m/3
-j;
6OUB3d+40mc"e /60 2B3N+40 3 C5Y 60%.lype 2; 3% Ivoll of this type is disconnected B-sized vugs.
40%.type 3; 5% (vol) of this type is interconnected
e/Y
K
I II
C-sized vugs.
70 I-UA+30mB2d
TEXTURE
ROUNDNESS (~efen 10 modal size ctass)
Very elongated Elongated Slightly elongated Slighlly sphericol Spherical Very spherical
Very poorty sorted; unsoned Poorly sorted Poorly to moderately Moderately well sarted Well sorted Very well sorted SU Unimodally sorted 13 Bimodally sorted well sorted Note: Ranges
can be indicated by using two digits e.g. R24 = angular to subrounded
Appendix 3.2.1.2
~-ni
=:::'.::1
-:?~~~~ ~=;'~f
g,
: ...-
:;
;i
....
.
~~~
'
(,:~.~,~~:;;:,'~:,;,~~:~:~,Tm~:,::,~',T:~~::...
PrePII,.db,M (PO"""I(!o~l~edPtl'Olo9~,V21pp_I!7-119,19S3)
t
0,85
""S!
~ ~
010
0.20
0.30
040
'.
0,60
'\;':"~ ,~,
fi"
.- ~'~
II 1f1 II !
~_.
~~
L ~
~-=-
..
~~~
-;;~
11
,"
.::fl~ ..",!!: ~
.45
.~';"""""",,"LM
~ ~ Q 00 c::::::;c) 00 0 3~() 0
.85
Iph
~1 ::
.
..1'-
0 ::-; 0 ::
.95 ~I
.b5
(e!ong)
.75
IIph}
~-
permeable
.4
inlgran/IG
X
~
imperm/KI
Impermeable, tight
lintpar/JP
inlxln/
IXc::J
introgron/VR
..
=1=
..
A88R.
nonpor/P1
POROSITY
(Qualitative)
Fracture
Non
porosity
- porous
dense
Primary
Secan~ary porosity
(par)/P3
por /P5
repl!RP Replacement
DESCRIPTION
by means 01 the Rock Colour Chart based on the Munsell System and issued by the Geological Society of America
COLOURS
MODIFYING ADJECTIVES
II possible, colours should be described by code, e.g. 5G 5/2 with names optionally added, e.g.greyish green. When using informal abbreviations, weak and modifying colours (-ish) are placed betw~en brackets. Vivid or strong colours con be emphasized by repeating the code.
EXAMPLES
16
Appendix 3.2.1.2
Oz/ az
Sel/ GX Sid/SD Su/SU
Foss/F
Fossils
I
in general
foss/FF
~
h/
6M
Fossils, marine
Fossils, benthonic
(foss)/(F)
(6)
s'~~F6f FOSS,b~0~ 6e
Fos
Foss,pelg/0 F PEI.2J
'F BE~
Fossils, pelagic
17
FOSSILS
Acrt/ AC Alg/AG
Amm/AM Blm/BE Broc/BP Bry/BZ Chor/CH
Chtz/CZ
Acritarchs Algae Ammonites Belemnites Brachiopods Bryozoa Charophytes Chitinozoa Conodonts Carols
~Echinoderms r><:::> Fish remains {J, Foraminifera. in general Foraminifera. larger Foraminifera. smaller ~F benthonic
oram., smaller. smaller.
@
@)
@ 0 :!:&
Nannoplankton, calcareous
Oligostegina Calclspheres Ostracods Plant remains (see also page 31 Radiolaria Rudists Sponge spicules Sporomorphs Stromatoporoids Tintinnids Trilobites ~Vertebrates Wood, silicified IB
#
rJJ
7
""'V
$
.{J,s
Yl
Q)J
Rud/RD
Spic/SP
y
--.,..
F oram.. pelagic
:r
7?
~Gastropods
(1)
I
IJ
Graptolites Lamellibranchs
Is',
(5 fQ1
(3
(Pelecypods,Bivalves)
~Lomellibranchs. pelagic
Microplankton Molluscs
Dinoflagellates I
Mal/ML
BED CHARACTERISTICS BED THICKNESS mm-bd/BB cm-bd/BC dm-bd/BD m-bd/BM tn-bd/BJ tk-bd/BK vr-bd/ BH Millimetre bedded
Centimetre Decime're bedded bedded
STRATIFICATION (shown to the right 01 the litholagicol column) CHARACTER OF BASE OF BED Abrupt or sharp Gradational Erosional surface CROSS BEDDING ~Cross-bedding ( non-directional) ~F Festoon cross-bedding
~p
Metre bedded
~-,rt
Xbgx~ xbd -c/ BXC~ xbg)i~~ -L!2 /
Planar crass-bedding
~
(=)
~~s".'i~rent bedding, Slightly (poorly) bedded Fairly well bedded; bedded in general Well bedded Very well bedded ( see also LM, poge 20 1
x~x~8s%'BO..L
===cm
Pdm
19
Appendix 3.2.1.2
LARGE
SEDIMENTARY FEATURES
grd-bd/BG canv-bd/BV
Wdg/ WD
Len/ LN
::::><=> 'CJ
Wedqe-shaped loyer,
Lenticular [ayer, lens
tongue
slump,can~Sbd/
6/
- /SCF
Drgfld,seg~
/SCFH
~Asabove, horizontal
- /
SCFF
'Z27
As above,
foreset
top and flat bottom (add bedding attitudel ~Vein, sedimentary dyke
MISCELLANEOUS TERMS blky/BO Blocky Iis/Fl flg/FY flk/FK Fissile Flaggy Flaky lam/LM
Laminated 21
Ollsth/
OH
OIiSlr / OL
flow
EXAMPLE OF COMPOSITION
Lst Olisth/LS OH
Limestone
oJistolith
20
SEDIMENTARY
(shown to the right of the lithological LINEATIONS ON BEDDING Parling lineati o~ Streaming . lineatIon Shell. Plant PLANES
RIPPLEMARKS
part-Lin/ -==:.. ~~
YP
Sym-R~~ ---~
intf-RP~ asymR~I~
---'1(....-/
..
caoc-Rpl/ ZC
canx
Lunate, barcha,no'id , crescentic npples (steep sIdes concave) Linguoid ,lobate ripples (steep sides convex) Planar, parallel ripples
- R~I(
. .~~-'L ~c::
-=-
Plan-RPi~ adh-RPi~
AdheSion npples
21
SEDIMENTARY
STRUCTURES calumn)
Flute costs
pbl-Imb/ XI
C2-
-/xc
--
Directional features can be indicated by adding an arrow-head to the symbol and a numerical value corresponding to the direction(s). EXAMPLES ~(1201 IBO flut-Cs,NIBOE.(NI20E) / XF N1BON120
casts
rain - Imp/-v-uXR
Mdcrk/XM~ salt-Mid/XX Psnod/XN - /XT -/XO-L~
Raindrop imprints; gas, air or spring pits Mudcracks Salt moulds or hoppers phacoids
0
@ /:;,
Flute casts, directed N 180. E, secondary direction N 120. E 25 stri-Cs,N25E+prad-Cs,N40E/ XS N25. XPN40
40
---V--S
--w--
Striation costs and prod casls, directed respectively N 25. E and N 40. E 22 CO) CJI 10 I\,) toO (II ~
Appendix
3.2.1.2
BIOGENIC
STRUCTURES
POST
DEPOS!TIONAL
FEATURES
-/TR
- /VT
BurIBU
BarI BO
<=:::--;
/ ""''''''
Trails
trace
I .wormtrocks', fossils
'0l
-4J--VH
-+-
Vertebrate
tracks
~~~~~i~~I; H=horizontal Borings cnd animol tubes Bored surface ~Churned. bioturbated Faecal pellets. coprolites
CJ c=:J Cd
b:::J JL:]
GENERAL uncons,lse/Ci
Unconsolidated,
loose
(cons), Iri IC3 Slightly consolidated. friable cons, em! IC5 Consolidated. cemented, hard
2!!., cml IC? Strongly cemented. jt/J Jointed highly consolidated
Sri, bar I SF BO--.bloturI CB Pel,loe/PT Pit Rt IRT Alg Mal ISM Alg DamISM DO FE J...
(V=vertico!;
H=horizontol)
=
=
stromatolites
sL:] ssL:]
~
flt,frae,sks/F, SK Disturbed; laulted, fractured, slickensided !!!,frac,sks/ FF, SKSK Highly disturbed weath,leach/WT,LE Redbd/RB Red beds 31 bed 2J
Algal domes
stromatolites
II See also Rt Bd IRT ( RootBed), page 3 2) Drawn across symbols for lithology 3) Con be drown across other lithological symbols
23
FEATURES CONCRETIONS
-/BN
--.....r-v--
~Boudinage; ball cnd flow structure Pull-apart structure ~Collapse. solution breccia
ro-l L..9
geodes
in genera!
- IDV
BC,solI BRSX Rauhw I RH. -/CI
-Iso -/SE -/HT -I BY
==:I.0;;:::::
[]
Bo)(workstructure,
Rauhwacke Cone-in-cone ~Stromatactis
A
-----.JoN'--
~ r=;J ~ ~
ro-lppPhos L..9
scattered 2}
Stylolites ~Horse-toiling
---<=>--
ro-Iso L..9
1)
page 4
<z>
F9
q:Y)
(~)
Oil source rock, marginal Gas source rock Gas source rock, marginal
A
F
(FJ
HYDROCARBON
INDICATIONS
-I GSRM
B Bil Bit
SOUD HYDROCARBONS
Bitumen
#
A
....
....
. . Q)
v
.
C
.........
Asphaltite 25
CD ..., N
<
~ C!)
Appendix 3.2.1.2
INDICATIONS B A J 2
OIL
Smelt in general
0 rv (\))
0>
V
Q
OH,S
0 6
(6)
1\ \)
\' (V) V V \!
i
rOH'S
??
gas show
Gas seepage,
(~)
Weak seepage
!!
&-
.
6
4'
;,<
Heavy, tarry and dead oil ~Interpreted as oil productive Interpreted as oilorgas productive
Oil productive
:::
Blow-out
T
as gas productive
!co,
l'
Interpreted
Y '?
A = Surface (in red) I = group of indicotions 2 = single indication B = Subsurface (well lagsl Regea codes; see Standard Legend 02.35.01-02.38. J3 26
GAPS AND UNKNOWN FORMATIONS TYPE OF GAP Gap in general; origin and cut-out unknown Tables
ITITIl ~
.OOm
gap in general; m
0ffiJ
~ f23J
? 27
Non-deposition,
hiatus
Erosional
gap, angular
(U)
200m
or non-anguladD);
cut.out
200 m
STRATIGRAPHIC
ON MAPS
Cenain
Uncertain
Exp18n8tOry
eection
boundary
~
Disconformity, hiatus Angular unconformity
~~,~/}~
--U--
=:= ==:==}~bl
-u-
~J } ~u"""- ~~u-~ ~
28
(i)
069238/63
OPCO:
COUNTRY:
DEPTH
(in metres)
DESCRIPTION
OF
EACH
CONSTITUENT
I I , I I I
.
I
I I I 1 I I I I I I I
I
I
I I
!
I I I I I I I
I
I I I I I
i
I I
I , .
I I
'
~I
~If C . ,n t a CJ,
TRACES
OF
NATURAL SOlVEN1 SOlVEN1 1lCET00E REACT. OIL STAINING CUT FlUOft. FLUOR.
FAUNA TOPS
etc.)
:.-.
G69238/l
OPCO:
COUNTRY:
z ~DEPTH
RECOVERY
0 :I: (/)
REMARKS/FAUNA/FLORA
MM
'
x.
lost bullet
t EB = em pyb ull e t
OPCO:
I
Described by:
Well:
I
%
Core No.1
Appendix
- -
3.2.1.5
CORE DESCRIPTION
Cored from
Formaticn:
DEPTH
mbdf
SEDIM.
to__Recovered:
m.
Date:
STRUG.
Sheet:
EST.
of
REMARKS
HYDROCARaINDlc. FOSSILS
LITHOLOGY
LITHOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
FEATUR.
~
0/0
~~z~
~i ~g !;~ !;c! ~~
vi UU CIt:
~ II)
.n
Appendix3.2.1.6
ROUTINE
SEDIMENT
EXAMPLE
DETERMINATION
A
SCRATCHES
ON GLASS NO
CONTAINS
SANDSTONE SILTY
QUARTZ
SIL TSTo.NE
OUARTZ
':
r
I
AT
~
NO
NO OR HESITANT
REACTION
CALCITE
RESIDUE YES
/'"
ARGIL.LIMESTONE (MARL)
LIMESTONE
CHALK
CALC.CLA YSTONE
DOLOMITIC
LIMESTONE
PLACE
IN HOT
1 0 ~ HCL
EFFERVESCES <..
AT ONCE
NO REACTION
CONTAINS DOLOMIT!
DOLOMIT!
CALC.DOLOMITE
Hote:
ALIZARIN RED ~TAtN TEn can al~Q b. u~d to diFF ntlat. between Lim.stone and Dolomite Colcite : will~oin red Dolomite: not ~oin.d SE APPENDIX 3.2.1.16
OYPSUM
'"
"'ANHYDRITE
"'ROCK --COAL
SALT
"'OLAUCONITE "'TUFF
"'FELD SP A RS/MICA/PYRITE
~ ~ N
$
I!)
EG.375
Appendix 3.2.1.7
SEDIMENT
DETERMINATION
EXAMPLE B
Res u It hard
Next step
1.
microscope
b)
2.
Drop in cold
10'/0 HCL
a) b)
I
record amount 4 3
Ilimestone I
no reaction
i) no residue ii) leaves residue
3.
Use hot
10'70HCL
a) efts rvesces
ldolom ite
I
.
record
amount
'4 5
no reaction breaks readily into angular pieces, eventually powder resists and scratches noisily flakes a) clear, fractured b) clear to cloudy, cleaved c) opaque j) brewn in gre~n iiD other gypsum or anhydrite
record
b)
silicon)clay
record
Iquartz I
IIe Idspar
I
IPK No.m-sl
G69238/68
CD
U ~C .... u <I; ~I.IJ loLl ~:z: II: u 0 c -' &' U) 0 ~r CJ) <I; a:: r I.L z '" u 0 0 en z .... <I (I') (I) u ~J: ~r .... + I LLI 3:
c ~'" %
:r
0
Z 0 :J:
@
z
0 i= 0
<I
:r
Z ~0 0
....
3: JU)
a:: 0 <II '" Z c :z: U II: :) 0 Z 0
0 ....
<I 0 ~.J 0 u O Z
t
3: z 0 ..J 0 %
,.
z 0 r u ..J u :I: 0
- -
Z 0 I-
<4 r
LLI
<I;
..J
a: u
a: :z: + I
0 (.) <I +
~;:::J
i= <I; 0 a: ~:;:) Z i&I 0 0 ..J ~" ~..J '" z Q.. 0 0 ~~u u 0 U 0 z Z LLI a: 0 I z ::t i= o ..J <5 <I C % 0
~z ~~:z:0 ~- 0
~tc a:
0 -J
u.. 0 LLI en z z 0 0 ..... Q.. r
@
:J: 0
@
taJ
0 U
r
en t&I r II: I.&J .... c I.aJ r U) <I; III :I C
t-
;::
Z 0
(J
0 ..J :z:
Z
:J
~8: <I
en a I&J a
3:
~.....
..J
0 r ...J 0
a: CD en
....J
LL
:I It:: 0
REMARKS
TESTS DIAGNOS TESTS DIAGNOS
TEST
+ + +
+
+
NO RESIDUE
+
PI NK
SALTY
YELLOW
SOLUTION
VARIABLE
RHOMBIC
IC
+
NO RESIDUE
VARIABLE
IC
~0 ~0.
CD
+ TURNS
-
:::tI
YELLOW
+
-
+PINK
+
PINK
DISSOLVES
LIGHT
GREY
WHITE
OFTEN
CUBI C
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
0 () ~
OR VIOLET
TRANSPARENT
00 DIAGNOST,C
TESTS
DIAGNOSTIC
TE S T
GYPSUM
+
+-
( Ma y b.
BE COMES OPAQUE
WHITE I
0 0
..
0
3: z fT1
:::tI
'"
r
Q ....... 0
ANHYDRITE
(May b. dol)
+ -
BURNS
D I A G N OS T ; C
G)
LIGNITE
+
SHALE +
~(May b. calc)
RED
GLOW -
0 DIAG"IGST:
TEST GRAIN SIZE
-t
()
p ""T1
!:i 0 Z
~CLAY/
A LOT 0 F
II LOT OF
1/256-
mm
DIAGNOSTIC
MARL
VARIABLE
00
SIL T
TRANSPARENT
- 1/16...m DIAGNOST! C
TESTS
SIZE
-t ~)
en
fT1
QUARTZ
TRANSPARENT 0 PIIau E
WHITE, BLACK,
AMORPHOUS
CONCHOIDAL
(0
CJ)
-t
CHERT
(~ @@
}> -0 -0 (II
::J 9: )( ~ N
BROWN, RED
PI NK
FRACTURE
FELDSPAR
WHITE
MICA
of coorsely lucrosic
'-
PrRITE
been erroneously
d'icribed
as well serted
:...,.
lampl.. SidewaU
sand.tone.
00
Appendix
3.2.1.9
Further differentiation into arkosic-lithic and lithic..arkosie sandstones is possible, and is indicated in the diagram. Lithics can be further subdivided into metamorphic, volcanic-plutonic. and sedimentary components. Three textural groups are distinguished based on clastic matrix counts (matrix defined as clastic material less than 60 micron in diameter): 1. 2. 'arenites', matrix; which are clean. grain.supported less clean, but grain-supported sandstones with less than 15% sandstones with 15-20/35%
'psammites', matrix;
3.
Application of the criteria results in 9 main sandstones types, each pertaining to a certain mineralogical and textural class.
MATURITY """""""""""""""""~
QUARTZ
(F<IOO/O.L<IOO/O)
3:
QUARTZ
ARENITE
rT1
ARKOSIC (F>tO,L<IO)
ARKOSIC-LITHIC
(F>L , L>10)
:u :to r 0
G')
n :to r 3: :to
LITHIC
(LI;.IO, F<IO) LITHIC-ARKOSIC
(L>F t F>tO)
-f
C :u
-f -<
t
-< IE) 'rt) C)
MINERALOGY
.
SANDY
TEXTURE
--+75"10
I
(greywocke)
Poorly to ex tr.m.ly
poorly sort.d S$ t.
WACKE
PSAM MITE
MATRIX
FILLS PORES
ARENITE
15.'" GRAIN
1
100"10
MUDSTONES
0/,
SUPPORTED
Appendix 3.2.1.10
CLASSIFICATION
OF CARBONATE ROCKS
TEXTURAL
CLASSIFICATION
Depositional
Texture
Depositional Texture not Recognizable Crystalline Carbonate (Subdivide acoo~1ng to classifications designed to bear on physical texture or diagenesis.)
and
as
and is
grainsupported
Mud-supported
Grainsupported
10% grains
10% grains
shown by Intergrown skeletal matter, lamination contrary to gravity, or sediment-floored cavities that are roofed over by organic or questionably organic matter and are too large t.o be interstices. Boundstone
Mudstone
Wackestone
Packstone
Grainstone
Mdst
Wkst
Pkst
Grst
Bdst
Lst,
xln
~M~
~
ADD
~
APPROPRIATE
~
PARTICLE SYMBOLS
~~
f xln
crs xln
COMPOSITION
0
10 50
I
1 00 010 Dolomite
IMES10NE
DOLOMITIC LIMESTONE
CALCInC DOLOMITE
DOLOMITE
Lst
100 90
~}.
Lst, dol Dol- Lst Dol, colc
~~
Dol
10
0 010 Celelt.
50 Dolomite
II I I I Ilchalk
sucrosic
00
c~alky Lime-Wackestone
* Dolomite Limestone
(:t equal mixture or not determined)
chalky DOlomite~
For the Archie classification of matrix texture and pore-size and pore-distribution,
see Appendix3.2.t.18
Appendix
3.2.1.11
ROCK DESCRIPTION
TEXTURES
SKELETAL PARTICLES Charophytes Blue-green algae Gastropods Lamellibranchs Molluscs Ostracods Stromatolites "Favreina" Benthic forams Echinoids Fish remains Calc. wormtubes Codiacean algae Calc. imperf. forams Calc. perf. forams Rudists Calcispaeres Dasycladacean algae Monogeneric shell banks Trilobites Tentaculites Bryozoans Brachiopods Crinoids Tubular algae Cellular algae Corals Hydrozoans Stromatopores Aeolisaccus Calc. sponges Planktonic forams Radiolarians Pteropods Ammonites Silic. sponges Graptolites Tintinnids Filaments Part.dissolv.calc.foss. High diversity of organisms Low diversity of organism~
NON SKELETAL PARTICLES Pisoids Ooids Oncoids Aggregate grains Pelletoids Faecal pellets Cortoids ("coated grains") Lithoclasts Terrigenous particles (e.g. sand) Authigenic Minerals (e.g. Pyrite) SEDIMENTARY STRUCTURES Caliche Hicrokarst Mudcracks Dessication flakes Root marks Tepee structures Collapse breccias Undulating algalmats Zebra-fabrics Fenestral fabrics Birdseyes Hard grounds (with borings) Bioturbation Stromatactis Slump structures Turbidites BEDDING Cross bedding Irregular rom lam. Massive bedding Wavy bedding Lamination (gen.) Even mm bedding Flaser bedding Graded bedding Lenticular bedding Med. thick bedding
Regular
Lst-Mrl
Small scale coloured/ Multicoloured bedding
MINERALS Salt Anhydrite Gypsum Dolomite Silica Glauconite "Clay" EARLY DIAGENESIS Dessication crusts Asymmetric cement Interstitial evaporites Dol fenestral fabric Fibrous cement Aragonite cement Micritization LATE DIAGENESIS Irregular thin calcite veins Zones with red and orange colouring Cm-sized fissures filled with non-carbo Vadose pisolites Recryst. particles Leaching/Dissolution Internal sediment Even cement Recryst. micrite Granular cement
1m)
even bedding
......
(!)
'"
G 69238/7<.
D2 IoU
SKELET
AL
NON.SKELET INTERNAL
AL
D2 u
mm .020
to-
TEXTURE
INTERNAL
TEXTURE
BLADED TABULAR
MUD
COMPOSITE
FURTHER
MUD
COMPOSITE
FURTHER
Mlcroblocl8.tlc SILT
h.sh
""'cropenetolc
\1'
'*'
P.II.told
<> c:>
00
~~/.
~~/ Superficial
Oold
~~%/
/
'/ Oold
~/ '/. '/.
~/ %
/:% '/. Onkold
~~~'/
/
~/.//
/ /.
~~~%
/. /
-.063
SAND
IoU
ii . -:;;.
2.0 -:~
]1
."
Vi
GRANULE 4.0
~ ~.!D. ~: ~/(J
. ~
e
~'/
~~/
/. /.~
/
Clot
.'. "...'
-0~~~~Add "wing,"
0
Onkold
'i/.
Gr.p..tone /. "/ CD /. /
a..:1 <C( VI
.; :I
~
~
(2) <D
e
1 5.03.65
~
Sub,tltut. any fOIlI' symbol
~toany
particle
Pl,old @
0
Onkollle, SS @)
//.~
/
/. "/ //'///
~.;-:
'l/
Stromatolites
/.
PEBBLE
Mudstone P.bbl.
41>
SH
STACKED
ro :::J 0X ~ N
:..... N
Appendix 3.2.1.13
CHART
# ..
.
. ..
,
#
.4
"",'
,.
.
"" ~
,
.. ~
IX) "ft) N 0\ CO CI
.
,.
. .
.
,.
KEY TO IDENTIFICATION
OF SKELETAL
d (2c) lOa
. . . . . .
b (I b) II a
. . . . ..
..,...
The letters or numbers in parentheses should aid in retracing your original steps in the identification process. A. Circular and Elliptical Ia b 2a a, Scattered figures. . . 2 II Interconnected figures. . . . . Several openings of more or less the same size: Subrounded micritic particles, diameter about 0.15-0.50 mm; regular pattern of points which are actually cross-sections of canals. sometimes filled with sparry calcite . . . Crustacean coprolites Large opening with an outer ring of smaller openings Characeae One central opening No central opening. . . ... recrystallized sponge spicules (rhaxes) which cannot""'" be more closely identifIed. radiolarians. planispiralforamini(era or calcispheres. or. JO Diameter <O.lOmm: Calcite rings without microstructures, together with U and V shaped figures. .. oblique sections of calpionellids Diameter generally < 0.50 mm 4 Diameter often> 0.50 mm . 5 Diameter usually several mm . 6 Diameter> I em, up to several em . . . 7 Microcrystalline or sparry circular figures; original inner boundary often very indistinct. outer houndary sometimes obscured by jagged edges . caldtized radiolarians Often circular sections with unclear periphery. wall may consist of various kinds of layers; sometimes with fine radial pores' , calcisphaeres . . . . .. Large central opening: Thin calcitic wall elongated to regular pointed spines; sometimes spiral structure and outer ring of smaller openings; diameter about 3 mm . . ... . Characeae-Oogonia and gyrogonites Transparent. often yellowish; sometimes spiky outline around a circular ligure; maximum diameter I mm . . foraminifera. e.g., Nodosaria Very complex geometrical pattern of radial and tangential elements around a central opening, sometimes ornamented, sometimes finely perforated single crystal . . . . . Echinaid spine Central opening with walls of varying thickness, which are often transversed with pore canals which often appear dark. The pore canals may be of uniform width, or may taper either to the outside or the
(1 a)
d dl d, e el e2
a, b
(2b)
3a
B.
U and V Shaped
b c d e (3 b) 4 a
12a
(l2b)
h (3 c) 5a
d (13 h) 15a
inside boundaries
g h (3 d) 6 a
b (3 c) (7 a) 7a b 8a
(7 b) 9a
Large central opening, dentate outline (outside ornamentation); diameter up to about I mm . tentaculites Sharply defined circular and elliptical figures with very small central opening. calcite or SiO,; usually together with rod-shaped figures; sometimes with a pointed end; without any internal structure , sponge spicules . . .. Calcitic circular and ' elliptical figures with a narrow central opening; wall with lamellar microstructure. . brachiopod spines (e.g. productids) Calcitic phosphate. often dark-colored circular figures; diameter mOl-sized: sometimes irregularly elongated to an elliptical form; often together with "shepherd's crooks" - see 21; . . . trilobites Large. calcitic figures of encrusted shells; microstructure divided into two parts: outer concentric lamellar structure, clear inner layer; figures usually in clusters .. . . serpulids (see 22 c) Large calcitic ligures. microstructure divided into three parts: differentiated prismatic middle layer and clear inner and outer layers; figures often overlap each other like the tubes of a telescope. scaphopods Central opening very small or absent 8 Central opening large. . .. .. .. 9 Small central lumen with various "shapes (circular, pentagonal. etc.). surrounded by very fine meshwork; often yellowish single crystal . . . . .. ... crinoid plates Large circular figure (diameter'" 3-10 mm) with very small (or absent) central opening. surrounded by alternating layers of light- and dark-colored rings and/or large radiating prisms of calcite . . . . . . .. . . . . .. belemnite rostrum Large central '" opening with radiating elements which usually do not extend to the center; varionsly differentiated walls which mayor may
.'
Dasycladaceae or Gymnacodiaceae
Length generally < 0.20 mm; U and V shaped figures sometimes with flange or constriction near the open end; sometimes with thorn-shaped elongation. Wall calcitic or with dark-colored (organic) lamella calpionellids/tintinnids Length generally> 0.50 mm . 13 V-shaped figures. . . . . . . . . 14 Broad U-(and V-)shaped figures. . ... 15 Narrow V figures. sometimes serrated outer edge (ornamentation), sometimes also inner ornamentation, sometimes Usegmented", Length in mm and em range . . . . .. ten/aculites V figures stacked inside each other, edges extended (Upper Jurassic/Cretaceous) ..' "Bankia" striata Broad V shaped figures with symmetrical bulbous thickenings at the hase or along the sides, single crystals,often smaller than 14a . . .. pelagic crinoids """'" V shaped figures with narrow V shaped inner Long. relatively narrow cavity; wall of inorganic (calcitic) and organic (dark-colored) lamellae; diameter up to em size . . . belemnites Large central opening, distinct wall with pores which are uniformly thick or taper towards the inside or the outside (oblique longitudinal section); in tangential section circular pores may also be visible; sometimes clearly segmented . . dasycladaceans Serial associations of barrel-shaped or ovoid segments, generally thin walls with numerous very fine pores which radiate obliquely outwards. Inner space wide, usually filled with sediment or sparite; rarely primary longitudinal structures . . . gymnocodiaceans
C. Curved
Generally solid. . . . . . . . 17 Generally hollow. . . . 22 Slightly curved. . . .. .. 18 Very curved. recurved, and coiled. . .. .. 19 Very thin (about 0.03 mm); relatively long: often deposited parallel to each other and in great abundance. Lamellar and fine prismatic microstructure . .. "filaments" b Thicker, sometimes corrugated; often various microstructures within a shell (lamellar, prismatic. crossed-prismatic) . ... . . . pelecypod valves Thick jagged convex edge. . . . . . Aptychus d Curved shells; lamellar microstructure; calcium phosphate (brownish, very low hirefringence); shell thickness to 0.20 mm . ... .. .. ... . ... inarticulate brachiopods Thick. often very curved and bent elements with (and without) dark-colored vertical and oblique pores (diameter about 0.03 mm), and conspicuous fine lamellar microstructures ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . articulate brachiopods Calcitic; generally slightly curved elements with peripheral inner structures (pores in the cortex wne) and generally strong recrystallization; coarse sparitic central wne . . "phylloid" algae (Squamariaceae?)
(25 e) 28 a
b (24b) 29a
Shells with "cellular-prismatic" structure. very regular rectangular and . radial pattern. Prism size approximately 0.05-0.1 mm .. rudisllamellibranch shells . ... '" Shells with "honeycomb structure" in tangential sections, diameter of the prisms to 0.10 mm pelecypods (Inocerams)
(19 b) 21 a
b (16 b) 22a
Colonies of stacked hemispherical cysts: sometimes witb spine-like columna I elements. .. . . . . stromatoporoids b Cystose structure containing short vertical tubes with horizontal bryozoans (tube diameter generally < 0.50 mm) elements. ..' or tabulale corals (tube diameter generally> 0.5 mm. often several mm) Vertically arranged cysts. outer periphery of the total structure very . ... distinct . .. .' peripheral and longitudinal seCliollsof corals and sphinctozoan sponges Wormlike elements in a micritic matrix which is usually dark-colored: often whole structure may appear as a circular figure . , calcareous sponges b Flat fragments or conical figures with irregular network of darkcolored elements; sometimes distinct chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . .. reticulaleforaminifera (e.g., liluolids) Sessile colonies: irregular network structure consisting chiefly of vertical and horizontal elements: often star-shaped channel systems and tabulate tubes of various widths. . (Mesozoic) hydrozoans d Fragments of calcium phosphate, brownish or black-colored (low birefringence); meshes of various sizes remains of bones
(23 b) 30a
Well-defined curved or coiled calcitic tubes; often cemented; microstructure divided into 2 parts (inside: parallel lamination: outside: cone-in.cone lamination); mm-sized. tube diameter about I mm serpulid., D. Net-like
. 23a Regular well-defined meshwork. b Irregular meshwork of various shapes. (23a) 24a Meshwork rectangular. square or polygonal . . . . . . .. b CyslOse meshwork. Meshwork . . extremely . . regular.
E. Layered 31 a b (31 a) 32a b Encrusted. planar distribution on the substrate . 32 33 Non-encrusted particles... " Irregular. micritic laminated fabric with spar-filled cavilies parallel to the bedding plane: mm sizes . . . . . "algaill/als" Structures made up of micrite and sparite curved in various shapes: sometimes with terrigenous accessory elements (e.g., quartz) and overgrowth of sessile benthonic organisms. Basic geometric form. comparable to a hemisphere: cm- to m-sized . -'troll/atoliles (May be confused with "caliche" layers) Irregular nodules and spherical particles. Outline often lobular: irregular layers not parallel to each other. sometimes overlapping (usually micrite, algae. foraminifera),surroundingbiogenic or inorganic "nuclei", mm- to cm.sized . ollcuids (May be confused with "caliche oncoids") Phosphatic Regularly outlined (often rhombic) particles with distinct very concentric lamellar structUre: usually dark in transmitted light fish scales . . . . . . .. ...' ..""'" or light gray colo~: distinct Toothlike. often irregular outline. dark lamellar structure in various orientations. Total size between I and 3 rom conodonts
. '
24 30 25 29
e (25a) 26a
. echinoderms .. . 26 '" elements interlocked at distinct sponges angles (SiO, or calcite) . . . . . .. .' Bifurcated "tubes" whose angles are all the same within a "colony" porostromale filamemou-, algae (Type "Caveuxill ") Colonies of tubes more or less parallel 10 each other 27 Shells composed of prisms lying parallel to each other. .. 28 Very fine net structure of generally rectangular cells, which appear black in transmitted light. Differentiation into areas with larger and smaller meshes; sparry-filled circular figures embedded in the net (sporangia). Cell diameter about 5-15 microns
(31 b) 33a
b b,
b,
. .. Corallinaceae """'..., b Cm-sized colonies of long thin vertical threads: horizontal elements, if present. may he irregularly or regularly spaced (zonation). No other differentiation. Mesh diameters between 10 and 30 microns . Solenoporacean red algae . . .. .. ."'" Fragments with a line net structure of various-sized cells in the center and cyeiic alternations of cell sizes on the periphery. Cell walls sometimes quile thickened: sometimes with carbonized organic suhstance. sometimes mineralized by infiltration ofSiO" FeS, , CaCO, 0 . . . . . .. ..,... ... remains of wood d Fragments with networks of sometimes line. porous, very distinct "horizontal elements" and connective elements that are either closely or widely spaced: usually microgranular fine structure; often serial assOciations of chambers . . . Fragmen/J of Larger foraminifera Larger colonies with net structures of horizontal, sometimes undulating elements (laminae) and vertical pillars and spines of various lengths; extremely differentiated microstructures
stromatoporoids
F. Chains of Segments 34a b (34a) 35a b (34 b) 36 (35a) 37a Uniserial . . . . Biserial or triserial Microscopic. .
Macroscopic. Small chambers Small chambers .' becoming becoming successively "" larger. successively larger;
35 36 37 . .. 38 . . . foraminifera
uniserial.
(25d) 27 a
Colonies or fragments of colonies of uniform or various-sized tubes containing flat and curved transverse plates. Colony shape often ramose (with tubes leading obliquely outwards). Tube diameter generally < 0.5 mm. Wall structUre lamellar, rarely fibrous . . . . .. . .. ,. . . . . bryozoans b Reticulated colonies of uniformly large, angular meshes (in tangential sections sometimes with radial elements or septa) or vertical tubes with transverse plates, sometimes wall pores. Fibrous microstructure sometimes consisting of groups of radiating fibrous bundles. Tube diameter usually> 0.5 mm. often several mm . Colonial corals and chaelelids
. .. . ' .. ... . foraminifera b Basin-shaped segments stacked within each other. with central pore (Late Triassic) ... .. Cheilosporites (35 b) 38 a Straight chambered shells, em-sized; transverse elements with pores (sipho) . . . . . . . .. ...,... "orthoceratids" b Ladder-like structure with slightly curved transverse,elements . ,. tangential sections of ammonites . Arched, overlapping segments, sometimes with perforated roofs; sometimes vesicular structures in the segments . . . . . . . . . . . . .. segmented calcisponges (Sphinclozoa)
3. Investigation
&
eporting
Appendix
3.2.1.15
page I
Microfacies particles in carbonate rocks. For the most part the netic character. Ooids and oncoids are listed together as "coated grains". intraclasts and extraclastS. which can not always be dearly distinguished and foraminifera-(algal) oncoids belong to the skeletal oncoids, as defined Category Definition Modes of Genesis Subcategories Skeletal grains Hard parts of organisms appearing in thin.sections Biomorpha Syn: biosomata Monty (1963) Bioclasts
categories have a descriptive character, whereas the subcategories have a gePeloids, oncoids, ooids and aggregate grains may all be called globoids. The from one another, are listed under the lithoclasts or limeclasts. Algal oncoids by Riding (1977). = first definition
Discussion Origin Characteristics Non-fragmented hard parts (e.g. bivalved pelecypod shells), almost whole fossils (e.g., coral colony) Biological. mechanical and chemical destruction. Allochthonous or par. autochthonous deposition Excrement of sediment and plankton feeders (e.g., crustaceans, holoth urians, gastropods, fishes). often produced by endobiontic organisms (peloids together with bioturbate structures!) Hard part fragments (e.g., crinoid ossicles) and broken, partially rounded skeletal grains ( sphaeroclasts),arrondids (Paulsen, 1964: 9); size: sand- and silt-sized Elongated micritic particles: often conspicuously black due to much organic matter, often in clusters, "good sorting". Some exhibit sievelike structure (cross-section); (e.g., anomuran coprolites; size: 0.02-0.50 mm. Ratio width/breadth = 112 to 1/4,) Subrounded micritic particles, sometimes indistinct algal structures stiU visible (filamentous algae). often togeth. er with calcareous algae. Size: 0.05-0.20 mm Subrounded micritic particles, very finegrained Brown (1964) BrOnnimann (1976) Bandel (1974) Skupin (1969.1970)
Peloids (= pellets) Syn: Pseudooid Borne. mann (1886). chondroid Monty (1963), cryptolithe Catalov (1970). Schlammkomer Fabricius (1966)
Micritic, sub rounded particles, usually without any internal structure. Outline usually elliptical or circular. McKee and Gutschick (1969)"
Fecal pellets
Algal peloids
Spherulitic carbonate encrustations around bluegreen algae or decomposition products of various algae Reworking and rounding ofTof consolidated calcareous mud or aggregates of aragonite and calcite crystals. Partially coincides with very small intraclasts Bioclasts or ooids totatly micritized by boring algae. fungi. etc.
Fahraeus et at (1974)'
Bahamite peloids
Aggregare grains Syn: "Komaggregatklumpen". "Traubenklumpen" Samtheim (1965), botroidi Sestini (1964). bothrolite, (chondrolite Monty) (1963), collodasts Sander (1967), tuberoid Fritz (1968: 77) "Bahamite" auct.
Irregular lobular aggregates of particles agglutinated by sparitic or mi. critic cement or by algae. Panicles: generally only a few strongly micritized ooids, bioclasts. and pelaids. Less cement than particles. The transitions between the categories distinguished here are flexible
Recrystallized panicles, e.g., rounded otTbioclasts arrondids) ("'" Gra pestones Cementation of hard car- Grape-like duster.; ofpartides Syn: bothryodal generally cemented together bonate particles in areas lumps Wilson with very low rate of sedi- by sparite. Often together (1967); compomentation, good water with micritized particles site grams circulation and changing and algae. Size: -0.5-2mm levels of agitation. The intergranular cement formation is strengthened by synsedimentary algal encrustations Algal lumps The particles of aggregate Similar to grapestones, Syn: Algen. however, more interaction grains are agglutinated by algae and/or sessile foraminifkltimpchen POm- of organisms. Often in pin (1965) protected environmen ts era (e.g.. lJacanella. Lilhocodi(lagoons etc). Micritic urn). The single aggregate grains are often bound toparticles with algal engether by a~gal encrustations. crustations found togethFilamentous algae dominate er with inhomogeneous (e.g. Cayeuxio. Zonotrichites) micritic fabrics can be called algal intraclasts Lumps. Similar to grapestones. Particles bonded by micritic Syn: amorphous but > 50~ micrite as cernen t lumps Wilson bonding agent. Many of (1967); cryptothese are micritized and crystalline grain~ recrystallized grapePurdy ( 1963) slOnes Pelletoids
Subrounded and angular micritic particles often together with bioclasts or cortoids micritized to various degrees Subrounded micritic panicles generally without internal structures
Paulsen (1964) Illing(1954: 30)" Sudgen (1963) Roberts and Moore (1971) Winland and Metthews (1974)
Caliche lumps
Similar to marine lumps, but usually found together with pisoids. laminated crusts. etc. No scattered panicles, generally in sediments without fossils The algae responsible for the Gasche (1956) formation of oncoids are pre- Babic (1969) served as fossils. Algal Ihrion and MUlier (1968) groups: a) Cyanophyceae (e.g.. porostromate algae such Riding (1977) as Girvonella. microstromatolites). b) Rhodophyceae (e.g., Corallinaceae). which form "rhodolites" The teslS of the foraminifera Johnson (1946) grow upon micritic oncoid Pery! (1977) laminae. Examples: "Sphaerocodium" from the Carnian. some "Osagio" from the Late Paleozoic
Oncoids Syn: Biopisohth Catalov (1970). Mumies Steinmann (1880). "algal biscuit"!
Irregularly formed particles with non concentric, panially overlapping micritic laminae. derived from biogenic deposition around a nucleus (e.g.. organisms) by algae. foraminifera. etc. mm- to cmsized. A. Heim (1916)*
Algaloncoids
Biogenic coating by sessile foraminifera (and algae) around a solid nucleus. Often em-sized
Appendix 3.2.1.15
poge 2
Category
Definition
Modes of Genesis Subcategories Micritic oncoids Syn: Einfachonkoid MiillerJungbluth and Toschek (19691: circumcrusts Wolf(1965b) Origin Biogenic coating by algae (and bacteria?); possibly also thick micrite envelopes formed by boring algae. if so. then indistinct boundary between nucleus and "envelope" Characteristics Micritic coating of a solid nucleus. generally without distinct biogenic structures
Discussion
Ooids
Regularly fonned generally spherical 10 elliptical particles with a nucleus surrounded bv concentric laminae sometimes displaying radial structures. Kalkowsky (1908) *
Superlicialooids (Einfach-Ooide) Syn: Proto-Ooid. Rinden-Ooid Kremer (1953); Mantel-Ooid Schmid, (1961)
One or only very few laminae In relatively low-energy environments or in areas of various thicknesses around with an excess of large nu- a large nucleus clei. whose diameters approximate the critical size of marine ooids (generally < 2 mm). Formed by an interaction ofinorgan~ ic and organic processes In high energy shallow waters supersaturated with CaC03.lnorganically formed with interaction of organisms (blue~green al~ gae). Ooids having radial structures appear to prefer waters deviating in salinity from normal marine conditions a) "Pelagic ooids". formed by blue-green algae. which may Irap planktonic particles or b) micritized normal ooids . Inorganic formation with fresh.water influx (vadose zone), sometimes caliche formations (subaerial, arid climate), sometimes ca ve pearls Generally many concentric laminae around a nucleus. diameter usually between 0.20 and 0.60 mm. Upper limit often 1 mm. "Ooid~aggregates" (Ooidbeutel. elc.) often occur. Sometimes deformed by synsedimentary fragmentation or compaction or tectonic activity (distorted oolites) Concentric laminae ofmicrite, diameter between 0.20 and 0.40 mm
Hling ( 1954)
..
Bausch (1963) Bornemann (1886) Carozzi (1963) Usdowski (1963) Fabricius (1967) Schloz (1972) Haage (1970) Loreau and Purser (1973)
Micritjc ooids
Conspicuously regular concentric micritic laminae. large particles (generallv > 2 mm) often broken up. Sometimes vadose silt in the outer laminae; nuclei usually rock and pisoid fragments. Repeated in situ brecciation during growth and formation of caliche crusts Rounded bioclasts, lithoclasts. and peloids with thin micrite envelopes, "boundaries" between "nucleus" and "envelope" indistinct: tubes in the periphery of the nuclei ei~ ther empty or lilled with micrite (diameter often about 5 ~m) Synsedimentary resedimeots often with inclusions of other panicles. mm- to em-sized. generally poorly soned and not well-rounded < 0.2 mOl, often hardly distinguishable from peloids. Folk (1959) *. Plasticlast ( colloelas!) = Sander (1967)
Kirchmaver (1964) Donah uo (1965) Gradzinsky and Radomski (1967) Dunham (1969) Siesser (1973) Adeleye (1975)
Bgring Cyanophyceae. Chlorophyceae and fungi produce tUbules filled with micrite in bioclasts, etc. The repetition of this process leads to "micritization" (destructive genesis). Constructive genesis is caused by early cementation of lilamentous algae.
Bathurst (1966) * Swinchatt (1969) Lareau (1970 a) Rooney and Perkins (1972) Sibley and Murray (1972) Friedman et al. (1971) Goluhic et al. (1975)
AlgallmracJast
Reworking of weakly con- Micritic panicles usually with Folk (1959) * solidated lime mud by inclusions. generally waves or currents dislurb~ < 0.5 mOl. Composition is the iog the bottom ("mud same as the matrix pebbles") Only slightly separated micritReworking of lime mud covered by algal films ic particles of various sizes, with porostromate and spongiostromid algal structures Separated pieces of sediment whose boundaries still fit, as in jigsaw puzzles
Autoclast ( = pro- Early diagenetic move~ tointraclast ment of sediment. toBosellini. 1964) gether with submarine or subaerial dehydration of the sediment Sediment burrowing by Pseudo-intraclast endobiontic organisms Caliche-intra~ "Pieces" of caliche formaclasts tions. diagenetic structures ExtracJasls Svn: Allodast Folk (1959). LithoclaSl s. str. Folk (1959). exoclast Monty (1963); gravelJes; calclithite fragments Postsedimentary resediments, carbonate and noncarbonate rock fragments. often angular; particles (e.g., fossils) con~ tained in the fragments often truncated. No compaction features. Often polymict. mm- to em-sized Folk (1959)* e.g., clay minerals. terrigenous quartz e.g., glauconite, authjgemc quanz. pyrite Erosional debris of harder (earlier) rocks, which were eroded by subaerial or submarine processes
Bioturbated, sometimes separated pieces of micrite Together wilh crusts, pisoids. etc.
Wolf(1965) *
Terrigenous panicles
A urhigenic minerals
Minerals carried into the sedimentary basin Formation of new miner~ als within the sediment
........
r:
Appendix 3.2.1.16
STAINING TECHNIQUES
Preparation of Alizarin Red S staining solution. The staining solution is prepared by dissolving 1 gram of Alizarin Red S in 998 ml distilled water and 2 ml concentrated hydrochloric acid. Procedure.
1)
the rinse
chips in in a
to
be
stained water.
momentarily (Dipping
in the
then held
tweezers, one
depression water is
filled an
acid way.)
filled
with
distilled
effective
2)
of Alizarin Red S to the chip on a spot surface (or place the chip in the stain)
3) 4)
solution
with
dis-
Examine chip under microscope. Calcite will mite and other minerals will not be stained.
stain
red,
dolo-
NOTE:
Stain will come off if mineral oil (Nujol), clove oil, or glycerine is applied to samples. It may be removed from samples or thin sections by scrubbing with warm water and a mild soap. The concentration of HCl in the stairting solution is extremely critical. variations of a few tenths of a percent will give different contrasts between stained and unstained areas. It is recommended that each time a new solution is mixed, it has exactly the same HCl concentration as the solution being replaced. 0.2% HCl gives a good contrast between stained and unstained areas.
Preparation
of
must
samples
be
for
stai~ing.
and, dry before stain is applied.
1) 2)
Samples
clean
Stain boundaries are intensified by polishing with 1000 grit and on a felt lap with stannic
3) Samples containing
a high density of pores less than 1/2 rom in diameter do not stain well because the solution soaks in, coating the walls of the pore with stain, and pore differentiation is difficult. This type of rock is best stained if impregnated with plastic first. In this case the matrix is stained and the pore space is void of stain. If the sample does not take a good stain with the first application, repeat the procedure for sample preparation.
4)
CARBONATES
B D. Evomy. t963
STAINING
CALCITE Fe2+ poor orodino 10 Fe2+ rich Fe2+ free doIomile sensu ,Iricto RED DARK BLUE DARK BLUE nol 'toined nol 'toi,ned not 'toined
DOLOMITE Fe2+ t arodinv 10 Mg2+ < ferroon dotomite not 'toined arodinv to Fe2+ Mg2+>t onkerite not ,toined
colcile
-----
0.2 % hydrochloric ocid" 0.2"1. olizorin red S" 0.2% hydrochloric ocid" rongin~ from 0.5"1. to ferrycionide 0.2 % hydtochloric ocid" from 0.5 'Y. to rO"9i!;a ,alura ed potassium ferrycianide 0.2 'Y. olizorin red S.
CrilicollOlulion lirenotll "
B ,oturo ed potosslum
arodino 10
LIGHT DARK arodin9 10 TURQUOISE TURQUOISE LIGHT DARK Orodlnvto TURQUOISE TURQUOISE
RED
MAUVE
PURPLE
Appendix 3.2.1.17
PREPARATION
OF THIN
SECTIONS
FROM DRILL
CUTTINGS
Equipment Hot plate Glass slides 70 thermoplastic cement (broken to approx. 1/8" pieces) stone, or
Lakeside Glass
1/4" x 10" x 10" (or carborundum (fine) silicon carbide paper) 220, 300, 500
grit:
Procedure 1) Melt more cement on glass slide selected cuttings. slide from hot plate on hot plate and drop into it one or
2) Remove
and allow
cement
to harden
by cooling.
3) Wet grinding
surface and hone a flat surface on the chips. Keep grinding surface thoroughly wet by either dipping slide in water pan or sprinkling additional water on surface. Either glass plate and loose abrasive method, or wet stone or paper may be used. Clean and dry slide and place on hot plate. the honed surface of chip
4)
5) Using
when
turn over
6)
Remove from hot plate and press the chip against slide as cement hardens. thinness
(honed
surface
down)
on glass
plate,
wet
stone
NOTE
All that is necessary is to make the rock reasonably transparent. Therefore, check frequently by examining under the microscope. Wet the surface while examining.
G69238/80
Classification
ARCHIE'S CLASSIFICATION OF POROSITY IN CARBONATE ROCKS
Of Carbonate
Porosity
Types
I FABRIC
SEL~
INTERPARTIClE
I ~TFABRIC SELECTIVE
The Archie classification consists of two parts: one refers to the texture of the matrix, including grain size; and the other to the character plus frequency of the visible pore structure. As the classification provides a means of estimating the gross petrophysical relationships of a carbonate rock, its Inclusion as a part of the description on all lithologic logs is recommended. The classification of the matrix gives lithological information on the minute pore structure (not visible under lOX magnification) between the crystals, or carbonate grains. Below is a tabulation of the three matrix classifications. Class (Texture of Matrix) I Compact, Crystalline Appearance of Hand Sample Crystalline, hard, dense, sharp edges and smooth faces on breaking. Resinous. Appearance Under lOX magnification Matrix made up of crystals tightly interlocking.or fully cemented grains, allowing no visible pore space between the crystals, often producing "feather edge". concoidal appearance on breaking.
The visible poreslvugs. are classified according to size: Class A : None visible. Class B : Visible poreslvugs greater than 0.02 but less than 0.125 mm. Class C : Visible poreslvugs greater than 0.125 mm, but less than 2mm Class D : Visible poreslvugs greater than 2 mm. The large poreslvugs show secondary crystal growth on faces of cuttings or "weathered-appearing" faces showing ev1dence oTfracturing or solution channels. At xlO magnification.
[fi]
""'"
~~fRACTURE
INTRAPARTIClE
INTERCRYSTAl
[E
CHANNEL.
IIOlOIC
I n conjunction with qualifying the pore sizes, their frequency or amount is denoted by affixing to the pore size classification a figure denoti,ng the per cent of surface area of the cutting or core taken up by any specific pore size. e.g, 82 C5. (see App. 3.2.1.19) Description of cuttings. Often more than one Archie matrix type of carbonate is present in a sample of cuttings being examined. In such cases it is necessary to estimate and report the percentage of the total sample represented . by each matrix type. See also "To Approximate matrix
POROSITY 10 ,& IN
..
B
Clas5 Crystal or Grain Size (:-hcrons) .c 1~~6 2':>0 ~L25
~:'-~1 fENESTRAl
SHElTER
GROWTH
I~J
VUG"
U
CMI'INIIor "uf
~CAVERN"
I FABRIC
fRAMEWORK
Of lor""
,or..
of
BRECCIA
If. "
~BURROW
Ll:TI
P(lf(:'.'I1!I\.
SHRINKAGE
II Chalky, Earthy
Dull, earthy or chalky Crystals, less effectively appearing, hard to soft. interlocking than above, Crystalline appearance absent joining at different angles. because the small crystals Extremely fine texture may or carbonate particles are still appear "chalky" under less tightly interlocked, thus this power, but others may reflecting light in different start appearing crystalline. directions. Grain size for this type Is less than 0.02 mm.
Crystals less effectively interlocked, fracture generally along individual crystal faces giving a rough or sand appearance. Generally more space between crystals. Oolitic, and other granular textures fall in this class.
in ptrr"c.enleiqe.
ApproxJfI1.Jto!
Siote or
0,02
0.115-2.0
e..g.1D
e.g.1.>
~2
i--xr~ Li
lo
62 20
Vitreous
CU.Jrscly S\Jcro~ ic (;rdnuJar to [xtrl:r.lely ri.ne e.g.lO c, g.lS
e..g.IO
e.~.15
1<; I')
20 20
o..!.g. to e.g.. I)
1; -"
Type I.
When examining carbonate rocks it is common to find rock types that are gradational between the three Archie:.types. For example, Archie Type I is often found In association with Type III. Rocks in this category can be denoted as 1/111with the dominant type given as the numerator. This indicates a rock gradational between Types I and III, andlor a close association of the two types, but closer to or dominated b
fotO"Tf':
fLZ2Z3
1: A
O&TAlti
~nA L __J1O:4
2: ~
~
(I) " -t
II Chalky
TWhere cuttings
Chalky
+
in appe.HJIKt",
IS
c,g.tO
c.&.15
25
30
arc
bet
cen
'ltrcuus
and 2,0
chalky
designate edge
as
1/11
'0 '0
Symbols.
III r-BlO Finely '" ,lbuu[ Chalky total <'ucro.:;j(' 11'. to vitrc0US, p<)rosity about vl'ry WI.. filiI.: texture (therefore, (therefore, m.,ltJlK p~)ro~.ty .Jbolll
-------
f'T1
...isible
porosi.ty
olbout
10%,
lOl.a1
pOrt)Slty
{)oj
r.JJtrix pOl"oslly .}l>oul If;.), Ill) visible 1'I"L'Sity,
(li/t)vr-A:>
I'\J
:.*:IodtfiNI aft~r to .20 t1icrons Arch it.' (19.52) by ChiH1~itlR to Wentworth and chal1 in matrix oroliit of Class ,izp scale, III fron lOt lowering upper limit of Clas!> II d ta to n; based on new em ideal CD
Appendix 3.2.1.19
POROSITY
.,'. I. .
I
..
I.
..: io10:':::,
~
." .:
..
~
i~~?~~t~~f;~f~
lit
.'
):
i~~~':?f~\~/~:~~::~
. ,..:~. ". .". ',;, :.: "..J . ~.: ": :,., .: "
.. .' .
. .' . . . .. . . . ' .
..
. .
..
. f . . -. .., . .-
-.
,
. . . . .. . . . . .' .' . .
.I
.
1111
. .
..
,
. ".
-. "I,., . .,," ',' .. . .'" . " ,'.. . .,-. . .. .. " : ',-',.-.. . .. . .'. .1 .. , ,..'" '..
. ." .-
"'. ~. ',"
,I'. " .
... .
J "...
., ." .'
'. '"..
'.
. ;';"'.' . .~
,-. .
'... .. .'~
,
. . .... .. -..
'. .
..
.
..
. .'
" .
.
. .
'
"
.i .:\ :' .. ". . .' t ".., .., . . . ,. ... ...,,,,. '" . . "
..--~
. '.'
.~ .. ": .,.~.":,..~... . --r . . .". -it,'. , , t;' ~ . I:'. '. .", .. '.- .
-
~ 8 : "'..J .." " "'.:.!- -.- . ." :: -,,, .,-.. . ".'.1: . -:.. "'. . '.:. .' '. . -,, '"
.,
.. . .. '. ,.'. .' .'''..'... 1','. .. \-. )
(
I
~..~ ,
( ..
~---
/.'1.
.. ~
\~
/.~" ..'~
..'~', '.t.
,I.
/~tt
.,.
"'::,..
~'~ 0
t ., '.:-~
.~
I X~~~...'-.0.,<,. 0
~~ ~.
.
I \~ ~
~
..~
I";. .~~ C~II.,,,~t,!~ f. , ' .8 '; ",...~,~,\-,4',~\.,U ~ "J~ ,\It' . .."'" " ~.''''';~.. ~~ ~ \~ ""lt:'.".. r.~\ .-r..:,!. tX<;;t:/ .,. .,,'toJ.:~.. -/ ' .;-.;;, ?I'l1 4 ~~,u Sf . ~~"'5'"/ G! ~ yo '"
.. ~---:--.
.'--,.~-&I') .6r..~iW~
.
fj
_-"' ,
~"
~ ~ ~
-"'~~
'lit!:
&I') N
~
'"
.
\
~~.r ~ ~ 0 ~ C\.:- ,. '. "'-, , /.~;.\.~ ~." r, ,, -: - '...\ ''''-.. .. ~. \ /.". ' ~ . ~. '," ,\.~~, III .,' ~'~,~\ ~ 4~,.,
&1')-.
.. ...
.11 .
,,~~
~..+$ , ,. . -, '~'..~ ~~
~ \... C"
~
~ ....
iii
N 0> (CI ~
~
.~
; .# .. .'. . -,., \ '" '. . -.,.." \ , , , ~ iW8. . '~. :0:"'-'. . . "J\~~~- ",,"fiy' ~ \';;
.., ~ """.
.. .~"
""1
'
~~
. _ '~-:~-'-~/
~1\7 1~..:"':" _
Appendix 3.2.1.20
GRAINSIZE,
RELATIONSHIP
S I Z E
SAt-ID FINE U d",~ "'...
EXTREMEl Y WELL SORTED
1.1
SILT L
0.177 0.125 0.088
COAR~E L
0.062
1.000
1.0
0.710
0.500
0.350
0250
0044
.3.1
.75 .0.8
.2.8
238 .1.5
.1.7
119 .0.2
.1.3
.1.3
59 30 39.8
.3.5
15 .08
42.3
7.. .1.2
43.0
3.7 .1.8
.0.2
t!) Z
1.2
239 33.1
115 38.8
57 39.1
29 39.7
U .0.2
7.2 )9.8
3.6
WElL SORTED
1..
~MODERA TEL Y
t0
V) POORLY SORTED SORTED
302
76 3..9
38 33.9
19 3..3
9.. 35.6
..7 33.1
2..
32..
110 27.1
2.0
55 29.8 31.5
28 31.3
U 30..
7.0 31.0
3.5 30.5
NO 3..2
N.D.
.5 25.2
23 25.8
12 23..
6.0 285
N.D. 29.0
N.D. 30.1
N.D 32.6
N.D.
.0
EXTnH1EL Y POOl'lL Y . 5.7
SO
1.
7.0
3.5
N.D.
N.D.
N.D.
N.D.
ND. NOT
N.D.
MEANINGFULLY TO
POROSITY
".
SIZE-~ORTI~G
CL,\SSIFICATlON
12
28
38.1
DETERMINE
PERMEABILITY DARCIES
THE POR.OSITY AND pe:RM~AaIL'T\{ VALUES 61WN ABOVE ARE ONLY VALID fOR ARTIf"'C&ALLYMIXED SANDS. THE PORO~ITY ANDPERME.A6ILITYVALUES Of NATURAL SA"DS ARE CON5IDERA.8LY LOWER
HIGHER PERMfABJLJTlfS
SANDS
LO'w'ERPERMEABILJTJES/N FINER-AND POORER SORTED
SA NDS
COAR5ER-AN
CI:> ...... CD ..., N C7I \I) C)
D BETTER50RTE D ItRfSERVOI
R SA N D.5
II
G69238/8:O
'- - - - - - - - - - -- - -~---------_.
PALAB
---------------' 0-'
DEPTH/SAMPLE NUMBER
m/f
--"
SHEET OF
0.
.----
CARD
10
en enw
>- (L-
SRMPLE IDENTIFICATION
TREAT MENT
SAMPLE/ SEQUENCE NUMBER
UJ
~~
~z
::i
~ 15 0:3
Ia: c..')
cr 0
-----_._~-_._-_.'--'--'-'-----
RNALYSIS DATE
I
z ----0
.--.-.-
~_._--,.LITHOLOOY
ORGANIC
----"------SPLI FACTOR T
Z C)
WEIGH
ei
4
~
6
~ ~
1 6 9
;:
DEPTH OR SUCCESS I ON
----
~ ~o ~ ~ I- enz ~ <II
. . :;;
~en
UJ
> Z
YR :MTH:OAY
I I
'
UNTREAT~~l
TRERTED
en
rr1 \J
Z a: :L
REMARKS
a... :2
:::J 0
a:
~a::
C MED !UM
FINE
;g r
77 18 19 80
-----.
7 68
RNRL
--
.J
1-
---L--LJ.
.
u;
6_9~2
73
74
76
76
CARD
SPECIES
SCIENTIFIC NAME
NO-OF SPECIMENS
<t ~
:J
PRESERVATION
q C
MEDIUM FINE
REMARKS
LITH COL. PHYS
39 4041 42 43 44 46 46,41,48,49,6006106263
J I I 1 I I ! 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1
z \J C -t en :I: rr1 rr1 -t C} ::u ::u 0 (") " en s: \J r rr1 Q:) C} en en r c !:i ):> }> 1:) ~ ;:) 0x0J N ~
10
CODE
-----~_6 4 6 6~J!!~10
I . I 1 I -L-L--LJ_--1_-
~
VI
F055 =
F05,5
F055= F 055 =
F05 5=
111213
-L--1--
16 17,18,192021222324,26262728293003132333.36.36.37,38
-1--1--1__l-
-1-L
__L-L-
--L.L.
. '
=
.
, ,
---1-1--1
'.l-l--l--L-L
I I 1
, I
, , ,
I
L-J_L-J_L-L--L.L.-L--
--1-'
--L-L-
I
J , J
, ,
'I 1 I I
J
I , 1
J
,
, 1
J
, I 1 , , I , . I , . I 1-1-1 1 I I I I I I J J , . , , , , , "I
'I 1 I I I~' , . I , .
LL_Li-L-1-'--
L--1I
I
_J I 1 I
,
-1'
I
J
, , , , , ,
I I J J J J I J
_l-L
--1-1---m
__'--_L
--L-LI
,
,
I
,
'-L
--L
F,O,5,5f:::
F,O,5,5t:
--1-
I --1-1
1
1 1 1 I , I I , , , 1 1 I J 1 1 I 1 1 _L
1 I J
1
-I-L.LL-L-LL
'--L-L-L_I--L-
I 1 , Ii'
LI 1 I 1 I
1 I I I
, 1 1 1
1 , I
1 1
1 J--1I 1 I J J I
1 " I I
1 1
1 I I I
J I 1 1
F,0,S,5 = , , ,
1-1
F0 5 5=
E~,5 5 =
"
-L__L'
1 I
J I
F ~5 5 = " "
LL1-
-----1
L
f-L-L-
'I
I I I I
I I , ,
"
I I ,
--'--LL
.
I ,
"
1 I
~~==~-==-=~
-----
- -_..1.._L
I---L-L-L , , , '
I , I
I I I I , I I
I I I , I I
I
,.
--1-1---1-1--1.--1---LJ-_1-L-
-- ==
'
-'-I
"
l--L-L
I I
1 I 1 I I
I I
I
, I
I
~~
-L-L--L--L_L_L_L-
=
-
F 0,5.$=
F O,5,S
- --_L-l-J-L-I--L-L
--I. I -l---L_--LL_L , , I
-. ----- - --- -w
---L-LL_-'--1_L, I I
-1-1-L-LL-LL_L-1--1-_L-L--1 _L-LL--LJ_--L-L-L_LL_'---L-L-L.L
---L.L_LL.LL-'-_LLLi._LLL-L-L-L_1--1-I . , I I ,.
Appendix 3.2.1.22
SAMPLE ANALYSIS
Columns
1-4 5-7
ANAL
= card identification
TYPE
for analysis
sheet
ANALYSIS PTO
=
=
PYN
NAN
= =
= = =
=
Palaeontology Palynology
Nannoplankton
FOR OST
MPL DIN ACR PAM SPO CHI
BEN
PFO
LFO
MAC PFA
= Sporomorphs = Chitinozoa = Benthonic foraminifera = Planktonic foraminifera = Larger foraminifera = Macerals = Palynofacies
8-22
8-9
= core sample
2 3 4
5
=
= =
=
sample
sample
of sample
any
other
type
Ranking 1 2 5 3 4 1 1 7 6 8
Note:
-
automatically and indicates the degree of ranking is handled preference for the plotting of analysis data derived from sample depth, Le. in case two different sample types are taken from the same depth the selection is on the sample type with the lowest rank number.
The
ID c:>
Appendix
3.2.1.22
page 2 Columns
10-17
DEPTH (ALONG HOLE) OR (SAMPLE) SUCCESSION - For well samples depth-a long-hole is characteristic; for surface samples the (stratigraphic/vertical) distance from the selected reference level, preferably the top of section is required for any plots on scale. - The length unit, as defined for a particular well or surface
18-22
units and will be taken as 00 unless indicated otherwise by the investigator. SAMPLE/SEQUENCE NUMBER - Sequence numbers for surface samples are applied in case no depth/distance data are available but sample sequence is known,
or
-
sample
number
is
used
to
identify
duplicate
well
samples
of
the
same
type
and retrieved
at the same
depth.
23-25 23
TREATMENT
TYPE
L
M N
= rinsing/washing for lithological = washing for microfaunal analysis = nannoplankton preparation P = palynological preparation T = thin section preparation
description
26-27
INVESTIGATION SEQUENCE NUMBER Generally a treatment product (indicated by treatment type + sequence number) is.investigated only once for a particular investigation; occasionally a repeat of the same analysis type on the same treatment product (as indicated in cIs 5-7) is required. Investigation number 01 indicates first (and often only) investigation; higher numbers indicate repeats. INVESTIGATOR Each investigator should have, within one company, a recognizable and unique abbreviation of his/her name (see page 16 & 17).
28-30
Appendix
3.2.1.22
page 3
Columns 31-36
ANALYSIS DATE
DAY
WEIGHT
- The data on weight (untreated/treated) are the same as those entered in cls 32-43 of the "LABORATORY TREATMENTS AND PRODUCTS" sheet'. The weight entered here serves only the analyst as a memory aid. - The weight unit is gram, with cIs 41-42 and cIs 47-48 indicating decimals. UNTREATED Dry weight of sample before treatment. TREATED Weight of treated sample (residue). PRESERVATION The general preservation of the fossil group-under-study (as specified in cIs 5-7) will be indicated here; at specific level preservation data are to be entered on the FOSS-record, cIs 28-33. 0 (or blank)
37-42 43-48
49
1 2 3 4 5 6
50-55 50-51
ORGANIC METHOD MATURITY
no data excellent
bad
(fossils
hardly
recognizable)
IX Palynomorph
colour estimate Reference: FUCHS, H.P. (1969). DOM determination by geologists and palynologists, KSEPL Instruction Manual, 1, fig.4. Report EP-41385. 10 Palynomorph colour established, but no details known 11 Sporomorph colour estimate on total sporomorph assemblage 12 Sporomorph colQur estimate on one type only (to be specified under REMARKS cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 13 Dinoflagellate colour estimate on total dinoflagellate assemblage 14 Dinoflagellate colour estimate on one type only (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 15 Acritarch colour estimate on total acritarch assemblage 16 Acritarch colour estimate on one type only (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card).
Appendix 3.2.1.22
page 4
2X
Colcormet translucency values Reference: FUCHS, H.P. (1969) - DOM determination by geologists and palynologist. KSEPL Instruction Manual, 1, fig.8, p.9. Report EP-41835. 20 Colcormet value obtained, no details known 21 Colcormet value from sporomorph assemblage 22 Colcormet value from one sporomorph type (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 23 Colcormet value from dinoflagellate assemblage 24 Colcormet value from one dinoflagellate type (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 25 Colcormet value from acritarch assemblage 26 Colcormet value from one acritarch type (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card). Alternation Index (TAl) organic
3X Thermal
ref. STAPLIN, F.L. (1969): Sedimentary organic matter, metamorphism and oil and gas occurrence. (Bull. Canadian Petrol. Geol., 17, (1), pp. 47-66) 30 31 TAl data available, no details known TAl data from sporomorph assemblage
etc.
4X
Spore
Colour
Index
(SCI)
ref. HASELDONCKX, P. (1977): Relation of palynomorph colour and sedimentary organic matter to thermal maturation and hydrocarbon generating potential (Paper at Seminar on Generation and Maturation of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins, Manila, Sept. 12-19, 1977 (UNDP-COOP/ ASCOPE) 40 41 SCI data SCI data available, no details known from sporomorph assemblage
etc. 5X
Conodont Colour Alteration (CAI)
ref. EPSTEIN, A.G., EPSTEIN, J.B. & HARRIS, L.D. (1977): Conodont Colour Alteration - An index to Organic Metamorphism (Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 995, Washington).
52-55
OBSERVATIONS Various scales are applied dependent on the method (as specified in CIs. 50-51), but all ranging from low figures for a low degree of maturity to high figures for a high degree of maturity. If only one value is indicated, this has to be entered in 52-53. Two zeros have to be entered in 54-55. Palynomorph colours are expressed to 09 (black), see fig. ...? - Colcormet translucency a set of measurements is recorded. in scale 01 (light yellow)
values range from 00 to 99. In general, is rounded off to a mean value, which ~ ~ w ~ ~ ,~ ~
Appendix 3.2.1.22
page 5 Columns
The thermal Alteration often with one decimal point will be omitted, Index is given as a five-point scale, digit. For coding purposes the decimal e.g. 2.2 is recorded as 22.
- Spore Colour Index Scale is a linear 10 point scale using one decimal digit if appropriate, e.g. 3.0 is recorded as 30. - Conodont Colour Alteration is expressed in a scale again with use of decimal point if appropriate. from 1 to 5,
56-59
56-57
LITHOLOGY Insert here a brief description of the lithology sample if necessary. MAIN (LITHOLOGY) Enter one of the following codes:
encountered
in the
Code AK BR CG CK CL CO DM EV GK GV IG LS MM MR MS PE QT SA SH SI SS ST TF
Explanation
Arkose Breccia
Conglomerate
Chalk Clay
Coal in general Dolomite Evaporites Greywacke
Gravel
Igneous rock Limestone Metamorphic rock
Marl
Claystone/Mudstone
Peat
Quartzite Sand (loose) Shale Silt Sandstone Siltstone
Tuff
IX) ........
Appendix
3.2.1.22
page 6 Columns
58-59
QUAL(IFIER LITHOLOGY) Insert here one of the following codes given below. Only two columns are provided here thus the user should carefully the qualifier which best qualifies the sample analysis. Qualifiers Carbonates: lithology
select under
B
G P W MU
Lithology:
LG CT PP FG GC CA BF BK BL BW DK GE GN LT MD OE ON OV PK PU RE WH YE
Roundness
Cherty
Phosphatic Ferruginous Glauconitic Calcitic
Colours:
Dark
Grey Green Light
Moderate/Medium
Texture:
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Grain Size:
Very
angular
Angular
Subangular Sub rounded
R C M F V
C)
G> ID I\) UI CD ....... CD ID
Appendix
3.2.1.22
page 7
Grain size:
PB GR PI SI
S3 S5 S7 S9 SU SB
Sorting:
Porosity
A
X S IG IF IX VR VS VX FC
PI
P3 P5 P7 CV LE RP RS SX VG
Stratification: Bedding
B1 B3 B5 B7 BX BQ FI FK LM PR BU BO CB BG BH BS
No apparent bedding/massive Poorly bedded Bedded in general Well bedded Cross bedded
Papery
Burrowed Borings Churned/bioturbated Graded bedded Variably bedded Contorted, slumped
&1
CI) "tt')
N en ID (!)
Appendix 3.2.1.22
page 8
Bedding:
VV XF XG XL XX C1 C3 CS SK WT SX RH SQ SE BY BR PT OD PD OK WX
Varves
Flute casts Groove casts Load casts Salt mounds
Sedimentary
and biogenic
structures:
Unconsolidated/Loose Slightly consolidated/Friable Consolidated/Cemented/Hard Slickensided Weathered Solution breccia Rauhwacke/Box work structure Stromatactis Stylolites Birdseye structure/Keystonevugs Brecciated Pelletoidal Ooidal Pisoidal Onkoidal Welded
Asphalty Bioticic Bituminous Calcitic Chloritic Chalky Cherty Dolomitic Evaporitic Ferruginous/Limonitic Glauconitic Hematitic With heavy minerals Lithoclastic Calcareous Micaceous Phosphatic Pyritic
Quartzitic Sideritic Tuffaceous
Admixtures
AP BI
BT
CA CI CK CT DM
EV
FG GC HE HM LC LS MC PP PY
QZ
SD TF
Minerals
:
AH FD GY
KM
MN MV NA SL
salts in general
G> en 10 N UI CD "'~
Appendix page 9
3.2.1.22
Coal
and Primary Bituminous Rocks: AT Anthracite Carbonaceous CO Hard Coal HD HU Humic Coal Lignite (Brown LG Sapropelic Coal SO SR Source rock Tarry TA AC AG AM BE BP BZ CD CH CR CS CZ DF DT EM FB FF FH FL FP FS GP GS LB ML MP NP OC OG PL RA RD SM TL TR TT VE
coal) (Cannel
coal,
boghead)
Fossils:
Acritarchs Algae Ammonite Belemnites Brachiopods Bryozoa Conodonts Charophytes Coral Crinoids Chitinozoa Dinoflagellates Diatoms Echinoderms Smaller benthonic foraminifera Foraminifera in general Fish remains Larger foraminifera Planktonic foraminifera Smaller foraminifera Graptolites Gastropods Bivalves Molluscs Microplankton Nannoplankton Ostracods Calcispheres Plant remains Radiolaria Rudists Algal mats/Stromatolites Trilobites Trace fossils Tintinnids Vertebrates
...;.,;,
II) rt)
a> '"
<0 (!)
Appendix 3.2.1.22
page 10
Columns
60-66
a) from the entire residue one part (e.g. ~. /10) is separated without any sieving into fractions and is analysed entirely; then the amount of specimens found has to be multiplied by the separation factor manually and inserted accordingly into cIs 61-63 "Medium". b) the entire residue is split by sieving into three major fractions i.e. coarse-medium-fine; fro~ these fractions only for
~ fine)
60 61-63 64-66
67-68
then by.entering the split factors 4. 5.2 in cIs 60-66 for coarse. medium. fine the computer can multiply with those factors the amount of specimens entered in cIs 14-25 on card "FOSS" as if the entire fractions thus the entire residue has been selected. C(OARSE FRACTION) MEDIUM (FRACTION) FINE (FRACTION)
ORIGIN Insert here the code of the laboratory where the sample has been analysed.
Code
11 12 13 14 17 50
Explanation
SIPM. EP/12.1. Rijswijk KSEPL. Rijswijk NAM. Assen Shell Oil. Houston Any other Shell Opco Any other non-Shell company
Opcos may develop their own codes which should. however. not duplicate with those given here. If in doubt. contact the focal point of SIPM. EP/12.1.
69-80
REMARKS Any remarks concerning the entire sample can be entered here.
Appendix 3.2.1.22
page 11
FOSSIL DETER}IINATION
Columns
1-4
5
6-13
FOSS
= card identification
for fossil
determination
blank
SPECIES CODE Enter a code for all species or accessories determined during the investigation. Preferably enter the "SIPM" code (see chapter 5), i.e. a four 2-digit structured code whereby the first 2 digits are fixed on the computer as fossil group code (see Appendix 1). Whenever an alphanumerical code ("Local code") is used, then the species table (see chapter 5) should show a transcription to the "SIPM" code. Two main systems for coding taxonomic within the "SIPM" numerical code code exist:
a) A strictly
structured
(FOSSIL GROUP CODE) see Appendix 1 (FAMILY CODE) (GENUS CODE) (SPECIES CODE) This strictly taxonomic structured code has been applied former EPIPAL system (see EP-42711, chapter III)
in the
Example
Fossil group Family code Genus code Species code code:
SIPM 02 : 58 : 01 : 01
code:
02580101
b)
6-7
An open
taxonomic
(FOSSIL
GROUP CODE)
8-9
10-13
free
SCIENTIFIC NAME Insert the taxonomic name of the fossil a name of an accessory (i.e. minerals), of fossil type.
0'> ......
~ N
0'> <D C)
Appendix page 12
3.2.1.22
Columns
14-25
NUMBER OF SPECIMENS 'Number of specimens' can be plotted on the distribution in 2 ways; either as number or as symbols:
chart
/
0
C(OARSE) If a quantitative analysis has been executed and residue fractions have been formed, then the number of specimens in the course fraction must be entered:
17-21
MEDIUM
Enter number of specimens of medium fraction. If no separation in course, medium and fine fractions has been made, enter total number of specimens for each fossil type.
22-25
FINE
Enter Note: number of specimens of fine fraction. in, one has to fill
Whenever all three fractions are filled in the SPLIT FACTOR (see p. 4.14).
26
SEMI-QUANTITATIVE DATA In case a semi-quantitative analysis has been performed, two different codes can be entered: a letter and a number code for the estimated amounts:
Code
out on distr.
chart
= = = = = =
R F C A V ? 0
R F C A V ? X
presence present,
data
Code 1 Print out on distr. chart 1 specimen
3 specimens
or
or
/
0
.
3
4
5
13 specimens or
40 specimens or
100 specimens or
C> m N UI ~ II) U1
Appendix
page 13 Columns
26
3.2.1.22
w~en species amounts are used in calculation for sawblade diagrams, range charts and grouped sample intervals, the 'semi-quantitative data' codes are translated into the following number:
Codes
Number
1 2 3 4 5
Note:
R F C A V
1 3 13 40 100
If only a species and its code is entered but no quantitative semi-quantitative data are provided, an "X" (=present) is printed/plotted automatically on all relevant output documen'ts.
27 28-33
blank
PRESERVATION (OF SPECIES) These columns can be used by the investigator to indicate the preservation per fossil. The content of these columns will only appear on sample analysis and fossil determination reports LITHO(LOGICAL PRESERVATION OF SPECIES) One of the following codes can be inserted here: AH = anhydritic CA = calcitic CK = chalky DM = dolomitic FG = limonitic GC = glauconitic PY = pyritic SD = sideritic SI = siliceous COL(OUR) Insert if appropriate the following codes:
28-29
30-31
BF
BK
= buff
= = =
= =
black brown hyaline green opaque orange olive pink purple
BL
BW
= blue = grey
GE
HY GN OP
ON
OV PK PU
=
= =
RE
red
WH = white YE = yellow
~
"IX)
"., N /1> ID C)
Appendix
3.2.1.22
be
entered
here:
CO
CW
=
= = =
= =
DE PM
GH HE
RW RX
WO
WT
= worn
= weathered
34-53
REMARKS In these columns the investigator can enter any remarks on species or accessories.
4IJI
Appendix
3.2.1.22
page 15
FOSSIL GROUP CODES
01.xx.xx.xx 02.xx.xx.xx 03.xx.xx.xx 04.xx.xx.xx 05.xx.xx.xx 10.xx.xx.xx 12.xx.xx.xx 15.xx.xx.xx 19.xx.xx.xx 20.xx.xx.xx 25.xx.xx.xx 30.xx.xx.xx 32.xx.xx.xx 35.xx.xx.xx 40.xx.xx.xx 45.xx.xx.xx 49.xx.xx.xx 50.xx.xx.xx
51. xx. xx. xx
Foraminifera Planktonic Benthonic Benthonic Fusulina Radiolaria Calcisphaera Tintinnidae Bioclastic Porifera Coelenterata Annelida Conodonta
in general Foraminifera
(small) (large)
debris
Bryozoa Brachiopoda
Mollusca Crustacea Trilobita Ostracoda Ostracoda - Palaeozoic - Post-Palaezoic
52.xx.xx.xx 55.xx.xx.xx 60.xx.xx.xx 62.xx.xx.xx 63.xx.xx.xx 65.xx.xx.xx 70.xx.xx.xx 80.xx.xx.xx 85.xx.xx.xx 89.xx.xx.xx 90.xx.xx.xx 91.xx.xx.xx 92.xx.xx.xx 93.xx.xx.xx 94.xx.xx.xx 95.xx.xx.xx 99.xx.xx.xx
/ Faecal
Algae Diatoms
Sporomorphs Microplankton Palynological Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Chitinozoa Miscellanea macerals
01)
Appendix
3.2.1.22
page 16
LIST
OF NAME
ABBREVIATIONS
OF PALYNOLOGICAL
INVESTIGATORS
BARTEN
MULLER
van Niel
NIJSSEN
POHOWSKY
DDX
EBG JWE EVS FRK FCS GLD
GRF HAN
TICHLER VERDIER
VLIERBOOM van WIJHE WILLIAMS WILSCHUT WHITAKER
de HAAN
VAN HECK
HEC
HPG KAP KYL LOV MYR
MLD MRG
WOLFARD
ZWAARD v.d. ZWAN
MORGENROTH
Appendix 3.2.1.22
page 17
LIST
OF NAME
ABBREVIATIONS
OF
MICROPALAEONTOLOGICAL
INVESTIGATORS
ADESIDA
BARBEITO
ADD BAR BJS BSG BRO BRR CAP CRD DLL DBY DYK ECK GEG HAK HRT HFM HKR JKR KAS KEY KRS KLN HKL KOK KMR KRT PVK LGD
LAUER LETSCH
MABILLARD
LUR LSC MBD MRI DMR MTK NLN NDM OBK PSM RCZ RBS SCR ASC
MARIE
de MEIJER
MENTINK NOLTEN
NOORDERMEER
SPF
SIK SSG SLM SDN SPA TCC TPM FFU WGR WAN WKZ WTT
SIKKEMA . SISSINGH
JONKERS
KAASSCHIETER
SLEUMER
SOEDIONO
KEIJ
ter KEURS
SPAAK
TAUECCHIO
KORT
van KUIJK
WITT
LAGAAIJ
Appendix
3.2.2.1.1
The petrol
method
is
carried
out
in
the
following
1. 2. 3.
the sample is crushed with a sample crusher further pulverized with mortar and pestle the the sample sample is is is if dried soaked and in heated petrol on a hotplate for about
30 minutes
(outdoors)
4.
is
not
successful
the
whole
procedure
is
repeated
eo
c5
Appendix 3.2.2.1.2
PREPARATION
1964)
To obtain good results in preparing sections of isolated larger Foraminifera, it is essential to have a great deal of patience, knowledge of the internal structure of the genera of larger Foraminifera, and a certain degree of manual dexterity. By means of the method described below grinding is carried out directly under the microscope. With the help of a needle or tweezers the specimen to be sectioned is transferred under the microscope from the collective slide to the centre of a glass slide. A few small pieces of Lake-side 70C are then placed near the specimen. Heating is effected by warming the slide on an electric hot plate. When the Lake-side has melted the slide is transferred back to the microscope to adjust the position of the specimen. In this connection the plane to be ground for observation - e.g. the
equatorial plane of a Lepidocyclina
must
be adjusted
to a virtually
horizontal
position, while curved or undulating planes should preferably be mounted with the most convex side upwards. In order to prevent crumbling away, and to save time in grinding, the specimen must be firmly embedded in the middle of the Lake-side, but, nevertheless, must not be deeply buried in it. For practice has shown that the hard Lake-side is often more difficult to grind away than the test itself. Accordingly, in mounting the specimen, a sufficient quantity of Lake-side should be used, but particular care should be taken to avoid using too much. The grinding down, or rather filing down, of the specimen takes place under the microscope, using the rough side, i.e. the "frosted" side, of a second slide. Rough, medium-fine and fine frosted slides may be used for grinding, one after the other if desired, depending on the quantity of material to be ground away and the size and/or the hardness of the specimen. The slides are prepared in the usual manner, with carborundum powders Nos. 100, 220, 300 and 500. When sectioning the "frosted" slide is moved to and fro, or round and round, under gentle pressure, on the specimen, after having been previously moistened with water so that it becomes transparent at the point of contact with the specimen. The. transparent nature of such glass "files" when wet makes it possible to follow the grinding process closely under the microscope, during which a clear, continuous picture is obtained of the structure of the disappearing part of the test. The "grinding plate" is moved in a horizontal position until the ground surface for observation has been completely or partly reached. By tilting the "grinding plate" to a greater or lesser degree, any parts of the test, which still have to be removed, can be ground away. The last vestiges of extraneous material, left behind in hollows in the surface to be exposed, can be scraped away by means of a needle, the end of which has been ground into triangular form for this purpose. In this manner even markedly curved and undulating median layers can be completely exposed. The material which has been ground and scraped off is removed by means of a brush dipped in water; the "grinding plates" should also be rinsed in water occasionally. Accumulation of Lake-side grindings cause these latter to become somewhat blUnt in course of time, and they should then be cleaned with xylol. To produce a thin section, the specimen prepared in the manner described above should be heated on the hot plate and then turned over. When this is done, any cavities between the ground surface and the glass slide - especially in the case
of curved or undulating specimens
should
be completely
The other half of the test is then removed in the manner described. The final stage of grinding can best be carried out under transmitted light. The section is completed by covering it with a plastic spray coating or a cover glass as described under A. A particularly simple method applicable to large N ummuJites, in which the median plane is in any case rarely flat, is as follows. The specimen is heated in an open flame for some seconds and then quenched in cold water when it will split along the weak median chambers providing the desired result.
Appendix
3.2.2.2.1
STANDARD PREPARATION
FOR PALYNOLOGICAL
INVESTIGATION
1) Select most suitable lithologies available Sampling for Palynological Investigation"); select "mid-fraction". 2) Clean thoroughly, to lose clay(stone) 3) If necessary, crush but with fairly particles. sample to pieces
"Rock samples
unconsolidated
sediments
take
care
not
of approx.
1-2
rom;
discard
"powder".
4) Take some 2-10 gr of sample, depending on estimated amount of acidresistant organic material; put into 100 cm~_centrifuge tube (plastic). (if more material has to be processed, e.g. light-coloured limestone, use more tubes or beaker). 5) If liquid hydrocarbons are present: cover with solvent, e.g. benzene (naphta), agitate regularly, after 10 min : centrifuge (2000 RPM for 30 sec), decant; repeat if judged necessary; let evaporate solvent, or add (methylated) alcohol, agitate, centrifuge a/a, decant. Note: operations 5-8 to be carrieE_out in fume-cu~oaEE' material, proceed with 7); otherwise, add 10% hydrochloric acid (see foot-note I), heat to approx. 80C (in water-bath), agitate regularly until visible reaction has ceased, centrifuge a/a, decant. Note: decanted acids (steps 6-8) to be neutralized in plastic bucket in fume-cupboard.
some 40% hydrofluoric acid, heat a/a, agitate regularly, add
from
6) Non-calcareous
7) Add
time to agitate,
time
10% hydrochloric
acid,
agitate, centrifuge a/a, decant; transfer to 15 cm3 centrifuge tube, centrifuge a/a,
9) Add zincbromide solution, density approx. 2.2 (see foot-note thoroughly, centrifuge a/a (preferably for 1-2 min). 10)
2),
mix
Pour floating material on vibrating microsieve (see foot-note 3) of 15 ~m hole diameter (or alternatively 20 or 30 JJm, depending on type of palynomorphs studied), and flush with (methylated) alcohol or water with some (meth.)alcohol.
11) transfer fraction >15 JJm with liquid a/a via small beaker to 15 cm3 tube, centrifuge a/a, decant. 12) Transfer
Appendix
3.2.2.2.1
page 2
13) Mount permanent microscope slide by mixing some residue with glyceringelatin while heating slide to approx. 100C, let evaporate alcohol/water, place cover-glass, let cool for at least a few minutes, seal well with transparent nail-varnish. 14) Add some glycerin to remaining residue to avoid been drying out. on standard
etc. have
indicated
foot note
x % is diluted to 1) Dilution of acids: an acid with concentration one with concentration y % by pouring slowly y cm3 of the x % acid into (x-y) cm3 of water (preferably distilled or filtered), resulting in x cm3 acid with concentration y %, e.g. 10% bydrochloric acid is obtained by adding 10 cms 36% acid to 26 cm3 water. 2) Preparation of heavy liquid: dissolve 1 kg zincbromide (ZnBr2) in 399 cm3 distilled water (sligbtly acidified with hydrochloric acid to prevent precipitation of zinc hydroxide); this yields 636 cm3 beavy liquid, density 2.2. Note: tbe dissolution is strongly exotherm, so in a hot environment tbe preparation should be done carefully, preferably by cooling the mixing beaker in a water-basin.
3)
foot note
foot
note
Sieving: tbe sieving is greatly facilitated by pressing tbe sieve against the vibrating "finger" of a "Turbomixer"; subsequent cleaning of tbe sieve may also be done by pressing it in vertical and inverted position while flusbing with (methylated) alcobol/ water.
52
Appendix3.2.2.2.2
COAL RANK CLASSIFICATIONAND ORGANIC METAMORPHISM
COAL
SPOROMORPH COLOUR
GROUP
-
R~NK
IFIC
HUMIC
FIXED CARBON
CLASSifiCATION
COALS'
VOLATILE
DEGREE
OF
LEVEL
OF
VITRINITE
ORGANIC
ORGANIC
PHISM
METAMOR-METAMOR- ANCE
REFLECT-
INTERNATIONAL (UN
MATTER
SYST EM
-
PHISM
ECE) CLASS
CALORIFIC
VALUE kCal/kQ ") 2 .103 (2400) 14
3
(30110)
RANK
DOM
..J 3S
LOM
Ro
random
15
;:60
...."a
~<t~
0 a
;;
<t
0
0
40
~0
I 2 ! 0.2
C) :J
'0 z= z. c: C) 0
13
~13TIIO)
~4 (41100)
12
Z
0
a::
0.3
II)
,0
::)
mZ
::)21 Yellow /
/
(1)::)
B
;'
;' ./
;'
en
8300
(8300)
45
~4
S
0.4
11
10 f1 5700
6100
10
~9
6
50 7
55
I-
iii
11000
0.5
~, A
12
C
13000 13 7200
8
..J
8 0.6
III
B
14000 77110
<t
6
65
II)
::) 0 Z
0
5
!:Ii
::) Iii5 MEDIUM
70
VOLATILE BITUMINOUS
1.3 75 25 75
4
12 BO
LOW
VOLATI LE
1.4 1.5
1.6
20
80
B
3
B5 15 A 2 90 10 a:: 85 13 f4 90 f5 16 f7 18 19 20
used Shell by: Oil
BITUMINOUS
SEMIANTHRACITE
<t
::t:
U ct 1-411: X I- ANTHRACITE Z ct
ANTHRACITE
Remarks:
B
-95 5 1
1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.f 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3.0 4.0
A
0
95
META-
100%
I
0%
I
fOO
Scoles
S.I.P.M.
S.I.P.M.
..) Mai.t. mineral matter fr.. ba.i. calculated I 97 % relative humidity at 300 C. I
I
For a detailed correlation between Ihue parameler. see fhe reporl by A. Hood (t973) : "Standardization of vjtrinit.reflectance curvesto EP44796
Appendix
3.2.2.3.1
NANNOPLANKTON
INVESTIGATION
AT THE WELL
SITE
Most favourable sediments for nannoplankton studies are calcareous clays/shales and marls from open marine environments. Pelagic limestones are suitable as well, however, due to their hardness, quite often more sophisticated preparation methods, than the ones described below, are needed. Shallow water deposits (incl. platform carbonates), seldom contain sufficient nannoliths for a reliable
dating.
Preparation -
& examination:
select some representative cuttings crush them and put the powder in a test tube with distilled water shake the tube for approx. half a minute pour the sample through a 30-70 micron sieve (e.g. folded in a funnel) into an other tube. - allow the fine fraction to settle and pour off the water - place a drop of the residue on an object-glass and distribute it evenly the side of a glass rod
-
with
dry the preparation on a hot plate and fix it with canada balsam (or immersion
oil)
- cover i~ with a cover-glass. examine the slide under a palynological microscope lens and preferably with polarised light with a 100x oil-immersion
~ ~ N ~ ~ ~
Appendix 3.2.3.1
DEPTH
DISTRIBUTION
OF SELECTED
(otter
RECENT
BENTHONIC
FORAMINIFERA
GENERA
BOLTOVSKOY a WRIGHT,1976)
Shelf Nearshore zone and inner shelf ..70m Om AceruulinLA Allomorphina Alveolinella Alveolophragmium Amphisregina Angulogerina Archaias Asterigerina BacuJogypsina Barhysiphon Bigenerina Bolivina Bardis BlKceUa Bulimina Buliminella Calcarina Cancris Cassidulina Chilostomella Cibicides Cornuspira Cribrostomoides Cyclammina Denralina Discorbis Ehrenbergina Elphidium ErislOlHit1('//tj Eronides Fissurina Gaudryino Glabralella Glabobu/imitla Glohu/ina Gutlulina Gyroidina Heleroslegina Hoeglundina Hyalinea Ka"erielJa + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -t + + + -I+ + + + + + + + + + + + + -r + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ,... + + + + + + + + + + + +
Slope Bathyal Outer shelf zone Ahyssal zone 3OO0m Lagena + Laricarinina Marginopora Marginulina Martinouiella + + Massilina Miliolinella Nodosaria Nodosineila + + + + + Nanian Nonionella Oolina Operculina Parafissurina + + + + Parellina Peneroplis Planorbulinu Planulina + + + + + + Poroeponides PuI/enia Pyrgo Pyrulina + + + + + + Quinqueioculina Reophax Rhabdammina Rohulus + + ROlalio Saccammina ..,. + + + + + + Sigmoilina SigmonlOrphina Spirillina Spiroloculina Textularia + Trifaril1a Triioculit1O Trochammilla + + Vl1igerilw Vaivulineria + Venebralit10 Vir~I~lilla + + + + + + .,.. + -t + + + + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Slope Bathyal Outer shelf -200m + + + Transitional 1UOOm + + 3000 m + + zone Ahyssal zone
+ +
+ +
+ + +
+ + + + + + + +
-t"-
+ +
+ + T
+ +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
Appendix 3.2.3.2
GENERALIZED
CD " !<) N
en ID (!)
Heterostegina Normal marine to hypersaline, ? sediment or ? vegetation, tropical, inner shelf. are not known the followingterms are used-hyposaline 33 per mille), Hoeglundina Normal marine, muddy sediment, <5C, 14o-IIOO m, normal marine (33-37 per mille), hypersaline (> 37 per mille). outer shelf and bathyal. Hyalinea Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to temperate, 10-1000 m, 2. Substrate Free-living on sediment or clinging to vegetation, pebbles, shelf and bathyal. etc. Islandiella 32-35 per mille, muddy sediment, <10 C, >20 m, shelf. 3. Temperature of the bottom water This is rarely known with precision. Jadammina 0-50 per mille, sediment, 0-30 c, intertidal, tidal marshes. Arctic, temperate, subtropical and tropical are used in a geographic sense. Ka"eriella Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, >100 m, outer They give a rough guide to the bottom temperature. shelf and upper bathyal. Lagena Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to tropical, 0-180 m, 4. Depth The principal range is given. Many species extend into deeper shelf. water in very low abundance. Lenticu/ina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, > 100 m, outer shelf Acervu/ina Normal marine, attached, ? temperate, 0--60 m, inner shelf. and bathyal. . Marginopora Normal marine to hypersaline, sea-grass and seaweed, 18Alveolinella 39-50 per mille, shell sand, 18-26 C, 0-6 m, inner shelf and lagoons, Indo-Pacific. 26 C, 0-8 m, inner shelf. Alveolophragmium Normal marine, muddy sediment, <10 C, 20-700 m, Martinottiella Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, > 120 m, outer shelf shelf and upper bathyal. and bathyal. Ammobaculites Hyposaline, sediment, temperate-? tropical, hyposaline Massilina Normal marine, vegetation and sandy sediment, temperate to marshes and lagoons and inner shelf. subtropical, 0-40 m, inner shelf. Ammonia Hyposaline, marine, hypersaline, sediment, I5-30C, 0-50 m, Melonis Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, 5-1000 m, shelf and hyposaline and hypersaline lagoons, inner shelf. bathyal. Ammotium Hyposaline-hypersaline, sediment, 0-30 C, intertidal-Io m, Miliammina 0-50 per mille, sediment, 0-30 C, 0-10 m, hyposaline lagoons, tidal marshes and hyposaline lagoons, estuaries, and enclosed shelf seas. hyposaline-hypersaline tidal marshes. Amphistegina >34 per mille, sea-grass, sediment, coral reefs, 25-26C, Miliolinella 32-50 per mille, sediment, 10-30C, 0-100 m, inner shelf, normal marine lagoons and tidal marshes, hypersaline lagoons. 5-20 m, inner shelf. Archaias Normal marine-hypersaline, ? sediment and vegetation, Nonion Hyposaline to normal marine, sediment, cold to tropical, 0-180 m, tropical, inner shelf. shelf. Arenoparrella Hyposaline-hypersaline, sediment, 0-30 C, intertidal, tidal Nonione/la Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate-subtropical, 10marshes. Some species known from 82-460 m off California. 1000 m, shelf and bathyal. Asterigerina Normal marine, sediment, tropical-subtropical, inner shelf. Oo/ina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to tropical, 0-180 m, shelf. Asterigerinata 35 per mille, sediment, temperate, 0-100 m, inner shelf. Operculina Normal marine-hypersaline, sediment, tropical, ? inner shelf. Baculogypsina Normal marine, algae, coral fragments, tropical >25 c, Paromalina Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, >150 m, outer intertidal to ? 10 m, coral reefs. shelf and bathyal. Bigenerina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, > 100 m, outer shelf Pa"ina Hypersaline, sediment and vegetation, 15-30 C, 0-20 m, lagoons and bathyal. and nearshore. Bolivina 32-36 per mille, muddy sediment, 1-30 C, bathyal to marginal Patellina Normal marine, clinging to pebbles or shells, cold to subtropical, marine. 0-100 m, inner shelf. Peneroplis 37-53 per mille, sea-grass, seaweed, algae, 18-27C, 0-35 m, Borelis Probably as for Alveolinella, but also Atlantic. 1-30 c, bathyal to marginal normally 0-10 m, lagoons and nearshore. Brizal~na 32-36 per mille, muddy sediment, . manne. Planorbulina Normal marine, attached to vegetation, stones and shells, Buccella Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to warm temperate, temperate--subtropical, 0-50 m, inner shelf. Protelphidium 0-35 per mille, sediment, 0-20 C, 0-10 m, hyposaline tidal 0-180 m, shelf. 1-30 C, bathyal to nearshore. Bulimina 32-36 per mille, muddy sediment, marshes, lagoons and estuaries. Buliminella Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate, 0-800 m, mainly Pullenia Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, 150-6000 m, outer shelf but extends into bathyal. shelf to deep sea. Pyrgo Group I: normal marine, vegetation and sediment, temperate, Calcarina Normal marine, algae, coral fragments, tropical >25 C, intertidal to ? 10 m, coral reefs. 0-50 m, inner shelf. Group 2: normal marine, muddy sediment, < 5 c, 50-2000 m, shelf and Caneris Normal marine, sediment, temperate-subtropical, 50-150 m, shelf. bathyal. Cassidulina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to temperate, 5Quinqueloculina > 32 per mille, sandy sediment and vegetation, mainly > 3000 m, shelf to bathyal. temperate to tropical but some arctic species, 0-40 m, inner shelf, Chilostomella Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, 80-II90 m, outer normal marine and hypersaline lagoons. shelf and bathyal. Cibicides Normal marine, clinging to vegetation, stones, shells, living Reophax Normal marine, sediment, arctic-tropical, 0-150 m, shelf. animals, arctic to tropical, 0- > 2000 m, shelf to bathyal. Rosalina Normal marine, clinging to vegetation, shells, stones, temperatesubtropical, 0-100 m, inner shelf. Cribrostomoides Slightly hyposaline (30 per mille) to normal marine, sandy sediments, ? < I 5 c, 0-150 m, shelf. Rotalia 36-38 per mille, sediment, 14-25 C, 0-40 m, inner shelf. Saccammina 32-36 per mille, sandy sediment, <15C, 0-100 m, inner Cyclammina Normal marine, sediment, 10C, sigma t 27.7, >100 m, outer shelf and upper bathyal. shelf. Cyclogyra Normal marine, sediment, cold to tropical, 0-100 m, inner shelf. . Siphotextularia Normal marine, muddy sediment, ? < 10 C, ISO- > 1000 m Discorbis Normal marine, vegetation, > 12 C, 0-50 m, inner shelf. outer shelf and bathyal. Eggerella 20-37 per mille, sediment, arctic to temperate, 0-100 m, inner Sorites >37 per mille, sea-grass, 18-26C, 0-35 m, lagoons and nearshelf, enclosed hyposaline shelf-seas and lagoons. shore. Spirillina Normal marine, clinging to stones and shells, cold to temperate, Elphidium Keeled: 35-50 per mille, sediment and vegetation, > 15 c, 0-100 m, inner shelf. 0-50 m, inner shelf. S pirolina > 37 per mille, sea-grass, 18-26 C, 0-35 m, lagoons and nearUnkeeled: 0-70 per mille, sediment and vegetation, 1-30 c, 0-50 m, hyposaline to hypersaline tidal marshes and lagoons, nearshore. shore. Stetsonia Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate to subtropical, 0Eponides Normal marine, sediment, cold to temperate, 10->6000 m, shelf 60 m, inner shelf. to bathyal. Textularia Normal marine, sandy sediment, arctic to tropical, 50-640 m, Fissurina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to tropical, 0-150 m, shelf and upper bathyal. shelf. Trifarina Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate, 0-400 m, shelf and Fursenkoina Slightly hyposaline to normal marine, muddy sediment, upper bathyal. temperate, 0-1190 m, lagoons, shelf and bathyal. Gaudryina Normal marine, sandy sediment, temperate, 50-460 m, shelf Trilocu/ina >32 per mille, sandy sediment and vegetation, mainly temperand upper bathyal. ate to tropical, 0-40 m, inner shelf, normal marine, and hypersaline Gavelinopsis Normal marine, clinging to vegetation, stones and shells, lagoons. Some bathyal species. temperate, 0- > 1000 m, shelf and bathyal. Trochamnlina Group I: hyposaline to hypersaline, muddy sediment, Glabratella > 35 per mille, sediment or vegetation, temperate-tropical, 0-30 C, intertidal, tidal marshes. Group 2: normal marine, sediment, cold to temperate, 0-2000 m, shelf 0-50 m, hypersaline tidal marshes and lagoons, normal marine inner shelf. Globobulimina Slightly hyposaline (32 per mille) to normal marine, muddy and bathyal. sediment, < 10 C, 20-2000 m, shelf to bathyal. Uvigerina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, 100->4500 m, outer Globulina Normal marine, sediment, temperate to tropical, 0-60 m, inner shelf to bathyal. shelf. Vertebralina Normal marine to hypersaline, vegetation, 15-30 c, 0-20 m, Gyroidina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, shelf and.bathyal. lagoons and inner shelf. The known range is given in figures. Where the exact limits
SUMMARY
SUMMARY
Diversit)' It
Appendix page1
3.2.3.3
OF DISTRIBUTION
The summary of the ranges of diversity (Figure 101) clearly shows that it is
possible to differentiate environments. In a general sense,
separating normal marine environments (" > 5) from "abnormal environments (" < 5). Hyposaline and hypersaline marshes, lagoons and hyposaline shelf seas all have low diversity. Normal shelf seas and normal marine lagoons have diversity values of" > 5.
5 is a boundary
Triangularplot
It
'l/
..
hyposaline lagoons
The fields for different environments show some overlap, but on the whole there is a very clear pattern (Figure 102). The field for hypersaline marshes occupies the entire triangle. All hyposaline environments lie close to the Rotaliina- Textulariina side: hyposaline marshes lack Miliolina, hyposaline lagoons and estuaries have a small Miliolina component, especially in their seaward parts. Shelf seas have up to 20 per cent Miliolina, although many lack the group altogether. Normal marine and hypersaline lagoon assemblages are primarily mixtures of Miliolina and Rotaliina. Gel/era
I/!;;
hyposoline marshes
In Appendix~ ecological data are listed for eighty-three genera; salinity, substrate, temperature of the bottom water, and depth. Some genera are good environmental indicators; however, different species of some genera live in totally different environments.
Figure 102 Summary triangular plot. Inference" index suggests (a) hyposaline and nearshore shelf-seas, (/J) hypersaline lagoon, (c) hyposaline lagoon. Triangular plot suggests (a) shelf sea, (/J) hyposaline lagoon, (c) hyposaline marsh. Gel/era Elphidium (unkeeled) salinity 0-70 per mille, sediment and vegetation, I-30C, 0-50 m, hyposaline to hypersaline marshes and lagoons, nearshore. Ammollia hyposaline to hypersaline, sediment, 15-]0 C, 0-50 m, hyposaline and hypersaline lagoons, inner shelf. Miliammilla salinity 0-50 per mille, sediment, 0-30C, 0-10 m, hyposaline lagoons, hyposaline to hypersaline tidal marshes. Ammotium hyposaline-hypersaline, sediment, O-]OC, 0-10 m, tidal marshes and hyposaline lagoons, estuaries, enclosed shelf seas. Interpretation It is clearly abnormal marine. The low abundance of Miliolina favours hyposaline water. The" index is too high for a hyposaline marsh. It must therefore be a hyposaline lagoon or nearshore shelt:'sea. Miliammillil and Alllmotium are not found in nearshore shelf-seas, so it
a
0
APPLICATION
TO PALAEOECOLOGY
This book has been written primarily to assist the palaeoecological interpretation of fossil foraminiferids. The more that is known of the distribution and ecology of modern species, the easier it will be to interpret fossil assemblages. The value of environmental reconstructions based on foraminiferids has been apparent to the petroleum industry for many years. It has been a major factor promoting the development of the subject. Before attempting to interpret a fossil assemblage, it is wise to. note the geological setting of the sample. In particular, coarse-grained sediments are likely to show evidence of reworking and transport of foraminiferids. It is important to look for signs of abrasion, size-sorting and mixing of assemblages. If any of these are well developed, an ecological interpretation based on the sample is likely to be partly in error. If the sample shows little sign of postmortem transport effects, the following procedure can be adopted; I. Make an assemblage count and determine the" index and the RotaliinaMiliolina- Textulariina ratio. 2. Examine the" summary diagram (Figure 101) to assess the range of environmental possibilities. 3. Examine the triangular plot summary diagram (Figure 102) to see which environment is indicated. 4. Compare the genera with the information in Appendix 2. 5. When the likely environment has been established, refer to the relevant chapter for details of the modern foraminiferids. Example Data" = 4, Rotaliina 80 per cent, Miliolina 5 per cent, Textulariina 15 per cent, few abraded specimens, Elphidium, Ammonia, Miliammina and Ammotium are the dorrnnant genera.
~. 55
"'C 1/
index
5 100
% Subordera. /. Genera
000 1000
similari1y
100
"C I::
i
'I
~
T
1&
~<;) T 'I Ii Ir
I ,I r I'
~~ ~
~~~\f) ~~=:.~
I~
~
Q> I:: i.'L:
~t
\/
,/ I' I /' r r
*+I
R
c: C U)
50
t IIi
'ffi
\ '\. \
0
'
,~
E.omple I.
::;
c ( ;) Q:
t
&L
0 z
Hyposoline lagoon
.' . '.
'.
~~ ~
c:t (I)
~ .~
0
~
kJ kJ fI)
1] ~ a. z
8on 30 '5
25
z i ~ 'IU ...
8 ..J 0
~ CI
>... 2
0 100
Number of individuols
U)
...... CD
:il
ex.
..,
N 0\ U) U)
fr
must he a hyposaline lagoon. The depth is 0-10 m, sediment substrate prohably with 110 weed cover, temperature in the range IS-30C in the summer. Commonly palaeoecological studies are carried out on borehole data. Using the methods described in this book, it is possible to plot a borehole log of index, percentage occurrence of the suborders, percentage abun" the dominant genus, and similarity index. The latter is especially dance of valuable in recognizing faunal changes (Figure 103). The advantages of using several different aspects of the assemblages to deduce the environments they represent, is that the results are less subjective than those obtained by conventional methods. Their application to continuous stratigraphic sections in outcrop or from boreholes enables an assessment to be made of the cause, and therefore the significance, of a faunal change. This is of fundamental importance where benthic foraminiferids arc being used for stratigraphic correlation.
SEE CHAPTER "METHODS OF ANALYSIS", NEXT PAGE _APPENDIX B.Z.3.Z .SEE PAGE5 OF THIS APPENDIX *
RELATIVE
AND ABSOLUTE
ABUNDANCE
'1 0
to -/.
ABCDEFGHIJKL
ABCDEFGHI.JKL
The two methods of quantifying living animal assemblages are relative abundance, in which the number of individuals of each species forms a percentage or ratio of the total number of individuals (100 per cent), and absolute abundance, in which the number of individuals is related to a unit area or volume of sea floor. The relationship between the two methods is shown in the following theoretical model, which has been designed to incorporate some of the features seen in natural assemblages. A profile of stations (A-L) shows a progressive increase in the absolute abundance and in the number of species present in the assemblage (see Figure I and Table I). Comparison of the two methods of presenting the results shows: (a) Species I, having a uniform absolute abundance, has a spurious peak at' station A by the relative abundance method. Similar spurious peaks at station A are seen in the relative abundance of species 2, 4 and 5; (b) the peaks of abundance appear at different stations according to the method used (species 2, 3, 5 and 6); (c) most other species show a progressive increase in absolute abundance but this is not evident from the relative abundance histograms because the rate of increase of the abundance of individual species is roughly the same as that of the total population. An additional disadvantage of the relative abundance method is that when the number of species is small (less than ten) the percentages of individual species are inevitably high and vice versa. Ujiie (1962) has pointed out that when the sampling error exceeds the percentage of a given species, the result should be rejected. He concluded that it was preferable to reject all occurrences of less than 7-10 per cent. While this might be desirable from the statistical point of view, it is scarcely practical. Two definitions of absolute abundance have been used in the study of foraminiferids. Schott (1935) used the Foraminiferal Number, i.e. the number of foraminiferids present in I g dry weight of sediment. Phleger (1960a) and other authors have used the absolute abundance of foraminiferids in a unit area of 10 cm' (volume 10 cm3). Only the latter definition is appropriate to the study of living foraminiferids, but it has the disadvantage that the area of sea floor sampled must be known. Unless the rate of sedimentation and the rate of production of the foraminiferids are known, there can be no direct comparison ofliving populations on a two-dimensional surface with Foraminiferal Numbers based on three-dimensional samples drawn from fossil assem bla ges. Thus there are advantages and disadvantages of the relative and absolute abundance methods, but both are useful for different aspects of study as long as the user is aware of the errors which can arise.
'Ul
,~ ,Lj
5
HI
L
~
~
I
"I01i'"
~ IL
J t
Lillrffiw
I
,
7
1mmrdllJ
~
I
rRh
U
U
U
i
STANDING
CROP
The number of individuals present on a unit area of sea floor at anyone time is the standing crop. Many authors use a unit area of 10 cm' but, even where a larger unit area is stUdied (e.g. Murray, I968b, 1969), the results can be scaled down for comparative purposes. Standing crop can also be measured as biomass (i.e. live weight), dry weight, dry organic matter, displacement volume or calculated volume (see Nielson, 1963, p. 133) but these are not normally used in foraminiferid studies. BIOMASS Biomass is normally expressed as live weight, and can be used as a measure of standing crop. However, since a population of a few large animals may be ecologically more significant than a large population of small individuals, it seems worth using both measures of population size. In the case of foraminiferids, it is difficult to measure live weight because of their small size and the difficulty of separating them from the sediment. It is therefore easier to express biomass as the calculated volume of the entire shell (Murray, 1968b) although in the case of large genera it is probably advisable to include only the volume of the chambers. It is easier to approximate foraminiferids to simple geometrical shapes than to develop a formula to express the volume of a complex shape. Many foraminiferids are close to prolate or oblate sphaeroids, spheres or cones. The size-volume relationships are shown in Figures 2 and 3. It can be seen that as size increases arithmetically, volume increases logarithmically. Therefore, the most reliable way of measuring biomass is to measure each specimen and to determine its volume. However, in practice this is tedious, slow and not worth the labour involved. A more rapid method is to divide the individuals into a number of size groups and, by inspection, to select the middle-sized specimen in each group, to determine its size and volume, and to multiply by the number in the group. The sum of the group volumes will give the biomass.
......
j rlH-i-rrrTIiJ
L ~
10
Lrilllli
Lmmm
II
U
U
L
1
~
L j
12
~
rrll
13
dilJ
~
11
14 15
1
Figure I Histograms of absolute and relative abundance of fifteen species along a profile of stations A to L, based on the data in Table I.
I:i!
(!)
N 0\ CD
Table I Theoretical
Absolute abundance
Station A B C D E F G H I
S peeies no. I 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ]0
2 5 5 5 10 20 40 80 160 160 5 20
4 5 5 10 20 5 5 10 3 45 60 80 100 100 80 60
6 2 5 10 20
10
II
12
13
14
15
4
60 80 80 60 40
5 10 10 20 50 70
5 5 5 10 20 10 20 30 50
I 10 20 3 45 80 100 120 10 20 30
3
4 50 60 100 200 200 100
3 4
60 9 ISO
3 5
80 120 180
5
120
10 20 50
80 4
20
3
20
K L
10
10
25 300
300
24
100 200
13
130
190
220
IS
30 60 loa
10
4 4
5 10
1625 1715
Relative abundance
Station A B C D E F G H I
Speeies no. I 31 IS 9-4 5.4 3.5 2.5 1.8 1.2 0.9 0.7 0.6 0.6
2 IS 8 4.7 5.4 7.0 10.0 14.8 19.7 15.2 5.8 2.5 1.2 15 3 37.8 32.5 28.0 20.0 11.0 4.9 2.7 1.5 0.6 0.3
8 8 4.7 2.7 3.5 5.0 5.5 6.2 7.6 8.8 11.0 14.0
10
II
12
13
14
IS
Total 100 101 99.8 100.0 99.8 100.0 100.5 99.8 99.6 99.6 99.1 99.9
0.9 5.4 7.0 7.5 8.3 9.7 9.5 8.8 8.0 7.6
K L
0.3 ~.6
.: (/Isoo
::s :e
DO
'EJOO
a c:: ~...
e...
:c no
'a;
:1:'00 01
0 0 IlOO
Major radius
(11m)
Figure 2 Size-volume graph of sphere,. oblate and prolate sphaeroids. Volume contours are in decimal pans of a cubic millimetre, e.g. 002 0.002 mm'.
Diversitv is the relationship of the number of species to the number of individuals in an assemblage. If all assemblages comprised the same number of individuals, the numbers of species could be compared directly. However, normally it is necessary to compare assemblages of differing size. A variety of diversity indices have been proposed to enable this to be done. Sanders (I 968) ha~ given a comprehensive discussion of these indices. Here it is intended to describe only those diversity indices which have heen used to interpret foraminiferid data.
the index for each sample, as, once value can be determined against the total number of individuals.
'"
The", index takes the rarer species into account, and Williams (1964) considers that ii is a consistent index where the distribution is assumed to be of the log-series form. Murray (1968b) made successively larger counts on three samples to check the constancy of The variation was shown not to
be great, but there was a tendency for", to increase with sample size (Figure 5). Nevertheless, as this diversity index is very easy to use and produces useful results, it has been adopted in this book.
"'.
Yule-Simpson
Following Yule's (1944) study of literary vocabulary, modified one of his equations for use as a diversity index:
N(N-I)
i-I
L 11,(11,-1)
6-."
0.,>
11.
where N is the total number of individuals, K is the number of species and n, is the number of individuals of the ith species. The disadvantage of this index is that it is controlled mainly by the abundant species. Gibson (1966) used this index to re-interpret data from Phleger (t954). Phleger made counts of individuals and calculated the total fauna for 3 Gibson has re-interpreted these figures in such each standard 10 cm3 sample. a way that the number of species is related to the total sample (which may be 4000 or more) rather than to the count of individuals. This obviously is 3populations from Norrh Japan. wrong. Ikeya (1971) used this index for total
'0
6-: "l
described
by Fisher,
Corbett
and
Williams
111 =- x where x is a constant having a value less than I (this can be read from Figure 125 of Williams, 1964) and n, can be calculated from N(I - x), N being the size of the population. 70 ~
;'
0,
Information function Buzas and Gibson (1969) used the information function to measure foraminiferal diversity. They pointed out that it '... measures the number of species and their proporrions without making any assumptions as to an underlying distribution'. The function is H(S)
65
';'
60 'b Ir" 55
p, logp, = i-=1 L
50
45
where Pt is the proportion of the ith species, and S is the number of species. Maximum diversity, i.e. H(S), is reached when all species have equal frequencies. Buzas and Gibson plotted H(S) against depth for foraminiferal assemblages from the continental shelf and ocean off the east coast of the U.S.A. Diversity peaks were found at 35-45 m, 100-200 m and deeper than 250 m. They also plotted a measure of species equitability, which was the ratio eH(SIIS where e is the base of the natural logarithms. Species which are perfectly equally distributed have the ratio equal to I. . The use of information theory in diversity srudies has also been discussed by Beerbower and Jordan (1969).
Cumulative curves approach to diversity is to plot the logarithm of the number of
." ($-'
A graphical 30
~ 0.<
IJ) OJ
'u ~20
fI)
rJ.<"l
"5
, rJ.:
cJ,..:~
N
....... cD f'C") N
a 100
5000
10000
OK)
20
)0
40
50
tOO
200
300
1000
CD '" I!>
number of species, the number of individuals in an assemblage and lines of equal diversity index.
Cumulative
number
'-1
f p,logp,
lOoH H..
(H,) is used:
H ,--
SIMILARITIES
AND
Sanders (1960) described a method of measuring similarity between samples in order to construct a trellis diagram. The percentage occurrence of species in the two samples to be compared are listed side by side. For each species common to the two samples, the lowes! percentage occurrence is taken and the total value is the similarity index. On average, values higher than 80 per cent indicate that the samples are neaIly identical. Lower values indicate progressively greater differences. For example:
Species ~l 10 20 ~2 10 % in common 10 20
B
C D E F G H
15 15 5 30 2 3 100
28 7 16 25 14
100
where the maximum value of H is H... Miller and Khan give a list of values for - p log p and proportions (p; this is percentage divided by 100; 10 per cent = O.IOp) and also a table of H.. values for up to 10 components (1962, p. 428). Relative entropy is at a minimum when the composition is 100 per cent of one species, and at a maximum where the contribution of all species is all the same. A map of H, values should ideally have zones of low entropy (i.e. single-species dominance) separated by zones of relatively high entropy in which there are several dominance species. Examples of such images are given by Miller and Khan (1962, p. 431) and Howarth and Murray (1969, p. 672). It is important to realize that although low entropy indicates that the assemblage is close to 100 per cent of one species, not all low entropy areas are related to the same species.
7 15 25 3 80% similarity
COMPUTER
STUDIES
Murray (1969) has used similarity indices to compare adjacent samples along traverses. They can also be used to compare adjacent samples areally or to compare all samples from one area. For the latter it is advisable to make use of a computer to reduce the calculation time.
TRIANGULAR
PLOT
OF SUBORDERS
Apart from the general use of computers to do routine calculations on foraminiferid assemblage data, there have been two main fields of application: factor analysis and cluster analysis. Factor analysis was used by Howarth and Murray (1(1'69)in are-appraisal of the ecology of Christchurch Harbour, England. Cluster analysis has been more commonly used: Kaesler (1966), on Todos Santos Bay; Mello and Buzas (1968), on the central Texas coast; Howarth and Murray (1969), on Christchurch Harbour, England; and Ujiie and Kusukawa (1969), on Japanese bays. The methods of computation are complex, and for details of procedure the reader is referred to the above papers.
I t is convenient that all modern foraminiferids with hard tests fall into three suborders, the Textulariina, Miliolina and Rotaliina (Loeblich and Tappan, 1964). They therefore lend themselves to plotting on a triangular diagram (Figure 7).
LIVE-DEAD
Walton
RA 1'10
the ratio
(1955) introduced
SPECIES
DOMINANCE
number ofliving .f X 100 D = number of dead as a means of assessing the rate of sedimentation. Use of this ratio has become quite common. However, few authors have considered the errors involved. Where seasonal studies of standing crop size have been carried out, the annual range has often been ten times the lowest value, e.g. in 1965 the variation for Elphidium articulatum (d'Orbigny) in Bottsand Lagoon is from less than 10 in January to 125 in August (data from Lutze, 1968a). A conservative estimate would be a threefold difference. Suppose a dead population of 1000 individuals and standing crops of 100 and 300. The resulting LID ratios would be 10 per cent and 30 per cent respectively. Boltovskoy and Lena (1969b) calculated LID ratios for 24 monthly samples from the same locality in Puerto Deseado, Argentina. The range of variation was 5.6 to 50.0 per cent. The only reliable method of assessing the rate of sedimentation from foraminiferids is to compare the annual production with the number of dead individuals (Murray, 1967b).
the concept of faunal dominance which he m:fined as '. . . the percentage occurrence of the most common species in a foraminiferal population'. In general, very variable environments are dominated by few species which have high abundance (90-100 per cent in some marshes), whereas stable environments are characterized by many species, none of which is very abundant (10-15 per cent in shelf seas). To a certain extent, species dominance is controlled by the number of
MILIOLINA
INDEX
OF REGENERA T10N
Boltovskoy (1957) noted that irregularities in the tests of foraminiferids could have two possible origins, ecological or mechanical. In the latter case the animal repairs its test. In material from the Rio de la Plata, Elphidium had the best powers of regeneration, 0.08 per cent of the assemblage showed signs of regeneration and Boltovskoy proposed this measure as a regeneration index. Although he postulated that different values would be oblained from different environments, this index has not been used subsequently. SALINITY
Throughout this book the following terms have been used: hyposaline
<32 per mille, normal marine = 32 - 37 per mille, hypersaline = >37 per mille. The subdivisions of hyposaline (brackish) waters, such as those listed by Hiltermann (1948), have not been followed.
G 69238/
ilL-
SUPER
ENVIRONMENT
TERRESTRIAL
M A
INNER
INNER LAGOON
MOUND
N E
OUTR PLATI'ORM
MAIN ENVIRONMENT
SLOPE
BASIN
SUB-ENVIRONMENT
QUALIFIER
~._.~--u_-
OPEN MARINE
D
./
L
~~~~~~!~~-
---.
--p---
.1
--r--_.~-~~
-_._------
---~-~_.. Un
-'"
+p -------------
~
m
.. . .. ---.
'\.
WAVE BASE
-""
~
----
==-:'-=-i-~--P~O~~~~~==
~ --
--.
"-"-"---"'-'--~~
---un.
-------------...~-t
...--..
---"---U'
--
---
- ---------.---
~--
~
---~ "....... ~---- -- -----
~'
'---
---
_m__--- -!-- -
_.-
__un.
~-----~----
-----
--
- -
--
~----------.. ---
MUDSTON E
-SIN
--
u.-
---
---.....-
--------. -
---
-----
mum.
~
~-
CCD_-
_.-.
DSTONfi}(~BOUNDSTONE)
-_. -.--
f-------------------_.-
---__moo.
--
..
---"
-...
---
--
.
-H -.. -
---
-------.-
:' I
I
WACKESTONE
-.-.
--
---
--
---
-------- --~~ -
GRAINSTONE
f-1--f--..--. --------.. .--
----
--
----
..---------------
--. ---
. _.-
-- - ----
-. --
- - ......
---
--
-.
_0 ' .-.
---
---
--.....-
.--..-.
PACKSTONE
,1 - ..
--------
.~_.._._-_..
-.
----. .-
~------------
---
. -----~ ~~
---
- --- ---
_0"__-._mo. ---
FLOATSTONE
--
2)(=WACKSlONE)
----- -----.-----.---.-
------
i I
~-
--SAFFLisTON-E3)(:SOU-NDST:)
~ ---
- --. - 1
-- -;;;.. -"
-n
- ..;.; ~
------
-..;;;
-
~ ---
c.
f-
.---.-
--
F-R A
MESTONE
4) (=BOUN-CST.)----
_..
---------_.
RUDSTONE5)(aGRAINSTONE) -..
1) Organisms 2) Wackestone 3) Organisms 4) Organisms 5) Grainstone act as sediment with more than binders (e.g. 10% particles
---
--
"
--
1 --
---
.
-
--
"
1 ---"-
'
-- ---"
- --
---1---
sand
(>2mm)
act as sediment baffers (e.g. dendroid corals) act as frame builders (e.g. intergrown reef corals) with more than 10% particles coarser than sand (>2mm)
669238,
TIM.lTaIAL
_.
n ~----~-
PLAIN
T.o.\L
...".. nDAL
I-
PLATFORM
OUTER LAGOON
5 U B T I D
IBAMIER A L
OUTU ~LA-
SLOPE
BASIN
OPEN MARINE
MEAN SEA LEVEL
~-
~1
'-
-- -- ----- ;'-----~~-~~~~---~~~~~~--~-~-~~;;;;;;;~~iii~~~~
HIGHSPIRAL
--
---
FAVREINA
BENTHIC ECHINOIDS CALC. WORMTUBES FORAMS
-- ---
THIN TESTS
'-
ARENACEOUS ONLY
I'
I
ceo
CODIACEAN ALGAE
-- ----------
--- ---
--------------
I j
J
l
J
r-u
--
ALGAE
--
SHELL
BANKS
--~'-~--
~~~()~_NS
BRACHIOPODS
--------
---.-
- -- -.-..------
--
--------------___--_--n
___n--.----..-,-.---
-----
-------
--
CELLULAR ALGAE
_...----
-----.
--
----
-------------_._------------
-----...-----.
-. - --- 1-------
-- --
-----...
-_uu-
---
---
- ---------
--
t
----------+-----J----
---
---.---~'--'_...
---------'--.-
-----_u-----.~._.._--
-'
-----------
-----L--.L--I
..-.-----
-- -.n-
-- -.-.-.,---
-- .-.-------
-----------'------
---T ----1-----+----
-- -- -
r---~------_._-_._-------"----~_.'
-- ---'._-
----- --------_._-~
PLANKTONIC FORAMS
---------RADIOlARIANS PTEROPODS
--~ ..__n
f--------- --,----.
"-
---------
---
--.------..
-------.
--u--
--- --------------
------
-------AMMONITES
. - ------
-----_u_----~IS. SPQI'!GESu
----
-----------
--
- ------ ---------
----~----
T
- --
1-
---
----------
--"-----------"-
.__._-~
-
---
---.- ---
--
--
.--------.,--. -
---------
f-----
--
--. '---'--.'-
-.--...
,----
---
--_._-~_.-
------
---- I I
"0
(JJ (]I
G6923B/1t
TERRESTRIAL
M A
INN;R PLATFORM
R I N E
PL~~;M BARRIER SLOPE BASIN OPEN MARINE
LEVEL
PLAIN
OUTER LAGOON
SUBTIDAL
--------------...
PISOIDS
'-'-.. -----_'n ..-
------------------------------------------------------~~~-~~-------------------------------------
MEAN
SEA
----------------
OOIDS
-~---_.._-_._----
----
- '--'-'-'-'-'
__'_n______.-~ --..--~ -
--
ONCOIDS
AGGREGATE
---
--
m..."_.'-"---""-'-~
GRAINS
-.-
-.
--
-.----~
- -'-'-'--"---'-' '---
---
----, ~ .-
---~.~-~~~.-
_u
-----
PELLETOIDS
~_.--
--
_._~ -
-~
-",,u..
------.-.--.-----
_.~.__.
FAECAL
CORTOIDS
PELLETS
-.--------.--.-.~._--._-
--
. ----------.----....---
-----
PARTICLES IN CARBONATE
ENVIRONMENTS
a. x. UJ
~ UJ m
G69238/i
SUPER
ENVIRONMENT
TERRESTRIAL
M INNER
~INNER LAGOON
MOUND
E
PlATPOR..
OUTER
MAIN ENVIRONMENT
SUB - ENVIRONMENT QUALIFIER
---~-~----------'------
PLATFORM
OUTER LAGOON BARRIER
BASIN
INTER
TIDAL
~1
----
--------------~-
-----------
---~---
-- ~---
ROOT MARKS
r-~---------------
~-------------~
TEPEE
r--~--
STRUCTURES
--
- -- '-
--
--'--
---..-----
------.---------,_. _n - -----
....--
---_._--~------------ -- ---------------u- -- -
---~
------~~-
-----------
------
-- ----------.-.,-
-----
------~ ----
...._-----
----. "
-~
'\.
--
--
-- -
n_-
--------
--
---
------"------.-.-
--
---------
--
.--------
_._---------~- ---
" '\.
'"
n______-f----........ CCD
----~-~-------
COLLAPSE UNDULATING
f---------------------
BRECCIAS
ALGALMATS
---
-_..._---,-.---..---..---.
--.------
.-
K"
...........
ZEBRA
--
-- ".-
- FABRICS
- ---.-.. ---
-~-------
---------------~
---~_.--
FENESTRAL
------------------~~--
FABRICS
-
BIRDSEYES
-------------------
--- -----"--.
----
.-
HARD GROUNDS(WITHBORINGS)
---
-----~
---..-~~--
.-
---.
------- ----.--.-
---~_._----------_._. n
-- ---_0_-
---~~-----___.0_.___--.----'
---~------------
---
- - ------ --- --
---------~_.._-0--. --"
~-
---.-
-- - --
---
~~----_.- ----
--~-o_~
--------------~ -
--__~--m --'---____._0____ -~
--------
--
------ -----------.----..--
i
]> -0 -0 (1) ::J a. x. VI f'\) (.oJ :..."
DISTRIBUTION
OF SEDIMENTARY
STRUCTURES
IN CARBONATE
ENVIRONMENTS
G69238/.
SUPER
ENVIRONMENT
TEltREST1tIAL
COASTAL
NON DELTAIC
PLAIN
SUPRA-
M A R
~INNERLAGOON
E
OUTER
PLATFORM
TIDAL
INTER TIDAL
SLOPE
BASIN
BARRIER
I
OPEN MARINE
D
./"
L
------------.!V~Y!'_~~~- -- - - BASE PHOTiCZONE--
--~-----_. ----------'--~---_.._~_._-------------------
1.
--~~ -~_.. ---
.-------------.
-----------
------._--_.--
-------
------
---
--
~K.-- --------.
---------------f.. -----.
--.-
----~---
--~----_.
---_u_____n-
-- -------------.-----------,-"-'-----------"---",---
-------------....----" ------------_..___n"__"-
~-----"-'-
- --- -- '-
....-----___._d_-.--~---~~
--.---"'_.n1------------
--------- --.-.--.-
------------~---
----~--~.-
f-
-----------.---.-.,..-
---,.-..---..
MASSIVE BEDDING
WAVYBEDDING
FLASER
----.
-----..- --- - - --------.---- - - ----..-..-.-.--... --~--. -.. _n
LAMINATION (GEN.)
------._u .--
....-.-
-.------.-.--.-------I----.------
.-.. -1-.
--.~
---------.-----_u_--+-.-----
--
---
EVEN MM BEDDING
BEDDING
~-- - --
--.-
---
----
1-------1-----In n
1-.--.---.-~-.-.1----------
----
---- --.--
~CCD
._m ---~
.--.-. .L__-
---.---.-.-
--
-.--.----.--
~----------.-..-_..-
u-
1----
----
---------.---------
------------(>1 m)
-. -.--_..---~
_un
--- . -----__-un
u_-
__m ------------
.-. -------.-
..
..-- --
------ -
-----.
--
I-
-----.--
..-.-
--------------
~-
-- ------~~
--+-------- ----
...--_._.__n f--__n_----
-...--..-----.-------.
-
-.--- 1-------
- ----- -
~-+---.---.--- .----+-
REGULAR -.. EVEN BEDDING --..-.-.---------...-..-----------COARSE WAVY --.-. BEDDING ---~-------------.---------COARSE IRREGULAR LAM. ------------------CONVOLUTE BEDDING
LS-MR
-- 1---~--
- -----
.-----..-n
I ~_.._-::..~--J---
-..----.-
-----------
---..-
-----.-----.-.---
--.
-.. -.
_..-'--'-'----'--'-'-----.
---.----.------..-.-.-..-.------...-----.....---..--
-.
.~._---"'-- ------
----
---
-------_.------- ---~ -.
~-
-- ~.:::-l-I
~~-----------
SEQUENCE
--------------
~~_._----------
--1--------
----
----
------------- ---
----.-.--..--.------------ ------
1>
ti
. --~-_._-
1--
.----_.. -----
--
-- -
)(
Q.
::J
DISTRIBUTION
OF BEDDING
IN CARBONATE
ENVIRONMENTS
01 N ~ CD
669238/1
TERRESTRIAL
M A
INNER INNER LAGOON
MOUND
R I N E
PLc:?~~M
BARRIER
SLOPE
BASIN
OPEN MARINE
-----------SALT
-~~
~~~~~~!~~~~~-~~~_.,, --...--.-----.
~_._~----_._-----
. ._-~~-
-------------------------
BASE
PHOTIC ZONE
'--NOD;-
----.------------
ANHYDRITE
--'u-_'___0'_'_'----
~--
-_.--
- -- --'----
GYPSUM
~-----------
"--"-'
'---'-'
DOLOMITE SILICA
--
- --..-----..--"" '
-----~ ~n_---~----
,--,-"--"',----
'--
' -.----.....-.
--
...
- ----_u ---
-----------
---'--.---
----
J_---.l~-----. ---1--
GLAUCONITE "CLAY"
"
--
---
---
-..
--------------
---------'--
--
---
___'0-
--_._-----.----
------ .---
---------
-.
'--'-,
..--
N t>J i.D
669238/1.
TERRESTftIAL
M A
INNER PLATFORM
R I N E
PL~~~:M BARRIER
SLOPE
BASIN
OPEN MARINE
MEAN SEA LEVEL
------------------------------------------------------DESSICATION CRUSTS
,~~~ ~~._-~
-------------------------~ ~ ---
--~_._----
-_.~
ASYMMETRIC
INTERSTITIAL
CEMENT
~-
-~
. --~
- -~
---.-------.
_..
--~~--
EVAPORITES
~ ~
----
---
.'
'n
n_'__'.-'-
--
. ~ ~ ~
---.
-----._-'..
n
'-'-'-"'-
--
--
--
-~ --
---
u-
_..,,~
FIBROUS CEMENT
-
--
~-
-- --
---
---
-.--.---
~L_.
--...------.-...-----. ---------
ARAGONITE . CEMENT
-..--.-..--------------
rr--_.--~-
MICRITIZATION
'
"--'
"'
"'-'--
-'
--------(after
RACZ,HOOGKAMER and HOFFMANN, 1983)
. t---~
DISTRIBUTION OF EARLY
c.. x' 0J N
G 69 238/
TERRESTRIAL
M INNER PLATFORM
OUTER
E
OUTER
PLATfORM
SLOPE
OPEN MARINE
BASIN
LAGOON
BARRIER
L ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~-~~~-------------------------
~--_._--
-. ..-
~---_._----_.._-"-~
.----.--------.-.
---_._-----.--.---..----
~-------
COLOURING
'--'.---------------------
u__,___n
--.
- -- --
-'
.. .- --.'. . .-.-.-
---
.-
--'-'--" ~~--"-' -~
-.
~..-
.--
,.U
.--.---
---~u
--_J_----
~~---~--~---
---
RECRYST.
PARTICLES ,
-. -
--T----
~-,
--.
----
- ---~--ru
~u-r-
LEACHING / DISSOLUTION
u ---------------------.--...----...--- --, -'--'--
+--.------.---. -.
.. .
INTERNAL SEDIMENT
---
..
-..
--.----.---....-. _n
~--_..--_.-
-..
. -.
--
--"
- -~---
------
EVEN CEMENT
-
--------".,---_.---
u_"
+
I
1>
~....
_.~
..
RECRYST. MICRITE
,
-.
-_.~_. , -
'''---''--
._u_-'",
,_.-
---~
-----
-~--T
--''''
,,-----
n_n
GRANULAR CEMENT
---'''---
-.----
CD :J a. xVI N ~ ---.
G6923e/12<
SUPER <D
ENVIRONMENT
T E R R E S T R I A L
C.PLATF.I
@
MAIN ENVIRONMENT ALLUVIAL GLACIAL DESERT
DELTA
COMPLEX
NON- DELTAIC
SLOPE
CONT. RISE ABYSS. Alluvial Fan Fluvial Fan Wodi System Eolian Sabkha Estuary Coastol Barrier Shore (- lone) Lagoon Plain Lagoon Build-up Shoal Barrier Submarine Canyon Fan
PLAIN JT1 Z
Submarine
G)
SUBENVIRONMENT
Eolian
I
I
z 03:
::u 0
<
Sabkha
Crevasse, Delta, Dune, Embayment
Prodelta
Mound, Natural Levee, Plain, Reef, Ridge,
SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENT
Bay, Flat,
Island,
Marsh
Swamp,
. etc.
I"1r ~J>
~O
- dominated,
Fluvio
Lacustrine,
Fluvio
Marine,
Shallow,
Deep,
Below
Thermocline,
Below
CCD,
Tidal,
Supratidal,
FOR@,@AND@
Subtidal, Arid, Humid, Back, Centre, Core, Distal, Face, Flank, Flood (ed), Faot, Fore, Fringe, Front, Inner, Lateral, Lower, Margin, Middle, Outer, Proximal, Slope, Talus, Upper, etc.
Littoral, Littoral
~-""'1 ..
~O 2Z en 0 :I:
-en 10en ~O
~~
JT1
WATERDEPTH
Inner Neritic,
Shallow
Marine,
Inner Neritic,
Inner
- Middle
Neritic,
Middle
Neritic,
Deep Marine,
Middle
- Outer
Neritic,
Outer
Neritic, Oxic,
Oceanic in gen.,
Lower Bathyal,
Bathyal- Abyssal,
Abyssal,
Hadal.
01
- CONTENT
SALINITY
Euxinic,
Some
Oxygen
Deficiency
(- "Restricted")
to Normal Marine, Normal Marine, Normal Marine to Hyperhaline, Hyperhaline, Hyper - to
3: JT1
Brackish
<V
@ @
ENERGY
High to Moderate,
Moderate,
Moderate
to Low,
Low.
TEMPERATURE
Warm (tropical),
Moderate (temperate),
subantarctic),
Cold (arctic,
antarctic).
Appendix 3.2.4.2.1
LITHOLOGIES.
GAMMA
0 API loe 50 140
SONIC
115 .u5/FT 4l' 90 55
FDC/CNL
4~ LS PU -1!5 GleC t'9~ 2'9~ JO 1& 0 2.20 2.~ 270
IN
10
GYPSUM ANHYDRITE
T
&
I
~T
~0
II
I
I I
0 "I.
DOLOMITE
10% ~20%
I
I
-3.0 .1.
I
I I
I
-~10%
0.1.
N~70
SANDSTONE
20%
WaterbearinQ
- +A)
. ..- -.
I
3.0".
SHALES
0:1'3.?-1'~?
COAL
COMMONROCK TYPES
0
~O %)
GAMMA RAY
HESISTIV'ITY
SONIC
(microseo/rt)
FDC (gr/oo)
NEUTRON
(limestone por. scale)
(API
units)
depending on
pore content
8MID
SUAL},; -~---~_.LIM"~JTONF;
10
~O 140
10
It)
51
65
- 96
50.0
2.07 1.01
2.06
2.65
~n< ~a
25 - 50
00
low
It)
150 90
07.5
- 2.75
2.98
5
10
4~.5
2.71
2.87
"n
= !5a
!5a
lJOI,OMI'1'E
20
It)
~0.5
2.19
!5n>
,..,
.... IV
ANI1YI)]!J'l'I'
~---_.._~---
high
0
0
(\J
SAL'l'
high
.'
66.7
2.0~
'" CT>
CP CJ
COAL
high
110
140
1. ~- 1.5
,,>
Jd>
40
(SNP)
70 (CNL)
Appendix
3.2.4.2.2
FDC-SONIC OVERLAY
c.~
------,.-....-."".."
-~-------------on:.~.,. ...=,'C
~
.,..
""F
--r-
,.,.
'-"" """" ,.,.
PURE TO SILTY SHALE 011 PURE SHALE TO MARL VERY SILTY SHALE 011 SLIGHTLY 011 SLIGHTLY TO VERY ARGILLACEOUS LIMESTONE OR FINE SAND SILT OR SAND
<!i :-:7..-
~
IL
::::-':'
...,.
SILT-SAND LIMESTONE
FDC
~-,. ~
~'"\
-
F ~-, --...
""
~ <I: -r:-:.'.
IAJ II: (,) IAJ 0
SONIC
SONIC;80m./f'
OVERLAY
LINE
80m./fl
THE DENSITY LINE OF 2.5 glee OVER THE LINE ON THE SONIC LOG OR VICE VERSA
FDC-SNP/CNL
---
OVERLAY
-FDC ",,"CNL
FDC
I I I I I I / / / / / 1\~ I / / / /
\
OF THE TWO LOGS; POROUS LIMESTONE (=2.45 o/ee) OVER THE 15% LINE ON THE CNL. .~.,.. CNL
ALIGN THE LIMESTONEPOROSITY SCALES <::'" E.G.OVERLAY THE DENSITY LINE OF 15%
I LIMESTONE I
NO SEPARATION
DOLOMITE
:':.
..........
SALT
CNL
LEFT
OF FDC
1\ 1\ ===r 1\ 1\ 1\ 1\ =r=
::...;:~
4::: ...i
ANHYDRITE
....
~!.~i~':.'
-.:... .(...... ~?
"'0
-r
=r= ..
SHALE
. . .. . . . . . ... .. . .. . . . .. . . . ..
..... CD ,.., C\J
.. .. .. -r
::.::;:-
.SAND
FDC
00.0 0
/CNL
-CNLj'S%LlNE
FDC;2.4Sg/ce
LlNE-
"iT
NOTE: The presence of gas (see master log) effects the above FDC-SNP/CNLseparation. Dolomitemay be interpreted as limestone and limestone may be interpreted as sand. Also the presence of minerals other than quartz, calcite or dolomite (e.g. mica, glauconite, pyrite, feldspar) can alter the separation. For example micaceous sandstone may give a shale /dolomite separation.
C)
co '"
669238/125
IICYLINDERII SHALE
II
FUNNEL
II
II BELLII
SHALE
SAND SAND
SHALE
DUNE:
-NO MARINE FOSSILS
MEANDERING
-
RIVER CHANNEL:
FOSSILS SORTING
MATERIAL
SHALLOW
MARINE
FOSSILS MAY BE
NO MARINE
- CLAY ABSENT
SHELL FRAGMENTS
ABUNDANT
POOR - MODERATE
- MICA. CARBONACEOUS
TRANSGRESSIVE
-
MARINE
SAND:
CHANNEL
SHALLOW
MARINE FOSSILS
- BRACKISH-SHALLOW FOSSILS
-
- HIGH
sholes)
-
CONTENT OF CALCAREOUS
(common in enclosing
- GLAUCONITE
TIDAL SAND
SHALLOW
TURBIDITE:
-
GLAUCONITE
(DEEPER) MARINE
(common
FOSSILS
in enclosing shales)
BEDDING
TURBIDITE:
-
- GRADED
(DEEPER) MARINE
(common
FOSSILS
shales)
in enclosing
CHARACTERISTIC
GAMMA
IN CLASTICS
u u co :J 0X !->' N ~ ~
SIGNIFICANCE
Appendix 3.2.4.3.2
COMMON RESERVOIR
SAND TYPES AND THEIR CHARACTERISTIC GR (SP) LOG PROFILES AS WELL AS OTHER SIGNIFICANT FEATURES
(ofter TAYLOR, 1977)
TYPE OF SAN D
Approximate average
r25
I
Coarser FIner ~
Gamma Roy
~~~tlf~al
AEOLIAN DUNE
lo
JOo 20 30 .
0::98 UJ upto300m
~ ~ 0'2
, suSPENSION 'Millet
seed'
-SALTATiON fro,'ed
gro'n,.
~
~
except
zone
,
SHEET
,
S of
Very forese'
good
In dune
Downwind source
beds
-:I
~-
-~
ALLUVIAL FAN
up 1O3000m
?
NBupper
---'Depos,T'O~-QI-Diverse unS10b Ie
groins, Errotlc,polymodaJ, mIcas
dips of 2
,
- 3
----Extremely variable,
mounlal~s,
up to 30
Coalescing to
PRISMS porallel with mountain front
~-_.~----_.-
and as braided
Indlvldual5sf
units os brOlded
._-
FLUVIATILE BRAIDED
DIverse
u~st~bl;~
".....
.....
~ :: ~'.:
A. r-,
RIBBONS, DENDROIDS,
ry'1r-;:>Y'
good Chonnel depo' but lensing and 't' may be separated by tight
,
SHEETS,
topstrclum or cemented
rtaches as fluvlotlle
L
Z
-'.. -. - -~......
Carbonaceous, micas
~
PODS, perpendicular Carbonaceous, micas
.:j ),,?
Low dlpsappraach
I ~~~~~~~~'r~x:::t slumpslOcreeks
~
to palaeo. slope, but prograde to form RIBBONS parallel Wit h palaeo - slope
--~
~nu~l~jKdcUe~~:~:~rs
good
--
BARRIE
Shell, g loucomte Micas and carbonaceous IncreOSIn downwards Shell,glouconlte. phosphallc groins
..,.
..,.->--
~~
RIB80NS,
--~-
--.---
perpendicular to palaeo-slope SHEETS SHEETS, RIBBONS, perpendicular to palaeo. slope at maximum tran~~.~s._~--RIBBONS, otten perpendicular to polaeo~ slope RIBBONS, parallel palaeo. DENDROIDS, with slope
.~~
Shell, Qlouconlfe
Tops bioturbated
Worn shallow water sheils
Glauconlle
carbonaceous,
---E ,cellenl
mIca
....
FAN
SHEETS Regional
Fa Ir to poor
deterlarotmg away
_"~'~ "'~~
"
....
d,p on
shale Interbeds
from source.
----Common reservoir sand types, with,characteristic log profiles, grain size distributions, significant accessories, dipmeter expression, plan geometry and orientation relative to palaeo-slope, and reservoir characteristics. Compiled from Conybeare, Glaister and Nelson, Pirson, Selley, Shelton, Visher, van Veen and others.
Appendix
3.2.4.3.3
FAU N A
I
-0-
FAUNA
I HON HON - BATH
Br
I
I
-100NF Br
I
-200-
HON
'
I
I
HIN NF NF
Br NF NF Br
-300-
I
I
HON
NF NF
-400-
I
I
-500NF NF Br
I
I
-600-
HON
NF -700-
--
CLAYLINE
DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENT OF SAND(STONES) WITH "CYLINDER" SHAPED GR(SP) PATTERNS DETERMINED BY THE FAUNA
,,-.1 It) " ~ N (1) CD (!)
G69238/1<
BR NF NF I
FlM HIN BR
I BR NF BR
HIN
I BR I NF I NF NF I FLM
HIN
HON-BATH HIN
I
FLM
HIN BATH
I BR I
BR
I
HIN I FLM HIN HON-BATH
I
COASTAL
I THIN
PLAIN
SANDLINE
= = = =
--
CLAYLINE
HON =
NO FAUNA BRACKISH FAUNA FLUVIO MARINE FAUNA HOLO MARINE INNER NERITIC FAUNA HOLO MARINE OUTER NERITIC FAUNA BATHYAL FAUNA
:t>
"0 "0 (1) ;:)
a. x' 0J
N ~
EXAMPLES
iJJ ~
Appendix 3.2.4.3.5
FAUNA
-0I
FAUNA
HIN-HMN ((FlM))
Br
-100-
HIN-HMN ((FLM))
Br
I
-200-
NF -300I
HIN (FLM)
NF
I
NF
-500-
I I
HIN (FLM)
-600HIN (FLM)
Br Br
-700-
REGRESSIVE
(fluvio) marine grading into coastal plain
SAND LINE
TRANSGRESSIVE
coastal plain grading into holomarine
--
CLAYLINE
LEGEND:
SEE APP.3.2.4.3.4
C\I
Appendix 3.2.4.4
QUICK REFERENCE
In this chapter we shall start from a given ideal dipmeter pattern and try to find structures exhibiting this pattern. In general, there exist several possible interpretations for any given dipmeter pattern. In the worst cases it may be dangerous, or at least misleading, to attempt any interpretation without other geological data. We recommend caution when there is not sufficient support by facts. The log correlation and other kind of information available to the geologist are generally nonaken into .account here. They will, however, be useful to select the right interpretation from the choice of suggested patterns. Note that in spite of established classification and for convenience we shall include: nonconformities in tectonics and disconformities in stratigraphy.
GENERAL APPROACH TO INTERPRETATION OF PATTERNS
Let us first have a look at the overall picture of the analyzed set of results and consider features in their order of importance, i.e. . . .- Change of trend - Break or continuity - Increasing-decreasing dips, incoherent dips, etc. . . . A change of trend will suggest tectonic: fold fault - non conformity differential compaction. No change of trend, i.e. a feature within a trend will suggest a stratigraphic anomaly: disconformity - channel - sand bar - foreset beds - cross bedding. ...
A change of trend associated with a break will suggest a fault or a nonconformity. Associated with continuity it will rather correspond to a fold or differential compaction. An increasing dip pattern within a trend will suggest a channel if it occurs in a sand or a sand-shale body and a sand bar if it occurs above the sand body (drape). . . . In many cases the geologist needs only confirmation of the presence of a structure, the nature of which he already knows. This confirmation and the depth of occurrence are given by this broad approach. In an unknown area the dipmeter will provide valuable information through detailed study of the patterns as shown in the following pages.
.......
II)
SCHLUMIIRGER
FUNDAMENTALS
OF DIPMETIR
INTERPRETATION
Quick
Reference
Dictionary
of Dipmeler
Paltern.
SUMMARY OF 34 PATTERNS
NO CHANGE OF TREND
SUMMARY
OF 34 PATTERNS {continued}
CHANGE OF TREND
o'
NO BREAK
o.
o.
o.
a'
o.
o.
o.
13
14
15
16
0
+<-.
,.1
-I
I
.;:
,
6 7
t-
I
8
~
\
r
17
18
~ \
.....
19
20
o.
o.
o.
~t
10
~....
....I
11 12
;I
--
..
21
22
11/8~699
G69238/.
5CHLUMIERGER
FUNDAMENTALS
Of DIPMEUR
PATTERN
1--
.
....... .".
...... ~::. ...
..
.... ...
... .. .. .. " """", .... .,D' ..., .,P'
o.
o~
PATTERN 1:
,.....
23
1\
24
I-
-I,
."
..
~..
.,D' Comments:
...
~
25 26
...
.-c" .d
~.,.
~
27
28 29
30 PATTERN 2:
PATTERN
..'
.....,;.
2
...
"0' dO""
.V: ,I
11.
I"
I -.. ..
"
"
..
;;
'r"
I I
...,
o.
'"
Comments:
~I
Macro feature and micro features can be mixed. One of the sifting methods given in Chapter 3 has to be used. Probable continental deposition.
1.
I
('
,.
1
"t..
,... ...
..
\
31 32
33
34
, r
I
-,
.
SCHLUMaERGER
FUNDAMENTALS
OF DIPMETER INTERPRETATION
Quick
Reference
Dictionary
of Dipmeter
-.
ANo or little change of major rrend. B - Section of higher dip with abour the same direction as A. - Conrinuity between rhe rrend and Section B.
.
..
PATTERN
...
..
.. ...
..,
~..
,..
f-.
" ,.. ".
".. ..... .... ~.: ..., " ~,... .. .... PATTERN 3: ;,.;.. I..
. .. .
..
PATTERN
;';": ...'
~~";
..."
..
A
PATTERN 5: ABNo change of trend. Incoherent dips.
,.
A
~"d (JQ"d
. .
'...
..
.. ...
..~.
.<>-
./:'-
~.
First Choice: Local monocline.
..
J
"
8
First Choice: Local irregular bedding. Slumping.
...
" t
I."'"
'"
,'"
Cross bedding.
. '" ...
'" <> .. ~''''
::
\Vell defined continuity between the section of higher dips and the rrend above and below will suggest a monocline. Repetition of the feature along the vertical section will suggest cross bedding.
1""...... ~...... [.;,.
Second
Choice:
Disconformity.
A
","
PATTERN
6:
A B-
not be
.: .PATTERN 6
PATTERN
~. ...
4
......
Change in quality, density and regularity of the results between upper and lower trends.
,-
PATTERN
4:
AB-
No or little change of major trend. Section of lower dips about same direction. Conrinuity between the rrend and Section B.
,-
,.
1/
/
A
~..
"...
..
....
I
"
I.""
..,. A ..
First Choice:
Disconformity.
"..
Second
Choice:
..
./
~,.
associated 'Ii
.'...
Comments:
First Choice:
Local terrace.
;
"I' ,,
't'
I
r--
..
,/
\
Second
Choice:
Cross bedding.
,
'"
:-.
"""
.
",.
..
..
Commenta:
Same as above.
' ~... ~.
A
I..
~,.
'" ...
,..
" '"
1/9(\69
G6923B/I~.
SCHLUMIIRGER
FUNDAMENTALS
OF
DIPMETER
INTERPRETATION
Quick
Reference
Dictionary
of Dipmefer
Patterns
PATTERN 7
0...... .. PATTERN 7: Variation of dip with about the same direction and with continuity. . First Choice:
PATTERN
....-c>." +-.. .... .0.. ,... :.:.. I .." " .. .' ... ..
~. ,...... .. ~,.' ... .,
~.."
..
...
.
PATTERN 9: ABNo change of trend. Decreasing dip features.
"-
. ..
..... .
A
B A
Flexutes.
Cross bedding. Diffetential compaction.
..
,;..
Choice: Comments:
Foreset
Beds.
Second Choice:
..< ~.....
....
1-
Comments:
Flexures: The trend is the average dip when the dip directions are the same. When dip ditections are changing, see Chapter 5 "Solution of folded structures" . Cross bedding: the log will show a different lithology berween the sections of higher dip and those of lower dip. (same for differential compaction).
-:
....... .....
As already stated, repeats in vertical the present case, it peat also in lateral
B A
2-
... ....
...
3-
-..c>
..
The direction of transport is to ENE. the direction of the blue patterns. Since dip trend happens to be in the same direction, it is not necessary to subtract it. Check for change of lithology at the level of the blue patterns.
r<'
B A
PATTERN 8
PATTERN 10: PATTERN 8: ABNo change of ttend. Section(s) of higher or lower dips with a constant direction (not necessarily the same as that of the trend). Lack of continuity berween ttend and feature.
10
.......
....
...
A B
Channels.
Cross bedd ing.
.,
,..
B
Second Choice:
Faults.
Disconformities. Drape above a sand bar. ~~..'" .-1
A
...
'" :t> '0 OJ '0 OQ'O (!) (1) ::3 VIP.
First Choice:
Cross bedding.
."". ."".
-..
,. B A
Comments:
Cross bedding: There is often a very good parallelism berween the sections of cross bedding.
::
Same as above. - one should look at the resistivity log to define the nature of the formation in which the featUre appears.
.'
. .
"
", ~r
",
. 'r :;
...
"'
..
A
1-'X LV N
.po. .po.
SCHLUMIIRGIR
FUNDAMINTALS
OF DI.METIR
INTlR.RETATION
Quick
Reference
Dictionary
of Olpmeter
Patterns
I-
.
,
?
,p'O
PATTERN
11
PATTERN
13
.
... ,. ~'"
"
A
.,
-..
.
...
.. ~'.' ,. ,..'.P' ...,..
.
1+... ....
,'.. ". ..
PATTERN
11:
A B-
No change of trend. Dip increasing with depth. Continuity between upper trend and feature B.
,... t+-.. .... ... ,.., ~: ,... ..4 .. ... :-1'''' .... ::r:~: -.. ,.. 1....
~to>. .. ,. ..-'
.... .... .... ""
"
..
..
.
..
'
A
PATTERN
13:
ABC -
Upper trend. Increasing dip. Lower trend about same direction, greater magnitude than A. Continuity feature. between trends and
...
I'
..
First Choice:
..
,rf
....
Channel.
Disconformity.
~..,
I ~rI"
B
".
~~.
Fault.
..... . ,I'
.'"
First Choice:
!oJ. ".". ~-,..'
If Channel: The log shows a different lithology for B. If Disconformity: B is a trough on the surface of unconformity and the log will also show different lithology. If Fault: Less likely when there is no change of trend.
'bA
Secqnd Choice:
Angular
unconformity.
~I
,I-
A
Comments:
~I
I
PATTERN
12
Fold. See Chapter 5 "Solution of folded struCtures". Angular unconformity becomes a first choice if there is a change in regularity, density or quality of the results between A and C.
..
I
-'
or'
A
I'
PATTERN
14
,
PATTERN 12: ABCNo change of trend. Increasing dip. Incoherent dips (or no results). .
.,
. ".
::-,.
.~
~I"
PATTERN 14:
ABC -
Upper trend. Decreasing dip. Lower trend about same direction and less dip than A. Continuity between trends and feature.
..
""
<>
....
..
~..
. eo<>"
First Choice:
;
~.
..
B
'..
.,.
Second Choice:
Fault. Channel.
If Sand bar: The log will show a different lithologic body for C. If Channel: The log will show a different lithologic body for B-C, C being coarser material deposited at the bottom of the channel.
B
First Choice: Concave-upward foid.
.~
Comments:
'.. "'
......
I
...
"""
,..
Second
Choice:
.
Angular unconformity.
eo: f>to-<
-,
Comments:
I
I"
Same
as above.
~" .,
~..
.....
~I
9'1/9'~69
G69238/i,
Reference
Dictionary
of Dipmeter
Patterns
PATTERN 15:
- Uppertrend.
Dip decreasing to 0. Same direction. Dip increasing from 0 . Opposite direCtion to A and B. Lower trend dipping more than A and in opposite direction. Continuity betWeen all features.
PATTERN
15
PATTERN
17
BC D First Choice:
f--. ,.
., : ..~
..
.
".. ." ...~...... ,... ... .. '" .. .' .. " ". .1
."
f--.
r-:
'"
..
.
A
f-.
..
" .. .
. . ,.... .
..
'.
."
A
I..
::-:0 Ie.
..::
"",,
1.'
.... ~~:..
..
-c>
"
I
I.
-100
..,Ie
Asymmetrical anticline.
"
~p,.
Second Choice: Differential compaction (if small difference of dip is involved betWeen A and D). :';'"
..
PATTERN 17:
Same as opposite page but the lower trend dips less than the upper trend.
~<>
B c
- ...,..
~' ....
.... ....
First Choice:
Asymmetrical
syncline.
-...0. ..
.....
~-..c:-.
8000. I
..
Second
Choice:
Differential
compaction.
~~,.
-..
... ~I.
Comments:
Fold: The lower trend dipping more than the upper trend indicates an anti-
cline. The minimum dip is 0 betWeenB and C. This means that there is no plunge.
. <>
. <>
Comments:
. ...
PATTERN 16 PATTERN 18: Same as opposite page but the lower trend di ps less than the upper trend.
O.
. <>
Same as opposite page. In this case the lower trend dipping less than the upper trend indicates a syncline.
~...
PATTERN
18
PATTERN 16:
A B-
Upper trend. Progressive shift of azimuth associated with decreasing then increasing dip. Lower trend dipping more than A and in a direction more or less (but not exactly) opposite to A. Continuity betWeen all features. ..
I..
C -
'"' .......
I ,.
.
... "'
"'
First Choice:
Asymmetrical
syncline.
" ,,
'\
... ~...
.... 'n.
...
.. ..., B
..
Second
Choice:
Differential
compaCtion.
1",-:
:.;. \
Comments:
Same as opposite page.
First Choice:
Asymmetrical
anticline.
l'
f;';f
(small dips
1'\
B
","
j
~.-.
i.
".""
..
-....
.-.
~1U't:J OQ't:J
(1) (1)
't:J
::I
Second
Choice:
Differential only).
compaction
Comments:
.....
~p..
p..
.-.
I..
..+
'.
--.10..
1-'-
Fold: The dips of B do not go to 0, Refer to Chapter 5 "Solution of folded structures". The plunge of the fold is the smallest dip of the zone of folding, i.e., 6 SSW.
~--
..
~C
VJ N .j::-.j::--
SCHLUMRUGER
FUNDAMENTALS
OF DIPMETER INTERPRETATION
0'
Dlpmeter Pattern.
PATTERN
19
..
~. ..
..
PATTERN 19: Progressive shift in direction and/or magnitude of dip.
....' I .... ,.. ,. ... ... : ~~:: ... ... .. .. . .. ..' .... '.. k: .1
',,.. ~io-': ..
. ...
. .
,... ,.. I
PATTERN 21:
A B C D -
Upper trend. Dip increasing to nearly 900 in same direction as A. Dip decreasing from nearly 900 in opposite direction to A. Lower trend in opposite direction to A. The magnitude of dip may be the same as A, smaller or greater. Continuity betWeen all features (except when the dips get near to vertica I).
.1
PATTERN
21
-.
A
'0 ;I> 111'0 (JQ'O I'D I'D :;j 000.. t-'. X W N .p.. .p..
...
Choice:
Differential Thinning compaction. out formations.
...~.
I
po
B
..
Choice:
~,.
rD'
Recumbent fold.
Flank of fold flattening or sharpening with depth. Proximity of high angle fault.
.....,..0i--
c Comments:
." ..-
Fold: The log correlation will show an inverse repetition of the lithologic sequence.
0
PATTERN 22: A B C D Upper trend. Decreasing dip to 00. Same direction as A. Incoherent dips.
PATTERN 20:
As above.)
.fo.p.
Comments:
The formations are thinning out in the same direction as the absolute dip (i.e. the dip obtained after dip trend subtraction) when the absolute dip decreases with depth. They thin out in opposite direction to the absolute dip when the absolute dip increases with depth. Differential compaction probably has no absolute direction of decrease/increase. Fold or fault. If the well does not cut the axial plane of the fold or the fault plane, the fold or the fault cannot be determined by a single DM. Several DM's are necessary.
PATTERN
20
PATTERN 22
..
..
;,.
I
"
Decreasing dip from nearly 900. Same direction as A. Lower trend. Continuity
and betWeen
...
E -
... L' ~:
....
,.. "
-........
......
betWeen A and B
D and E.
A
.. ...
"
,
'"
.....
..
...
..... ... ...
..
"'" .. ,.. ~'" .. ~. ...
First Choice:
Overturned
fold.
'.' .,
"
Second
Choice:
Angular
unconformity.
.. '...
..-' B ~..
I
~'
...
c
.
Comments:
'""
P'
"",
Fold: If E dips more than A the figure is an overturned anticline. If E dips less than A, it is an overturned syncline. Feature C would theoretically be: dip increasing from 00 to 900 in direction opposite to A - but in practice the bedding will be badly fractured and/or folded.
i'
..... .... .,
I.... -I'-.
... ..
.," ,...
I:::
l1/8"~69
G69238/13l~
Referent:t!I
Dic:tionary
of Dlpmeter
Patterns
PATTERN 23
PATTERN
25
-'
PATTERN 23:
.
/. "/
i./ .~ j!
... ..' .. ..' .... ..1+-.. .... .., p. ,".. ..- .,....
.,. .," ... ~. '..... .. ....
"
..
" ..P
-'
..
.....,.
J:1' rr
.
..
..
,. .. .
A
P
-.
....
., .
...
A
PATTERN 25:
~. ..rr rr ....
. ..
~,"
..'
...
First Choice:
'" ,/
/
..
... .. .. ... J.. "-
Second
Choice:
Fault.
Fault is improbable without a zone of distortion between A and B. Angular unconformity choice would be reinforced if there is a change of density, quality or regularity of the results between the twO trends.
A - Upper trend. B - Increasing dip feature (continuity with A). C - Lower trend - break between Band C. Fault.
Angular unconformity combined with trough or channel.
Comments:
.~ B
First Choice:
...
"
".... ...,
.... ",....
..~
'" '"
Second
~I..
Choice:
'"
-I>-
-,
.
PATTERN 24
PATTERN 24:
Comments:
A - Upper trend. B - Incoherent dips or lack of results. C - Lower trend different from A
Angular Fault. unconformity.
..
,.
,/
.. I,
.
",:
.A'
.". -..
-.
PATTERN 26: Same as above.
,~;..
I
.
.. ~.... ...,
,.. .,
/ / ..'
..
,"
..
.~
First Choice:
...
.cd
..
Comments:
The figure has been tilted. B is an "absolute red (increasing dip) pattern", as would appear after subtraction of the A trend. The real discontinuity is between Band C, not between A and B. ~I~{ ...,
Second
Choice:
Fold.
Angular unconformity: B is weathering or irregular bedding at the unconformity surface. . . .
" I ,i ,,"1\
. ",
B ~....
"d ;I> PJ"d ()Q"d
B
'"
Comments:
"
'" .
I~
~... ...
"'"
..
SCHLUM8UGER
FUNDAMENTALS
OF
DIPMETER
INTERPRETATION
Quh:k Reference
Dictionary
of Dipmetet'
Paftern.
I 4
"CI
>
PATTERN 0-.
27
PATTERN
29
IU"CI OQ"CI
.
.
.. ... .... .. .. .... ~. .,., ,.., ... ." '.a.e;o. ... ". ... '" ~... ~,...
.eoo~"
~.. .
. .
... ... ...
0-. ,.
A
..
."
.
.,.
...
'"...
... ... .. .. ...
.",.
...,
.. .. ...
'"
.. ....
ro ro ::s p. Of-'~ W
N ~ ~
."
..
'"
~~.~
PATTERN 27:
"' .. "I,
"
....
PATTERN 29:
First Choice:
Fault. Angular unconformity: truncated fold. Fault: drag below the fault plane only (rare).
'-
'-
...
.". ,...
A - Upper trend. B - Absolute dip increase (contineitywithA). C - Absolute dip decrease (continuity with D). D - Lowet trend. - Break between Band C. Fault.
A likely interpretation is a rollover fault downthrown to the west. Drag is present in the upthrown block. The fault plane dips to the west. No closure apparent in the downthrown block, which dips entirely to the ENE.
~'"
-:.
I
.....
~.."""""'
\.
\
\.
\
...
0
c
Choice: Comments: 28
\ :\
'"
PATTERN
30
....
....
.~ ..,~
PATTERN 28: Same as above but B is increasing dip instead of decreasing. However, B is an "absolute blue patrern" as would appear after subtraction of the C trend. The real discontinuity is between A and B, not between Band C.
~..
...
"
A
..
PATTERN 30: This example is similar to the one above; however, the rollover goes with closure and forms a dome-like situation in the downthrown block. Downthrown to the west. The reversal of dip azimuth at the fault plane is characteristic of rollover in those cases.
.. ~..
.'
." .~
~.
''''. .;,..
..
........
";" ...
..
,.. ..
"'~,
8 ".
...
..
~.......
---
'-
---
....
~.
",,, c
.. ... ... 0
61/8~G99
G 69238/14<:.
SCHLUMIERGER FUNDAMENTALS
0'
DIPMETER
INTERPRETATION
Quick
Reference
Didionary
of Dipmeter
Pafferns
I 4
c-.
.'
PATTERN
..,...
.., ," .... ,.. ~. .... ..... .., ... .. .... .. .,....
..
31
,.. .. .
A
f-," "..
,.
.. ~.... ..
'"
.r'
"./:
.,- . . ",,.. .. . I
.. f._. .... .- .' .
PATTERN
33
..
PATTERN 31: A B C D Upper trend. Series of red patterns. Possible high dips below each "B"' feature. Lower trend.
-.
"""'"
'.' ..
..'
... ."
...
~..
,..0.;
..
."
';';' .r'..
. j
8
,..
PATTERN
33:
\..
A - Upper trend. B - Incoherent dips. C - Blue pattern. D - Lowet trend.
Angular unconformity.
..
/
I
'" . '\ .... '"
;> It .. ...
Choice: Comments:
~I"
8
F
.." ...
c
......
The drag zone is broken into secondary faulting. The main fault lower Band C. is between the
I~ .'\
-.:
,
;.
..
"
'u
C
First Choice:
~,
32
0
Second Choice:
" "
:f". . p-..
I"I"-
0
..
....
Fault.
Angular unconfotmity: The lower part is a tcuncated fnld. "B" is irregular bedding on the unconformity surface.
""
PATTERN 34
PATTERN PATTERN 32: A B C D Upper trend. Red pattern Blue pattern Lower trend. (absolute). (absolute).
"
Comments:
-.,
.... :--
I;.
"'
A
..
PATTERN 34: Same as above. C is .m "ahsolure blue pattern" tract trend D to show this). (sub-
.. ....
".
Choice:
Comments:
The angle between the highest dips of Band C is greater than the angle between A and D.
" ,,"
~1-.
....
'f'-
8
I
"
I
/
'. -I'
1I
..
B ~C
'1j
1b'O (JQ'O
(1) (1)
",:""
1"..0-
I.. I.
.... ....
!'-.
.,.
,...0" ...-:>
,.",
~..04
~.. .. 0
r'"
."
~..".. ;.....
..
~0.. ~1-'>: W 0
N .t:.t:-
::I
....
Appendix 3.2.4.5
GAMMA 0 API
SONI C
FDC/CNL
4!5 LS PU
-I!5
porosity
only
,,'"
clay content
only
limestone,
scale
11200
have a pronounced
effect
and sonic
logs
and,
or presence
of clay
clay distribution.
Appendix 3.2.4.6.1
SOURCE
Cal.
GR
-r-
Resist.
Dens. Sonic
-r--...
.. ", ...J
..,...
Appendix
3.2.4.6.2
NOMOGRAM
FOR SOURCE
ROCK
DETECTION
ON WIRELINE
LOGS
Based on the phenomenon that source rock formations generally show a lower density, a lower sonic transit time and a higher resistivity than other sediments of equal compaction and comparable mineralogy MEYER & NEDERLOF designed a NOMOGRAM (see next page). With the aid of this nomogram it can be determined whether a pair of log readings indicates a source rock or a non-source rock.
The nomogram
is used
as follows:
First resistivity readings need to be normalised for temperature. This is done by reading the borehole temperature of the interval to be tested on the right-hand scale and connect it with a straight line with the resistivity value as read from the log on the left-hand scale. The intersection of this line with the centre resistivity scale will indicate the resistivity value at 80F. This point is then connected with the appropriate density or interval velocity value. The intersection of this .line with the classification scale will then indicate whether we are dealing with a likely source rock (organic rich) or a non-source rock (organic poor).
, ~ ~ N ~ W 0
G 69238/1~
RESISTIVITY
AT 60F
'" 80
60
ISOnl(-RE5J5TIVITY
,"1ff"HCD
tooo
OHM""
~Y-RE5/STJVITr
METHODI
!o<)oo
1000 f;O
CLASSIFICATION
1000 800
CLASSIFICATION
...,
30 sno JXJ
FOC
9/(m'
110 \M I~O I.SO
,,,
~bO
BHT .C-or
2tX1
1.r00
SONIC LOG
II'\() 10
" ! 7 1.80
170 '100 210 ') 20
180 160
~'jO 3000
llfO
IlD
150
100
Ct:
200
1'0 ,80
'230
Ct: c.n
7. ,,/
"
80
7"
bO sa
"
&0
Ct: f{' z a
'] 5""0
f'< jC :.>.!lJ
r
.. ..
100 '1" 80
"
ro
r'o
,1i'
2D
7"
60
L"
60 I~
10
S-O
"}>
NOMOGRAM
FOR SOURCE
ROCK DETECTION
and NEDERLOF,
ON WIRE LINE
LOGS
(offer MEYER
1976)
Appendix3.3.1
EXAMPLE
OF THE LITHOLOGICAL REPORT BY THE MUD LOGGER, IN THE DAILY DRILLING REPORT/TELEX
Lithology Interval: 1280 - 1420 m type 13: Dol, (arg), fxln, dkgy, hd. type 14: Lst, dol loc arg, with Wkst Tex,
off wh
(s), Itgy,
fri
13
1280-1300 m 1310 m
14 Tr 30 100 90 20
15
16
1320 m
1330-1370 m 1380 m 1390-1410 m
100 100 70 Tr
1420 m
10 80 90
10
10
! CD If) " N
en <D
'"
Appendix
3.3.2
''''''''''''''''''''''''''
..-........ ...................................
"""""""""'"
'''' """"''''''''''''''
STRATIGRAPHICAL
WELL
vertical
DATA SHEET
scale
1: 1000
..........................................................
~UJ
... II)
:G
HYDROCARBON
~INDICATIONS
E ~.......
~u..
~0 CD J: 0
>0 0 J:
~0
5: ~~~UJ
::;
a: 0 ci
Z
0 :J :J -I u u..
Z
w 0 (f)
w 0 (f)
u ~eX W a: ~~w Z 0 ~w u
eX
REMARKS
LITHOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION Z FAUNA, MINERALS, ::I SPECIAL MUD ADDITIVES, ETC. U 0 a:: Z ::I UJ
<
,"'"
,. -
4. Special Investigations
Appendix
4.1.1
ADDRESSES
Shipments
pia KSEPL Mr. D. v. Greuningen SIPM - EP/12.1 Volmerlaan 6 2288 GD Rijswijk (Z-H) Holland
and
- Samples for source rock investigations by KSEPL as below
(Z-H)
.:;:::
~
~ N en (Q ~
Appendix
4.2.1
INVESTIGATION
They may be ranked
palynomorphs.
for palynological
investigation:
Experience has shown that the following sediments are particularly suitable for palynological investigation: (a) Clay - Shale - Siltstone; (excl. the reddish, purplish, etc. see below) (b) Marl; (c) Peat - Lignite - Coal - (Oil-shale); (d) Paralic limestone - Fresh Water Limestone; (e) Sandstone and Sand, if they contain a large amount of clay or silt.
Sediments
in which
palynomorphs
are very
rare: coarse
(a) Very rapidly deposited sediments such as conglomerates, grained sandstones, breccias, and aeolian sediments. (b) All sediments formed by chemical precipitation. (c) Carbonates.
are generally
barren
or contain
only badly
preserved
(a) Sediments showing reddish, purplish, or yellowish tints, all mottled sediments and all iron enriched sediments such as ironstones, concretions, limonitic sandstones and fossil soils are generally barren, or at best contain only very badly preserved palynomorphs. They are unsuitable for palynological investigation. (b) Deeply weathered sediments, particularly when they sQow signs of lateritic weathering are barren, or contain at best only badly preserved palynomorphs. (c) Sediments in the vicinity of magmatic intrusions and extrusions such as dykes, sills and lava flows, particularly when they appear to be baked or fritted, contain only carbonized palynomorphs which are unsuitable for examination. (d) Metamorphic sediments (schists, palynological examination. gneisses, etc.) are useless for
,~ ~ ~ N ~ W
~
Appendix
4.3.1
PYROLYSIS
TEST-TUBE
METHOD
FOR DETECTION
OF
(NON POST-MATURE)
SOURCE
ROCKS
Approx. 0.5 cm3 of powdered, clean, selected cuttings is beated in a pyrex test-tube over a gas burner until it becomes red bot. During beating tbe test-tube sbould be beld in a near-borizontal position to prevent generated to flow back. If pyrolisable organic matter is present, dark brown tar will condens on tbe cooler upper part of tbe test-tube. Tbe results yield. Tbis metbod (DOM 80-85) are reported in terms as: no-, small-, good-, excellent tar
tar
of post-mature
source
rocks
,! m ~ N ~ W ~
5.
earn Work
Appendix 5.2.1
HYDROCARBON
DETECTION
INDICATIONS
IN ROCK SAMPLES
-DOES
NOT
APPLY
TO CUTTINOS
BUT
TOTAL GAS
GAS
RECORDER,
18 USEFUL -RANGES
CHROMATOGRAPH.
FROM
TO STRONO. ON CORES.
!!.M!illi.
-USEFUL -OILSERYE
OBSERVATION COLOUR
FROM THE
AND DISTRIBUTION.
- GENERALLY THE HIGHER API GRAVITY OilS TEND TOWARDS COLOURLE88 AND LOWER API
GRAVITY OILS HAVE
UP
A DARK
CLEARL
COLOUR.
Y UNDER
SHOWS - STAININO
- ETH"NE
- PROP"NE
- 180 BUT''NE
- NORM"L BUT"NE
CI C2
C3
CA
TCH Y ,LAMINA TED.E TC.) FROM CORES AND CUTTINGS RESERVOIR. OIL OF "HY
M"Y COLOUR OR "PI GR"VITY,8UT 18 LIKELY TO BE MORE OBSERVABLE AND 810NIFICANT THE LIGHTER .NEARLY 8! COLOURLESa OILS
CI5 08
OBTAINED "ND 8Y ALWAYS 80LVENTCHECK "ND
WHERE
"8a1NT.
8"MPLE8 TE8T.
IN nUOR08COPE
ACETONE A
OIL ON MUDSTREAM
OCCASIONALLY FLOATING
80ME
OIL
~
THE
RE8ERVOIR
WILL
NOT
GIVE "NO
P081T1VE "CETONE
RESULTS TE8Ta.
FROM
FLUOR08COPE,80LVENT-
ON THE
MUD.RECORD
TESTS
FLUORESCENCE UNDER UL TR" VIOLET
OCCURENCE SMALL OIL SOLVENT CUT
LIGHT
IN ROCK .UNNOTICED OIL BECAUSE .CAN LIGHT. OF THI8 TeST 18 USED TO DETECT HEAVI~A HYDROCARBONS
OF dlL QUANTITIE8
OR LIGHT UNDER
COLOURS
IN ROCK
OUT A8 FOLLOWS:
GENERALLY NATURAL
BE DETECTED FLUORESCENCE
ULTRAVIOLET
PLACE
CRuaHED
-MUD
fAEE-
ROCK
OF FRESH ROCK
.WET SAMPLE.
OR DRY
IN A TE8T
QF LIQUID SAMPLE
.OBSERVED
18 IMMERSED
- ""TIIR
'8-20
- COLOUR
NOTE: DISTINGUISH
-INTENSITY
(BRIGHT, DULL. PALE) (EVEN. SPOTTED, MOTTLED. STREAKED) OF CRUDE NOTE: THE 8AME -UNDE.. OIL) IN 80URCE ROCK 8AMPLE CAN 8E uaED LIGHTTO OBaERYE THE CUT fLUORESCENCE.
- DISTRIBUTION
FLUORESCENCE
OIL FROM
ULTRAYIOLET
REFINED PRODUCTS
"CID
MINERALS
(WILL
LUBRICANT8 TAR COATINO ON DRILLINO FLUID IN OIL-BASED MUD COLOURLES9 FLUORESCE DETECTED CONTAIN lIQHT UNDER OIL OR CONDENSATE ULTRAVIOLET PROVIDED LIGHT WILL OFTEN BUT MAY BE DOES NOT HOT IQUIP ACETONE TEST
HYDR"ULIC DISTILLATE8
PRODUCE
CUT
FLUORESCENCE)
BUT YIELD CUT
THE SAMPLE
" FLUORE8CENCE.
TEST
(10'"
HC!)
OF OIL
IS ADDED
THE CAN
- AFTER 115-20 MIN. FLUID 19 FILTERED AND EXCESS OF DISTILLED WATER ADDED TO THE FILTERED FLUID.
IF HYDROCARBONS ARE PRESENT. A MILKY WHITE
SOLUTION REACTION FAINTLY. ADHERE SURFACE. THE BUBBLE8 BUA8T AND THE CUTTINO MOTION. NOTE: WHEN
ALWAYS
OF THE
ACID
ON A CUTTINO. RELATIVELY
(ACETONE
LAROE
CUTTING
AND CAUSE
OBSERVE
DISCOLOURATIOH.
-ZERO
TO STRONO-,
TO THE
OIL
BASED
MUDS
ARE
USED- THE
REACTION
IS
WITH
A CHARACTERISTIC
BOUNCING
~ EG.382-386
6. Final Well
eport
G69238/151
STRATIGRAPHICAL
SUMMARY TABLE
ESTIMATED RESERVOIR ROCK
POTENTIAL
UNIT
LITHOLOGY
AGE
ENVIRONMENT
SOURCE ROCK
POTENTIAL
REMARKS
?(A) A
B C D E F G H I
J>
Appendix 6.4. 1. 2
TIMESTRATIGRAPHICAL SUBDIVISION
Thickness
Lower
Miocene
Danian
Upper Lower Maastrichtian Maastrichtian Campanian
Middle-Upper Lower
Lower-Middle
.
Cenomanian Albian
Middle-Upper
Albian
Intrusive (Oligocene
Rock or older)
Albian
Intrusive (Oligocene Rock or older)
Albian
Lower Albian Rock or older)
Albian
(TD)
"10 Ii)
N 0> <C (!)
Appendix 6.4.2.1
EXAMPLE OF HEADING
STRATIGRAPHIC PROGNOSIS
u.: 0
(f) ~UJ a:
I.4J
% \.L
U') ...... LLJ Z
DRilLING
PROGRESS
-8
:E
z ~..... Q. LU Q
:E ~- Z Z ::::>o
UJ CI < I
U > 0 Z a: LLJ
Z Vi u
Days 10 L ' 20 30 40 50 l 60 70 80 , 90
en UJ
lOGS
STRATIGRAPHY
...J
HYDROCARBON
INDICATIONS
D..
:::!: <t en
@
(f) t:: Z U) U (,) ICI) ...J ...J ::E Q Q w 0 m 1.L.:t:
::::>
U)
LLJ (,)
-c
Oil
GAS DIRECT FLUOR. G CUT COLOUR. CUT FLUOR.
tz UJ :E z O
:J
>CI 0 ..J ~~0 ~:J: en a::: <[ :E U) ~" z ;: ..... :> (.)
LLJ CI
<X
a:: UJ
>
Z
I-
:i
UJ a::
u ~Iu ~I,":I" u u
RESERVOIR PROPERTIES
@
POROSITY From
~0
ai en LLJ a:::
>..... ::; m ~c:[
-0
10
30
LLJ
TEMPERATURE
(CTRM corrected)
-E
gm/cc 1.9
I I I
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.'3
3.0
20
40
60
aC. ee
100
120
140
COORDINATES
ELEVATION WATER
0 F
DIP METER
DEPTH
m
en UJ 0: .... LLJ ::E % Ia.. LtJ
0
U IL&J
NI
10
15
20
25
30
35
40 ,
L&..
G69238/tM.
LOGS
RUN
DATE
INTERVAL MEASURED(m)
BIT SIZE
BHT of
MUD TYPE
c?
OPCO
's NAME
.
Finol Well Report
WELL
SCALE Author: P J.C. Hoookamer 2
NAME
1: 1000 Dote: Encl:
Draw. No:
co
LOCATION MAP I: 500.000
~
COORD: .LAT N SPUDDED
COMPLETED
LONG. E
ELEVATION D.F.
AMSL
TOTAL
DEPTH:
RIG
STATUS
~!:::
Z ::> I1J
en
en
z I- 0 z I1J IZ 0
RAY-too 1.7
.mmm"---"26"
2.7 2.95
FAUNA
z Q LITHOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
0:: II1J ~I1J 0:: Q.
t:
~en
0 Q.
~>(!)
:I: I:J
1.95
v,aml/ee
Z ::> ~U
a
REMARKS FLORA
i=
I
I
0 ~0::
9 0
I-
NEUTRON
POROSITY
SP ---------
tOO
60------------------4S--_~!!,!!.!.2EQ.'!!.__-_-----%
%-------------------------------
-t5
Appendix 6.4.2.3
fr~~
~33 3 3
""': V'.
}.~o.::-4"'V1 .. 0 .., C :) t)
'*'
>
:I ~9 . ~H :::,..
~e~;~
:H
~ss
~>H
060
!: i Q. m g-q ~~i.:!!:1 ~i~! ~~<~'i:~. ~,. a 2; ~0 C> ~t")$3 (/) ~~~i.: ~~~"~ :III"'~. :III . 0 I fR~ S .~
.."i
c>nC) ~0
:I:
m""~ ,5,8
~~~h :I: m
en
H~ . Ii
,....
:c
! ,5 p.~i
i~il
i~~i
!
:E' m , .. ,....
0< r:: ~ ~ 0
(;) ~
(') 0
ni.Pfa~ ,d
.:n
I
I: }! z
c,
::r"'::r.,.
! IS II
LJ
~; 1 !
~!:
~i \
"":.;:!;
~~~... ..
~,,~
I
~'.
~; S
I
I
~:o! ~.5
W I\)
6 ."
en
'6
MUD
W '" "'V v ~\.to)l'\I ~1 'w',~o.:.oltl~..1 P\.~I"': "'a.:r..~111 .e'-)I 'i' J~IIUI'1,,~I\..(}"1 GcI\I:!;a,'whl
DRILUNG
NB RA OB lei CB N"'''''LII 1.111 RUfun DwmLH'W bel T.,rboJCI"~ C""',,&.HI Wttl";hl ~brt RcI..11(ItI pUluP".euun,( ( !rplnl ) )
UTHOLOGY
CORES
f;-~:Umo.~~,-.
!E.r.~ roc;Ni I: ":":00Mtic WneIIOn8;
l--
_cor
U
i.1.. LIC r l Fn
L -_:s.nG
, L
V'.al~' I ~ ,':''';1 MuQ.;.M.e 111o".n, Ip;)nl, Cr oOC .:uol...nl:. h.tJt..JYt'(\p...h::f'l~ ":11 M...a I.""~II,,'I} I.~ rf)'n',; r 1 6.'..."1 1;4I..t. 10::10<::.1'.11,t..
rV..o&
RPU PP iii ,mj
CIC...t:'~'
'P8I.."n:~iJ'!
'I,;}
.. s.a ''''''
CGf8
TESTS
CST, ,c:.l n...tToQCtI
.
I
lC
.'
l~1 ~ilr..~I..:.on
7\ M~a ..
F~ ~~.o II~~
'~!
'j,1.
C:Jo J
u,.o
r"i:}j-l'::3.::lOnl-<her1
_CoII-lign<18
;--:-:u.o.
It.)~~ ,.~'.~,':;
1tI..n'fII)'
I-j
L-
L~G.-m r':t-..-..
0
J
~ c
Q "'~I
M...ag-'fl
~D- r
1111
- AAnoFml,u;&ON
rr.III.I..oI
CJ
~ ~
HYDRQC&IWOH
QGa(IICI"'.htJ
i',,,-
"1~tJ"")' "':
I..:.
'-
LITHOLOGY CUTTIHGS ..
k:.I$S .
--------
CO.C. kllal
Cart.of\al_'~. .
0 x
".---
GAl g,a.
...r._......__.......
IC.AUi 11 5QII"
.
I;
.~,.-*-!
III U
. _12W
. ::t
i
"---""'.
'V'><".,
1'aC.8I00CWponc,......
i -
-~....
Son7uonrt 1niMWit. poot...
StYiIt 8'*pr,tOlIUIc1.
..IOfteG.{/IIOOI~~
..,.,
"""""'"' ",10--, ~
no Ia.G
bllllflO
p,)rQMy.
i ..
'"
.
i
i .-
...-- -...
.1
"CD .... N m (!)
EG.356
\J
ROCK-
STRATIGRAPHICAL
SUBDIVISION
---~
n.
,--.e-. ~
-~I
i
-
i,
011
G) 01 II) N 8: ....
g ""
..
,~,
- -------... -
~'t"(!
-
--
----
.. -
041
...r~j
-~---~-
I
!
-----_.--
~~~
;'i,
iNTERPRETED
~%
----c--
-..'--
--
- -- +-
t
.--
"
.:
--I
~
------------.
LITHOLOGICAL
COLUMN
t.
[:"..,,~
.... (")
MJ..,;J-
~~t~u.-+,
-- ~--t--7"
r
--
---
:~--
-i-".~'
I II
I
I
i-ji
!-~~
(
,
I !
I
..
m :I: n VI
-;~~~i
-
*
!
i
g
--l--~-=l
0 '
f;
:;
DEPTH IN METRES
CORE/SiDEWALL SAMPLE DEPTH IN METRES
IT1 X ]>
,
. .'.
.,.
"
>d:id
t--
s::
'1J
-;-'-+--~+4 .. ..
~~ ..=.,
e
,~1.~..-;. -~."~. ~
l _I -
r IT1 0
"TI
_,I I +,.
,
-t-11 j tj--~-r-i i '_-lL_" -:;"'1 -1 "-[ "~ -,o i ' l \t..c, , H~ " ,i --,j .4~ i 1 j ;.; . ~ l -;. ' ~- ~i . 1 l >- -~ f
l
';
:Ii
LTl-i
t
-.
J :
'i
\ " I
'
~:o..~~
_i':"' -+--', --
,-,
;
;-~1H' ;-
~+~
"
I .-j-
t
'
jp
..J,--+-.t--t--;...+;-t-f-I--~.+; "~j-,,,,tl;IC-"I't;r
t I
!
lt
i
1
-4
---,
j-'
PLANKTONIC
0 ::c
G') 1> Z (1 ("') 0 ~ "'tI 0 Z fTI Z (j) ~
.-~:J,_I:::
-'
I :i ;
.
'
;
,
: I
t i
,
!"'
--1+
I , ' . :-+_Lt--~t-I'+-r--t++:
-L-' -1
n ir :
+ tiH-t- ,
,
r'~
-il' : . -';'
' I
~~~ci-~~Ca~~~~~~~T~ORAMIN'FERA
G>
~~t..ARIA prTHONELLA INOCERAMUS OVALIS I'"RAGMENTS GASTROPOQA
I ,~
'+--H--t-;--hnfi
I I++!
I I
t
I
~ In
i
Lt
'-I
tt-i
-:
I
I ~
, -~ -;,
':
.1 j
~
T : I
I I I
-- -
-.
0
U)
Tr-'i~-r-I;
i
~:r: >rO r 0
Ht
t-fll
--r--
-i
!::!]>
_~I
~(j)
I~
fTI ,... I"! ("') -I rT1 0 "'T1 0 ::c J> ~Z :; f'T1 ::0 t:> 0 Z
..
I I
I I I I
~ J>
(J)
I I
(")
.
I I I I I I I ! i I I I I I I I Ii I I I I ! : I I I ~1 I I i I
-I
i
I
.,
i : ,
.
..
I :
. .0 "
0
~,,;J -;AMPl::S
RECOVERED
REMARKS
c.
.;
UPPER EOCENE
~.;;
OLIGOCENE
L. ,::>
Z 1)
CALCAREOUS
NANNO-PLANKTON
ZONATION
I AGE INTERPR.
~I
UP P['R
I
0 L I G 0 C E N E
M I OC ENE
LOWEFt
I
upper slope
TIME- STRATIGRAPHICAL
ENVIRONMENT
SUBDIVISION
.,pen
marine,
outer
shelf
OF DEPOSITiON
1iG'17'9 )qpuadd'l;1
Append ix 6.4.2.5
T-Z GRAPH
C'aio\.DC'.\cJ\L.
\.0(;,
"HE
l\ ~",)
~ \.0
o.
'\
links the
a geologica~ 1 way
,
'\ .
....
~.
reflection
time.
'-I~
1t-\
%
to~ Y.i Q
..
l~"EC~ ~~)
'NfUIIo","18 T',,!S
The
information recorded
comes from
check in the
..
.~ /
~a.aG
so.."
I.cG OM'A
..
0.
~
'
is used between
O~3~c,."t
"
..
0 0
1.0. .~ %.
~,!.
"
r ....
ALOQTf
WELL SURVEY
The well geophone to the time geophone is desired between lowered depth. the source
by
is measured.
---A, I .
~o (
~~
c:;eo"'OM~ ')
~e.u.
GEO~ONE ~
>
) ,."'"","",. "'He.
I'-
II) "It) N
0\ CQ C!I
EG. 743
7. Abbreviations
Appendix
7.1
ABBREVIATIONS
FOR LITHOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTIONS
NOTE
Abbreviations are presented in "informal-abbreviations" and after oblique (/) "computer-coding", e.g. for siltstone: Slst / ST. For a more detailed list of "computer-codingsll reference made to Appendix 7.2. Adhere
.
the
rules: The same abbreviation is used for a noun and the corresponding adjective. However, nouns begin with a capital letter, adjectives and adverbs with a small letter. No distinction is made between of the singular and the plural the abbreviation of a noun. except where
Initial
of Abbreviations
. Singular
and Plural
. Fullstops
(.)
. Comma
(,)
Used after a group of abbreviations to indicate the end of .the group Example sandstone, grey, hard, coarse grained, ferruginous: Sst, gy, hd, crs, fe Used to separate various types of rocks in one description, e.g. when the main rock is intercalated with other components Example shale, brown, soft, with sand layers, fine grained glauconitic: Sh, brn, soft; S Lyr, f, glc Used to indicate the range of a characteristic Example fine to medium, grey to dark grey:
Semi-colon (;)
Dash
(-)
f
.
m, gy
dk gy
Plus
(+)
Plus-minus
Used as the abbreviation for "more or less" or "approximate" Example shale with approximately 25% sand: Sh t 25% S of an abbreviation is used to indicate emphasis
Underlining
Examples
s bd srt
or
Brackets
Used to indicate diminutive adjectives adverbs and indefinite colours Examples slightly sandy: (s) bluish grey: (bl) gy
Appendix
7.1
page 2
For descriptions on drawings it is advisable to use symbols for sedimentary features/structures. fossils and carbonate particles. e.g. bioturbated benthonic foraminiferal pelletoidal Lime Packstone becomes: Pkst,~~~ (see Tapeworm. Appendix 3.2.1.2).
abd
Ag/. . A
Aggr, aggr/AG Alg, alg/AG Altrn, altrn
and
angular anhydrite (-ic) anthracite aphanitic approximate aragonite arenaceous argillaceous arkose (-ic) as above asphalt (-ic) assemblage associated basalt (-ic) basement bed (-ed) belemnites benthonic
calcisphere calcite (-ic) calcareous carbonaceous cast cavern (-ous) cement (-ed) chalk (-y) charophytes chert (-y) chitinozoa chlorite (-ic) chocolate clastic
Calsph/OG Calc. calctc/CA calc/LS carb/CO Cs/X.. * Cav, cav/CV Cmt. cmt/C5 * Chk, chk/CK Char /CR Cht, cht/CT Chtz/CZ Chlor, chlor/CI
elay
claystone
Assem assoc
Ba, ba/EXBS
cobble
colour (-ed) common compact complex
Bm
Bd, bd/B. BI-B9
Blm/BE
bent/.
choc clast Cl/CL Clst/MS Clus c/CO crs/C Coat. coat/..CO Cbl/CB Col, col corn cpct Cx/CX
.B
. .
bimodal
bioelast (-ic) biotite bioturbation(-ed) birdseye bitumen (-inous) bivalves
Biot/BI
Biotur, biotur/CB Bdeye/BY Bit. bit/BT
Cone, conc/CC* concretion (-ary) conglomerate (-ic) Cgl. cgl/CG connected Vugs Vug c/Y conodonts Con/CD consolidated cons/CI-C3-C7* contamination (-ed) Contam. contam content Cont contorted bedding cont-bd/BS convolute bedding Conv-bd/BV Coq, coqid coquina (-aid) corals Cor/CR crinkled bedding crink-bd/BZ crinoids Crin/CS cross x cross-bedded x-bd/BX cross-laminated x-lam cross-stratified x-strat crypto crypto/CY crystal (-line) Xl, xln/XA, X cutting Ctg
See Appendices
3.2.1.2
and 7.2
G) Q) \0
f\:J 01 CD
Ut " \0
Appendix
7.1
page 3
diabase
diagenesis (-etic) diatoms dinoflagellates disconnected vugs ditto dolomite (-ic)
grainstone
granite
granule (-ar) grapes tone graptolites
gravel
gray, grey
Diat/DT
green
grey, gray greywacke gypsum (-iferous)
Grst/G Gr/INGN Gran, gran/GR Gpst/PSAG Grap/GP Grv/GV gy/GE gn/GN gy/GE Gwke/GK
Gyp, gyp/GY
drusy
echinoids elongate embedded equivalent
dru Ecb/EM
elong/02*
hackly hard
-heterogenous homogenous horizontal hornblende hydrocarbon igneous rock,
euxinic
evaporite (-itic) extremely extrusive rock, extrusive
extr
Ex, ex/EX
faecal pellet Pel,fae/PTFE FIt, flt fault (-ed) feature Feat feet Ft feldspar (-athic) Fld, fld/FD Fen, fen fenestra (-al) ferruginous fe/FG fine (-ly) f/F fish remains Fish Rem/FH fissile fis/FI flaggy flg/FY flake, flaky Flk, flk/FK fluorescence (-ent) Fluor, fluor foot Ft foraminifera Foram, foram/FF* foraminiferal formation Fm/FM Foss, foss/F* fossil (-iferous) Frac, frac/FC fracture (-d) Frag, frag fragment (-al) frequent freq friable fri/C3 frosted fros fusulinids Fus gabbro gastropods generally glauconite (-itic) gneiss (-ic) graded bedding grain (-ed)
v "CD tt) C\J 0>
ItJ (!)
intersticies(-itial)Intst,
Intv Intclas, intclas/IT Intraxln/VX intragran/VR intrapar intraskel/VS In, in/IN Invrtb Fest /FG irr or irg
Jt, jt/J Kao, kao/KL
kaolinite
* See Appendices
3.2.1.2
and 7.2
Appendix
7.1
page 4 large
laterite (-itic) layer (-ed) leached lens, lenticular
light
lignite (-itic) limestone limonite (-itic) lineation (-ed) lithic lithoclast lithology (-ic)
lrg Lat, lat/LA Lyr, lyr/LY leach/LE Len, len/LN It/LT Lig, lig/LG
nannoplankton nodules (-ar) no sample numerous occasional occurrence olistolith (-ic) olistostrome (-ic) *
Lst/LS
Lmn, Lin, Imn/FG lin/Y..
lit/LC
Lcl, lcl/LC Lith, lith
olive olivine
onkoid 2 mm)(-al) onkoid (>2 mm)(-al) ooid (-al) oolite (-itic) orange organic orthoclase ostracod overgrowth crystalline packstone
marine massive
material
papery
part (-ly) particle patch (-y) pebble (-y) pelagic pelecypods pellet, faecal pelletoid (-al) permeability(-able) phosphate (-atic) phyllite, phyllitic
Pkst/P pap/PR
Part, part/PA Par, par Pch, pch Pbl, pbl/PB
pelg/PE
Pelcp/LB Pel, fae / PTFE Peld, peld/PT Perm, perm/K1-K7* Phos, phos/PP Phy, phy/MMPY
micrxln
Micrfoss, micrfoss
micrgrn
Micrpeld?micrpeld/
PM Mpl/MP
Micrpor, micrpor
pink
pisoid (-al) pitted plagioclase plant remains porcelaneous porosity, porous possible (-ly) predominant (-ly) preserved
pk/PK
Piso, piso/PD
Micrspr
Micrstyl
middle
mineral (-ized) moderate molluscs montmorillonite mottled mudcrack mudstone (carbonates) mudstone (siliciclastics)" muscovite (-ic)
porcel
Por, 0, por/P1-P7
primary
Mdst/M
.Mdst/MS purple Musc, musc/MV
probable (-ly) pseudopseudooid (-tic) Psoo, psoo/PS pu or purp/PU pyrite(-tized,-itic)Pyr, pyr/PY pyroxene Px/PX
and 7.2
G) en ID N 01 CD ..... en -
Appendix
7.1
page 5
quartz (-ose) quartzite (-ic) radiolaria rauhwacke recemented recov~ry (-ered) recrystallized
Rad/RA
Rauhw/RH
recmt
Rec, rec
red remains
replaced (-ment) residue (-ual) ripple (-ed) rockfragment (lithoc1ast) round (-ed) rudist salt /-y) same as above
rex red/RE Rem repl, Repl/RP Res, res/RS Rpl, rpl/Z..* Lc1/LC *
rnd, rnd/R4-R6 Rud/RD
Salt, salt / SL
stain (-ed), -ing) stalactitic strata (-Hied) streak (-ed, -y) striae (-ted) stringer stromatolite(-itic) stromatoporoid strongly structure stylolite (-itic) sub angular sublithic subrounded sucrosic sulphur, sulphurous superficial oolite
Stn, stn stal Strat, strat Strk, strk/SR Stri, stri Strgr Stromlt, stromlt Strom/SM indicated by underlining Struc Styl, styl/SE (ang) / R3
(lit)
(rnd) / R4
suc/S
Su, su/SU 00, spf, spf-oo/OD
(-ic)
supergroup
a.a.
surface
texture (-d)
Supgr Srf/SF
Tex, tex
sample
sand (-y) sandstone saturation (-ated) scattered schist (-ose) sediment (-ary) selenite shale (-ly) siderite (-itic) sidewall sample silica (-iceous) silt (-y) siltstone similar skeletal slate (-y) slickenside (-d) slightly slump (-ed) small smooth solution, soluble sorted (-ing) sparry speckled spherical spicule (-ar) splintery sporomorphs spotted (-y)
Spl
S, s / SA
Sst/SS
Sat, sat
scat
Sch, sch/MMSC Sed, sed Sel/GX Sh, shisH Sid, sid/SD SWS/SWS Sil, sil/SI Slt, slt/SJ Sltst/ST
tongue trace
translucent transparent trilobites tuff (-aceous) turbidite (-ic) type (-ical) unbedded unconformity(-ably) unconsolidated unimodal
sim skel Sl, sl Sks, sks/SK add brackets (..) Slump, slump/.S sml sm vadose Sol, sol/SX srt, Srt/Sl-S9 * spar speck
sph/05 * Spic, spic/SP
unbd
Unconf,unconf
uncons
unimod/..U
upper
Vad, vad variations (able) variegated varve (-d) vein (-ing, -ed) veinlet vertebrates vertical
u or up
Var,
var
or vr
vgt/VM
Varv, varv/VV Vn, vn/VN
splin Spr/PN
sptd, spty
very violet
vi
*
N $!
.....
and
7.2
co I<) N en q)
c:>
Appendix
7.1
page 6 visible
(-Hied) vitreous volcanic rock, volcanic vug (-gy)
Wkst/W wk
weath/WT
Wdg/WD
indicated wh/~,m Wd, si/SW by underlining/repeat code
well white
wood, yellow silicified (ish)
yel/YE
and 7.2
1,;') en <D I\) a> '" "Ci '"
.2
egeo Codes
REGEO
CODES
FOR LImOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTIONS OM DA DL DO OY
Ev CE Ex
Appendix
7.2
(July
1975)
3.2.1.22)
page 1
-DOLO~ITE -DOLO~IT~-ANHYORITE MIXED -OOLO~ITE-LIMESTnNE/OOLOMITIC LIMESTONE -OO~ES (LITHC QUALIFIER ONLY) -DyKE -EVAPORITF/EVAPOAITIC -EVAPORITES-CARBONATES -EXTRUSIVE ROCK
MAIN LITHOTYPE
MAIN LITHOTYPEIGDOI 61-62.71-72 AND GDOl 27-28 TwO QUA~IFIERSIGDOI 63-66.73-76 AND GD02 29-)l CAUTION'
MIxED
-----.--------------------------NOUNILIMESTONE/CLAY)-MAIN LITHO
-ADJECTIVE
UNLESS
SPECIFIED
OTHERWISE.SAME
CODE FORI
TYPE (CALCAREOUS/ARGILLACEOUS)-QUALIFIER
EXAMPLEISSlSST
- CALCAREOUS.SILTY SANDSTONE LSPT8 PELLETAL lST C EV-CARBONATE/EVAPORITIC DMCT-nOLOMITf/CHERTY DLAH-OOL.-LIMESTONE/ANHYDRITIC SHBT-SHALE/BITUMINOUS BTSR. BITUMINOUS STREAKS CTBA.RANDED CHERT LSCTBA8LIMESTONE/CHERT BANDS
FE FD FZ FG FT FI FY FK FF F FC
-FAECAL PELLETS -FELDSPAR -FERRICRETE -FERRUGINOUS/IRONSTONE/LIMONITE -FETID -FISSILE -FLAGGY BEDDED -FLAKY -FORAMINIFERAL -FOSSILIFEROUS -FRACTURED
AN -ANDESITE AM -ANHYORITF. AHCW-ANHYD.CONCRETIONS-COMPRESSEDICHICKEN-WIRE) DA -ANHYDRITE-DOLOMITE MIxED AR -ARAGONITE CL -ARGILLACEOUS/CLAY Al -ARGILLACEOUS LIMESTONE AS -ARGILLACEOUS SAND/SANDSTONE AK -ARKOSt. AE -ASBESTOS AP -ASPHALT BA -BANDS BS -BASALTIMAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) SF -BIOCLASTIC/DETRITAL/SHELL FRAGMENTS BI -BIOTITE ILITHO QUALIFIER ONLY) CB -BIOTURBATED/CHURNED By -BIRDSEYE STRUCTURE/KEYSTONE VUGS BI -BISCHOFITE IMAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) BT -BITU~lNOUS BK -BLACK BQ -BLOCKY Bl -BLUE BO -BORINGS SFBO-80RED SURFACE IIN RtMARKS ONLY) BN -BOUOINAGF RH -BOX WORK STRUCTUR/RAUHWACKE
8R -BRECC Bioi -BROWN lr, -BROWN IA COAL/lIGNITE
G6 -GABBRO GC -GLAUCON lTE GS -GNEISS GO -GOLD GN -GRANITE (M6IN PSAG-GRAPESTONE GV -GRAVEL GN -GREE~ GE -GREY GK -GREYWACKE GU -"GRUMELEUXM GY -GyPSUM ,NA HM HE HO HT
LITHOTYPE
ONL Y)
IG IL IC IT IN FG
J
KA KL By KI
-KAINITE -K60UNnF
-KEYSTONE VUGS/BIADSEYE -KIESERITf: STRUCTURE
8F BU LS CA CS CO CE OC C CN
-BUFF -BURROwS
-CALCAREOUS/LIMESTONE
-CALC
LM
LA
-LAMINATIO~S
-LA TEA IfE
IfE
-CALICHE -CARBONACEOuS/COAL -CARBONATf'S-EvAPORITES MIXED -CARRONAT~S-OHGANIC ROCKS MIXED -CARAONATFS UhSPECIFIED -CARNALLITE C.V -CAvERNOUS C'I' -CHALCEOO"'Y CK -CHALK CT -CHERT CI -CHLORITE CB -CHURhED/~IOTURBATED CL -CLAY/ ARGILLACEOUS MS -CLAYSTONE/MUDSTONE CO -COAL/CARBONACEOUS CO -COATED -USE ONLY wITH FOSSILS EG.FLCO
LE -LEAC~ED LN -LEhSES/LF~TICULAA LT -LIGHT LG -LIGNITE/RROW~ COAL LS -LIMESTONF/CALCAAEOUS 6L -LI~ESTONr.ARGILLACEOUS DL -LI~ESTONE-DOLOMITE MIXED/DOL.LIMEST. SC -LI~ESTONF.SANDY (MAIN LITHO.ONLY) LM -UNCONSOL.LIM~(CALC.OOZE) IMAIN LITH.ONLY) FG -LI~ONITE/IAO~STONE/FERAUGINOUS LC -LITMIC/LTTHOCLAST/ROCKFRAGMENT LCAG-LITHOCLASTS.AGGREGATED
KM
Mlli
-MAGNESIU~.POTASSIUM
-MAI'4GANESE
SALTS
IN GENERAL
CC CG Cu FE CY XA
-COlloCRET-IONS -COI'4GLOMERATE
"II)
I') N C1> CD C)
'"
OK -DARK SF -DETRITAL/BIOCLASTIC/SHELL FRAGMENTS DR -DUBASF 01 -D lOR ITE DO -DOLERITE (~AIN LITHOTYPE ONLY)
MA OL MM MC MG M MD MO VM MS MV HK NO NO
-~IXED
ROCK
IUNSPECIFIED)
-NICKEL
-~OOULES/NODULAR -~OT OBSERVEDIINFO.IHCOMPLETE/ABSENT
OM -OLISTOLITH/SLIDF/ROCKFALL OL -OLISTOSTROME I MASS FLOW 01 -OLIVE OV -OLlV INE OK -ONKOIDAL 00 -OOID/OOLITIC/OOIDAL OZ -OOZE OA -OPAL OFt -OPHIOLITf/OPHIOLITE SUITE OT -OPHITIC ON -ORANGE 0 -ORGANIC ROCKS UNSPECIFIED OC -ORGANIC ROCK.CARBONATfSIMIXEOI OS -ORGANIC ROCK-SILICICLASTICSIMIXEDI SEOS.IMIXEOI 01'4 -ORGANIC ROCK-UNSPECIFYEO OR -ORTHOCLASE PR PA PE PT PM PR PK PO PP PG P PH PC KM Dv PU PY YC PX -PAPERY -PARTLY.LOCALLY -PEAT -PELLETAL/PELLETOIO/PELLETSIltI6-2 1'41'41 -MICROPELLETOIOI<I/16 MMI -PERIDOTITE IMAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) -PINK pI SOlO -PISOLITIC. -PHOSPHATf/PHOSPHATIC -PLAGIOCLASE -PLUTONIC -POLYHALITE -PORPHYR IT IC -POTASSIUM.MAGNESIUM SALTS IN GENERAL -PULL-APART STRUCTURES -PURPLE -PYR ITE/PYR I TIC -PYROCLASTIC ROCK IN GENERAL -PYROXENE
LAYFJ:1S
Appendix page 2
7.2
ZE
ZEOL I TIC
BEDDINGI
BI -NO APPARENT BEDDING/MASSIVE B3 -SLIGHTLY IPOORLY) BEDDED B5 -FAIRLY WELL BEDDED/BEDDED B7 -wELL BEDDED B9 -VERY wELL BEDDED NOTE I MASSIVE-SLIGHTLY BEDDED-B2 BB BC BD BM B.J BH BY
CH.)
BEDDED
ex
BG BS SED.STRUCTURESIXF XG XL XP XS xC XM XI XN XO XR XX XT YF YP YR YL yQ YS
-VARIABLY BEDDED -CONVOLUTE BEDDING -CROSS-BEDDED -GRADED BEDDING -SLUMPED.CONTORTED -FLUTE -LOAD -PROD CASTS
12
-GROOVE CASTS
CASTS CASTS/BOUNCE
az aT
-QUART!.
-QUARTZITF LINEATIONS I
RA -RADIOLARITE RH -RAUHWACK~/BOXWORK STRUCTURE RE -REO RB -REO BEDS RP -REPLACEMENT RS -RESIDUAL Rw -REIIORI<EU RL -RHYOLITE LC -ROCK FRAGMENT/LYTHOCLAST/LITHIC OH -ROCK'ALL/SLIDE/OLISTOLITH RT -ROOT BED/ROOT TUBES PS -ROUNDED PART.ICLES PSAG-ROUNOED.AGGREGATED PTLS.IGRAPESTONEI SL SA SS AS SC SC SN SH SF SO SI S OS SZ ST SY SK OH SX SR SQ SE SU SY TV TA TI TF UM UR
>.I
"II:) t<) N 0> CD C>
ROUNDINGI
RI RZ R3 R4 R5 R&
01 02 03 04 05 06
-VERY ANGULAR <0.1 -ANGULAR 0.2 -C;U8ANGULAR 0.3 -SUBROUNDED 0.. -ROUNDED 0.6 -WELL ROUNDED >0.85 -VERY ELONGATED <0.5 -FLONGATED 0.5-0.6 -SLIGHTLY ELONGATED 0.6-0.7 -ALHOST SPHERICAL 0.7-0.8 -5PHERICAL 0.8-0.9 -VERY SPHERICAL >0.9
-SALT IN r,ENERAL -SAI'4D/SANnY -SANDSTONE -SAI'4D/SANnSTO~E.ARGILLACEOuS -SAI'4DY LIMESTONE IHAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) -SCOUR-FILL STRUCTURES -SERPENTINE -SHALE -SHELL FRAGMENTS/BIOCLASTIC/DETRITAL -SIDERITE/SIDERITIC -SILlCEOUS -SILICICLASTIC RnCI< UNSPECIFIED -SILICICLASTICS-ORGANIC ROCKS MIXED -SILCRETE, -SILT/SILTSTOI'fE -SLABBY -SLl CKENS IDES -SLIDE/ROCKFALL/nLISTOLITH -SOLUTION -STREAKS -STROMOTACTIS -STYLOLYTI:S -SULPHUR -SYLVINITf' -TACHYDRITE -TAR -T ILLITE
SPHER IC ITY I
SORTIhG I
NOTE I
PERMEAB III TY I
-VERY POORLY SORTED/UNSORTED -POORLY SORTED -MODERATELY WELL SDRTED -WELL SORTED -VERY wELL SORTED POORLY-FAIRLYWELL SORTED. 54
SI
S3 S5 S7 S9 KI
K3
NOTE I
POROS I TY I
PI P3 PS P1
Cl C3 C5 C1
-NON-POROUS/DENSE -SLIGHTLY IPOORLY) POROUS -FAIRLY POROUS/POROUS -HIGHLY POROUS -UNCONSOLIDATED/LOOSE -SLIGHTLY CONSOLIDATED/FRIABLE -CONSOLIDATED/CEMENTED/HARD -STRONGLY CEHENTED/HIGHLY CONSOL. IE.G. QUARTZITIC SANDSTONE)
CONSOLIDATIONI ICEMENTATION)
-Tun
-ULTRAMAfTC
-UJ:1ANIuM
ROCK
IN GEI'4ERAL
Viol VV VN VA V YG
Appendix
7.2
page 3
FOSSILS (CAN RE RECORDED AS LITHO QUALIFIERS USING THE FnLLOWING CODES OR IN GD REMARKS USING CODE OR FULL NAME)
TEXTURE
-------
(GDOI 67-68,77-7A
DUNHAM CLASSIFICATION
B G P W M A X S
GR -GASTROPODS GP -GRAPTOLITES LB MP MI ML NC NP OG OC
PL PN RA RT RD SF Sw SP SG SM TR TL -LAMELLI8RANCHS/PELECYPODS -MICROPLANKTON -MILIOLIDAE -MOLLUSCA -NANNOCONUS -NANNOPLANKTON -OLlGOSTEGINA -OSTRACODA
-PLANT RE"'AINS -POLLEN/SPORES/SPOROMORPHS
WENhORTH
CLASSIFICATION
IN GENERAL
BO -BOULDERS CB -COBBLES PR -PEBBLES GR -GRANUL.E R -vERY COARSE (ARENITE) C -COARSE (ARENITE) MC -MEDIUM TO COARSE (ARENITE)
"I "IF
F V ST PI
TUBES
-SHELL FRAGMENTS/SKELETAL/BIOCLASTIC -SILICIFIED WOOD -SPICULES -SPONGlS -STROMATOPOROID / STROMATOLITE / ALGAL MAT -TRACK,TRAIL,TRACE FOSSIL -TRILOBITES -VERTEBRATES -VERTEBRATE TRACKS
VE VT
3.2.1.22)
STANDARD ABRREVIATIONS FOR DESCRIPTION OF LITHOLOGICAL REAL.M -----------------------------------------------------------IF NO DETAILED INFORMATION IS AVAILABL.E,ONL.Y THE REAL.M OR PROVINCE CAN BE DESCRIBED (GOOI 61-64) SEDIMENTARY ,
-FILL I~ R
REALM
LEAVE
(REGIONAL. INFORMATION)
GD01 CC 64 BL.ANK
IN GoOl CC 63
GDOI CC 61-62 5 C E
"I
MAIN
LITHOLOGIC
PROvINCES,
S,C.E,
ARE
PRESENT)
w
.......
-VOLCANIC
co
C\J '" 0> CD (!)
EXAMPLE
------Sv -MAINLY
VE
/01 V
SILICICLASTICS/ SOME VOLCANICS -VOLCANIC~/ SOME EVAPORITES. -"'IXED PRnvINCE/ SOME VOLCANICS
Appendix
7.3
ABBREVIATIONS
COMMONLY
sealevel
Annulus
American Barrels Barrels Below Petroleum per day per day derrick floor Institute
Bottom hole assembly Bottom hole pressure Bottom hole temperature Barrels of liquid per day Below mean sealevel
Explosive Bottom Blowout Bridge Barrels Barrels service (back-off)
valve
plus water
in bottom
hole
pressure
pressure
Appendix
7.3
page 2
CL CON Compl CP CPI CPS Csg CBHP CBHT CST CSU CT CTHP CTHT
cuft (eft)
Control Clean
Casing
Closed Closed Core Cyber Cbeck Closed Closed Cubic Drill Deptb in bottom in bottom taker unit (Computerised logging unit) bole bole pressure temperature
bead bead
pressure temperature
off section
of energy of transport
Expected
F F & BU
FBHP FBHT FL FLP
Flowing
Flowing Flowing Flowing Fluid and closed bole bole in pressure pressure temperature build up survey
Flowline Free
pressure indicator tester temperature tubing tubing bead bead pressure temperature
FPI FT
FT FTHP
FTHT FWL
point
Free water
level
G\ 01 \0 N UI a> ...... m a>
Appendix
7.3
page 3
GIP GL
GLR GOC
Gas oil contract Gas oil ratio Gross rock volume survey temperature contact logging survey
GaR GRV GS
GTS GWC HEL HHP HUD HWC ID IPR JB KOP LCM LNG LOT LPG MAASP MD MMSCT/D MSCF/D
environment horsepower
up depth
true/apparent
bottom)
water
(inside) performance
relationship
annular
standard standard
cubic
"
"
"
"
MSL MV
MWD NB NGL
OB~f
Measurement
New bit
Natural gas liquids
mud
aD ODT
diameter to
back
Appendix
7.3
page 4
POR P~S PPM PSI PT PTWC PV PVT RFT RIR RKB ROP ROS RPM RRB RT RT RTTS SBM SDT SP SRD SS SW SWS STOUP
Pull(ed)
Production Permanent
Rotary Rate
reference
datum
Sub sea
Sea water Sidewall Stock samples oil initially in place
tank
TBA TBG
TC TD
To be advised
Tubing
Time Total Trip constant depth gas head head pressure spool
Tubing Tubing
Appendix
7.3
page 5
TVBDF TVD
True
vertical
derrick
floor
manifold
Valve
Water Water Well Well Well based cut completion head head pressure or water blowout formation loss prevent or test mud
Wire line Wireline Wireline Workover Waiting Waiting Water/oil Waiting Well
WOW WST
shoot
WUT
Water up to
(!)
...... CD I') N 0\ (0
;::
Appendix
7.4
ABBREVIATIONS
OF WIRELINE
LOGS/TOOLS/PROGRAMS
Abbrev.
Name
Borehole Geometry Log Borehole Geometry Tool Bore Hole Compensated sonic Bore Hole Compensated Amplitude log Bore Hole Tele Viewer Bond Index Quick Look (= 'CYBERBOND', see below) Borehole compensated Sonic Log - Gammaray - Caliper Caliper log Cement Bond Log Casing Collar Locator Continuous Dip Meter Continuous DiRectional survey - Borehole Cement Evaluation Tool Continuous Flow Meter Computed Gamma Ray CHlorine Log Computer program for dip computation Circumferential Micro Sonic Circumferential Microsonic Tool Compensated Neutron Log Compensated Neutron
C or CAL
CBL CCL CDM CDR-BG CET CFM CGR CHL CLUSTER CMS CMT CNL
CNT(CNTA,CNTD)
Geometry
(Deviation)
CNT-G CO
CORIBAND
service BOND
IF
CYBERLOOK CYBERSCAN
Carbon-Oxygen log (water saturation logging tool) Interpretation process for complex lithology Computer Processed Interpretation Core Sample Taker (sidewall coring) Cyber Service Unit (computerised logging unit) unit = Computerised logging unit Well-site cement bond evaluation program (=BIQL) Well-site dip evaluation program Well-site formation evaluation program (=DWQL) Well-site evaluation program using TDT data Diamond Core Slicer Depth Derived BHC Caliper logging Dual Induction Focused Log Dual Induction Log (medium + deep) Dual Induction Spherically focused Dual Latero Log (shallow + deep) DiRectional survey DIP evaluation program using SHDT data Dual Water Quick Look (=CYBERLOOK, see Temperature logging Electric Log Well-site moved oil evaluation program Epithermal Neutron (or sidewall neutron Electromagnetic Propagation Tool Electrical Survey Electromagnetic Thickness Tool
DIS
DLL(DLT,DST)
above)
porosity
log)
CZ) I<)
N !B C)
Appendix
7.4
page 2
Abbrev.
FACIOLOG
Name
Interpretation (process for determination Formation Analysis Log (Flow Analyis Log) Formation Density (Log) Compensated Focused Dip Meter Fracture Identification Log Formation Interval Tester Continuous FLow meter Formation Multi Tester Free Point Indicator Formation Testing (Tool) Gamma Ray log
-
of electrofacies)
FAL
FDC (FDL)
FT(T)
G or GR GASL GCL GCT GEODIP GLOGRAM GEOBAL GMA GNT GR(L) GRN GST GTT
GAS Log
Gamma ray Casing collar Locator
Guidance Continuous Tool (Gyro-Deviation) Computer program for detailed dip computation Computer program for generating synthetic seismograms Interpretation process for formation evaluation Gradio Manometer survey Gamma ray Neutron Tool Gamma Ray (Log) Gamma Ray Neutron log Gamma ray Spectroscopy Tool Gamma ray Through Tubing High resolution digital Dipmeter Tool Hostile Environment Logging High Resolution Temperature survey Induction Induction Induction Induction Electrical Log Electrical Survey Gamma Ray log Log
" "
Induction
"Deep "Medium
Spherically Focused Log
LAT
LDL (LDT) (=LDL)
LDQL
LDT
Lateral (resistivity tool) Litho Density Log Litho-Density Quick Look (well site Litho Density Tool Latero Log Latero Log Deep Experimental Latero Log Latero Log - Gamma ray - Neutron Latero Log Shallow Long Normal (resistivity tool) Long Spaced Sonic Log
computer
generated
product)
"
"
"
"+
Wave Train
Appendix
page 3
7.4
Abbrev. HCT (CPI) MCT MCT MECHPRO MFS ML MLL HSFL MUST N NDL NGS (NGT) NL NLL NML NPHI NTT OPR PAL PCT PFL (PFM) PHOT PL PLT PML PPS PSR PST QL RABR RFQL RFT RHOB RIG, RTGLOB RMT RTGLOB
SARABAND
Name Machine computation Tool (?) (Computer processed Synergetic Log Systems Mechanical Coring Tool Computer program for determining the mechanical of the formation Multiple Fluid Sample Hicro Log or combinable Micro Log Hicro Latero Log Micro Spherically Focused Log Multiple Usage Shut-off Tool Neutron Neutron Natural Neutron Neutron Nuclear Neutron Neutron Orienting log Decay Log Gamma ray Spectroscopy Log Lifetime Log Magnetism Log PHI (neutron porosity) Through Tubing PerfoRating service interpretation)
properties
Pipe Analysis Log Production Combination Tool Packer FLow meter PHOTon log. Proximity Log Production Logging Tool Proximity Micro Log Production Packer Service Packer Setting Record Production Sample Taker Quick Look (well site computer generated products)
Radio Active Bullet Record Repeat Formation tester Quick look (well generated product) Repeat Formation Tester RHO Bulk (bulk density) Computer programs of the GLOBAL type Reservoir Management Log see RIG above
site
computer-
,\-
Computer program for shaly sandstone lithologies Tubbing Cutter service Sonic Digital Tool induction Spherically Focussed Log Caliper logging Stratigraphic High resolution Dipmeter Tool Stuck-point Indicator Tool Sonic Log Long Spacing Sonic Short Normal Sidewall Neutron Porosity Spontaneous Potential
CD
Appendix
7.4
page 4
Name
Seismic Quick Look (well site Static Spontaneous Potential Sidewall Coring Sidewall Samples computer-generated product)
TDQL
TDT TS TTC ULSEL VD(L) VSP WF WLFT WSS WST
Temperature (- Gamma Ray log) Thermal Decay Quick Look (=CYBERSCAN, see Thermal Decay Time Tool Temperature Survey Through Tubing Caliper Ultra Variable Vertical Log Spacing Density Seismic Electrical Log Profile Log
above)
Wave Form. Density Wireline Formation Test Well Seismic Service Well Shoot Tool (Well Seismic
Tool)
(seismic
reference
service)
8. WL-Log
esponse Charts
G69238/f76
Ba.ck - up Scala a
50
\qo
150
200
Lt J.J
I I
MDI\)TMORILLD~JTE
I
~~CHlORITE
I I
I
POTASH PLRG.IOJLAJI:
I
Q RoGAN IC ~HALE
~kOALlN
245
WlICR
.
f lIMSrONE
DOLOMITE
GL~UC.D)J
"E
I I SAHD5TON
. ROC)('SA~ T I I I . . AHHYDRIH/GYP5UM I I
I
RJLY~RLI"E I
I I I c. RNALLlTE-
KAI~\T~-I
l
!
K/5ERITE
-rrr
RI2!apon~ Char~
LAN&&INITE ,2.7
I
I I
5 - 342
5Yi
VIlE 955 n
Ad4p~d
G69238/1~7
USIZ
LIME STONE
)Q
I I
!
I
I
I
!
I I
- ti)':(.~
I
j I
DOLOMITE
35
30
2S
20
15
JO
r
I
~
I
5.AND5TONE.
If
I
i
I
!
35 30
?~ -j
20
. i'
15
I
10
LCLAY
I
r~TT I
,i
I
I
I
SHALE
?
I
! I
I I I
CHLORITE
KAOLlI
It iT E CLAY
I I
ANHYDRITE
I
62 CARNALL!TE
IN li II E
I
CLA
MO~TMORLl.ONITE Ct.8
I
I
&.\9 GYPSUM
I
I
I I!!
~
I
~i
l
1
Tf
riS
F..R~
KA!NITE
i
I
j
'
.
il
6fAUf DNITE A
I
I I I I
I
.
1
I I HAll TE
I I
A SYLVITE:
l:1 LAN6BEI N JTt.
I I I
~L YHA~ITt
I I I
I
I
ill
I
COAL
I
ANTHRACITE
48
.
I
I
I
RClsponse
Cht1r~ SN P NEUTRON
LOG
~ -0 -0 (L)
:;, 0x'
! rv
G69238/178
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.3. J J~
I
2.4
2.5
2.6 5 1%
2.7
2..
2.9
,.
I
1
~ I
I
20
I!
D
10
I~ LL!H
I
LIMESTONE
30
2"S
20
15
or.. 95
I. 00
FRESH WATER I. 07 ~'W /75 ODD ppm I. 14 s'W ~50 000 ppm
DOLOMITE
35
30
25
20 H
15
10
r ~
Q~
I
I
1.3S
I I I I CAR/'IALLITE I I
~ 81SCHOFlTE
~-I
_n
~YLVITf
I
I
I
HI 6YPSUM
J(1!IJt ITt I I
POL Y10IALI T E.
LAN6&Elfi'TE
I I
[
CLAY
'COAL
I
.ISULPHUR
j QUAIHZ
CLAYSTONE /5 IALE
. I, NHYOQIT<
RasponSQ Char}.
C. FORMATION
DENSITY
LOG
hoJs
J> <:J <:J ro ::J Q. x CD
(jJ
. - --I.hu~
L-
den'ji/'y
minaralo:.
Sal~ wC1~armud sys~am Valu~s a.pply ~o punz ro,ks/m;n~rC1l~ only t1J1d in unC4ud ~_~a
apparanr dan!li~)'
~ radIo a.crjv~